Jaguar Land Rover IMC10ROW Infotainment Master Controller User Manual

Jaguar Land Rover Limited Infotainment Master Controller

Contents

user manual

XJOWNER'S HANDBOOKPublication Part No. JJM 10 02 34 161RFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ABOUT THIS HANDBOOKPlease take the time to study all of the owner/operator literature supplied with your vehicle as soonas possible.IMPORTANTThe information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment,some of which will not be fitted to your vehicle. Due to printing cycles this handbook may includedescriptions of options before they become generally available.The vehicle options, hardware and software, are designed for the market in which the vehicle isintended for original sale. If the vehicle is registered or used in another geographical area, it mayneed modifications to suit local requirements. Jaguar Land Rover Limited is not responsible for thecost of any modifications. Warranty conditions may be affected.The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Subsequent vehicledesign changes may result in a supplement being added to the literature pack. Updates can also beviewed on the internet site, http://www.ownerinfo.jaguar.com.In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipmentat any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,may not be reproduced nor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.SYMBOLS USED IN THIS HANDBOOKSafety warnings indicate either a procedure which must be followed precisely, orinformation that should be considered with great care, in order to avoid the possibilityof personal injury.Cautions indicate either a procedure which must be followed precisely, or information thatshould be considered with great care, in order to avoid the possibility of damage to yourvehicle.This recycling symbol identifies those items that must be disposed of safely in order toprevent unnecessary damage to the environment.This symbol indicates items that must be disposed of correctly, as they contain harmfulsubstances. Seek advice on disposal from your Retailer/Authorised Repairer and/or yourlocal authority.This symbol identifies those features that can be adjusted, disabled or enabled by yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.©Jaguar Land Rover Limited 2014.All rights reserved.2IntroductionLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Introduction......................................2Entering the vehicle..........................4Exiting the vehicle.............................9Front seats......................................13Rear seats.......................................16Head restraints...............................19Steering wheel................................22Seat belts........................................23Child safety.....................................28Airbags...........................................35Instrument panel.............................40Warning lamps...............................44Exterior lights.................................49Interior lights..................................52Wipers and washers.......................54Mirrors............................................56Garage door opener........................58Windows.........................................60Storage compartments...................63Luggage compartment....................65Starting the engine..........................70Intelligent stop/start........................72Gearbox..........................................74Stability control...............................76Suspension.....................................78Brakes.............................................79Automatic speed limiter (ASL)........81Cruise control.................................82Adaptive cruise control...................83Driving modes................................90Driving aids.....................................92Progress control system.................97Touch screen - Home...................100Touch screen - My home..............102Touch screen - Extra features.......104Touch screen - Settings................106Media overview.............................107AM/FM Radio................................114DAB radio.....................................116Portable media..............................118Television......................................126DVD player....................................128Dual view......................................130Headphones..................................132Rear seat screens.........................133Climate and comfort.....................136Parking features............................145Cameras........................................152Phone...........................................156Bluetooth®...................................161Navigation.....................................162Voice control.................................175Connectivity..................................177InControl.......................................179Fuel and refuelling........................184Maintenance.................................193Vehicle cleaning............................199Fluid level checks..........................203Vehicle battery..............................212Fuses............................................216Tyres.............................................226Tyre pressure monitoring system(TPMS).........................................231Tyre repair kit................................233Wheel changing............................237Vehicle recovery...........................240After a collision.............................241Vehicle labels................................243Technical specifications................244Type approval...............................252Index.............................................260Controls overview.........................2803ContentsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
UNLOCKING THE VEHICLETo prevent accidental or unauthorisedoperation, never leave children oranimals unattended in the vehicle. Thevehicle can be operated when theSmart key is inside the vehicle.While a door is open, the locking latchis exposed. Do not attempt to manuallyclose the latch as it may alsoautomatically ‘soft close’ and trapitems or body parts.1. Lock: Press the lock button to secure thevehicle. The vehicle can be Single or Doublelocked. See 9, SINGLE LOCKING and 9,DOUBLE LOCKING.2. Unlock: Your vehicle can be unlocked usingeither Single or Multi-point entry.When Single point entry is enabled, the firstpress unlocks the driver's door and enablesthe other doors to be opened from theinside. The hazard warning lamps will flashtwice to indicate that the vehicle is unlockedand the alarm has been disarmed. A secondpress unlocks the passenger doors and theluggage compartment.4Entering the vehicleLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
If Multi-point entry is enabled, press brieflyto unlock all of the doors and the luggagecompartment and to disarm the alarm. Thehazard warning lamps will flash twice toindicate that the vehicle is unlocked and thealarm has been disarmed.To change from Single to Multi-point entry(or vice versa), press both the lock andunlock buttons simultaneously for 3seconds. The hazard warning lamps willflash twice to confirm the change.The change can also be achieved using theInstrument panel menu.3. Press to open the luggage compartment.The vehicle security system will remainactive for the period that the luggagecompartment is open but the intrusion andinclination sensing systems will beinhibited. Door and bonnet security willremain active.The security system will re-arm to itsprevious state when the luggagecompartment is closed.4. Panic alarm: Press and hold for 3 seconds,or press 3 times within 3 seconds, toactivate the horn, siren and hazard lamps.After 5 seconds, the alarm can be cancelledby pressing the panic alarm button for 3seconds or by pressing the button 3 timeswithin 3 seconds.The emergency alarm will also be cancelledif the vehicle detects a valid Smart key whenthe START/STOP button is pressed.5. Press to switch on the approachillumination for up to 120 seconds. Theillumination time is set using the exit delayswitch. Pressing the button again oroperating the starter button will switch theapproach lamps off. See 49, LIGHTINGCONTROL.6. Keyless locking button. See 10, KEYLESSLOCKING.7. Emergency key cover: Slide and remove thecover to expose the emergency key.8. Emergency key: Slide the key to remove andthen unfold the handle.9. To unlock or lock the door in an emergency(if the Smart key or Keyless entry fail tooperate):• Insert the emergency key blade into theslot in the door lock cover.• Carefully lift the key blade to lever thecover off the retaining clips.• Insert the key blade into the exposedlock to operate.To lock: Make sure that all of the doorsare closed, then turn the key bladetowards the front of the vehicle andrelease. This will lock all of doors butwill not arm the alarm.To unlock: Turn the key blade towardsthe rear of the vehicle and release tounlock the door. If the security systemis disarmed, all the doors and theluggage compartment will be unlocked.Note: If the vehicle is unlocked using theemergency key blade with the securitysystem armed, the alarm will sound whena door is unlocked. To deactivate the alarm,press the unlock button on the Smart keyor press the engine START/STOP buttonwith the Smart key inside the vehicle.10. To replace the door lock cover:• Align the cover to engage the top 2clips.• Push the bottom of the cover to engagethe lower clip.5Entering the vehicleRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
KEYLESS ENTRYAny person fitted with an implantedmedical device should make sure thatthe device is kept at a distance of atleast 22 cm away from any transmittermounted in the vehicle. This is to avoidany possibility of interference betweenthe system and device.For information concerning thelocations of the security systemtransmitters, see 250, SMART KEYTRANSMITTER LOCATIONS.If a Smart key is lost, a replacement canbe obtained and reprogrammed to thevehicle by a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer. Notify a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer as soon as a Smart key is lostor stolen and have the remaining Smartkey(s) reprogrammed.Keyless entry allows the vehicle to be unlockedand disarmed by simply operating the doorhandle, provided the Smart key is within 1metre.The Smart key needs only to be on the driver’sperson; it does not need to be exposed orhandled. However, the Smart key may not bedetected if it is placed within a metal containeror is shielded by a device with a back-lit LCDscreen, such as a smart phone, laptop(including when inside a laptop bag), gameconsole etc. Keep the Smart key clear of suchdevices when attempting Keyless entry orKeyless starting.Note: Keyless entry will unlock the vehicle inaccordance with the current security setting(Single-point or Multi-point entry). However, ifSingle-point entry is the current setting and adoor other than the driver’s door is opened first,all doors will unlock.When all open doors have been closed, thesystem will search the vehicle interior for a validSmart key. If one is not detected, SMART KEYNOT FOUND, PLACE AS SHOWN will bedisplayed in the message centre. Find the Smartkey and place it against the fascia, below theauxiliary switch pack, see 71, KEYLESS STARTBACKUP.The security system fitted to your vehicle isThatcham category 1 approved, and meets EUregulations 97/116 and EU directive 95/56 EC.GLOBAL OPENINGPress and hold the unlock button for 3 seconds.The vehicle will unlock and the alarm will bedisarmed immediately. After 3 seconds, all ofthe windows will open. This feature can beenabled/disabled via the Instrument panel menu.To stop the windows from opening/closingduring the Global opening/closing operation,press any of the buttons on the Smart key oroperate the driver’s window switch. To stop aparticular window from opening, operate therelevant window switch.Note: Global opening is disabled on a windowif the electric sun blind is in the up position.For Global closing, see 10, GLOBAL CLOSING.DRIVE-AWAY LOCKINGLocks all of the doors when the vehicle exceeds8 km/h (5 mph). Use of the central locking/unlocking buttons (see 280, DRIVERCONTROLS) will override the Drive-away lockingfeature for the rest of a journey.If a door is individually unlocked and opened,all of the doors will relock when the open dooris subsequently closed.Note: Drive-away locking can be enabled/disabled via the Settings area of the instrumentpanel menu.6Entering the vehicleLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CONVENIENCE MODEWhen the door is opened using either the Smartkey or Keyless entry, the vehicle's electricalsystem initiates the Convenience mode. Thefollowing systems become functional:• Driver position memory.• Seat and steering column adjustment.• Interior and exterior lighting.• Message centre.• Auxiliary power socket.STEERING COLUMN LOCKYour vehicle is fitted with an electronic steeringcolumn lock. The column unlocks when a Smartkey is detected inside the vehicle.If any malfunction of the steering column lockoccurs, STEERING COLUMN LOCKED will bedisplayed in the message centre. If this occurs:1. Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmart key.2. Try again to unlock the steering columnlock, by turning the steering wheel gentlyto the left and right while locking and thenunlocking the vehicle using the Smart key.3. If the problem persists, seek qualifiedassistance immediately.REMOTE KEY FOB CARETo prevent accidental operation, whichmay result in an injury, never leave theSmart key in the vehicle if children oranimals are also left in the vehicle.Do not expose to extremes of heat, dust,humidity or allow contact with fluids. Donot leave the transmitter exposed todirect sunlight.The emergency key number is recorded on anattached label. Peel off the label and attach it tothe designated area on the Security Card,supplied in the literature pack. Keep the SecurityCard safe, but not in the vehicle.The operational range of the Smart key will varyconsiderably depending on atmosphericconditions and interference from othertransmitting devices.Note: The radio frequency used by the Smartkey may be used by other devices (e.g. medicalequipment). This may prevent the Smart keyfrom operating correctly.REMOTE KEY FOB BATTERYREPLACEMENTWhen the battery needs replacing, there will bea significant decrease in the effective range andthe message SMART KEY BATTERY LOW isdisplayed in the Message centre.To replace the battery:7Entering the vehicleRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
1. Slide the cover in the direction of the arrowuntil a click is heard. Remove the cover.2. Use the emergency key blade to separatethe Smart key body.3. Fit a new and unused CR2032 type battery(available from a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer), with the positive (+) sideupwards.Note: Handle a new battery with the outer edge.Avoid touching the top and bottom faces of thenew battery, as moisture/oil from your fingerscan reduce battery life and corrode the contacts.If skin contact is made clean with a lint freecloth.Note: If the low battery warning does notextinguish this indicates that the replacementbattery is not in a new and unused condition.Refit the parts in the reverse order, ensuringthat they click securely into place.Battery disposal: Used batteriesmust be disposed of correctly, asthey contain harmful substances.Seek advice on disposal from aRetailer/Authorised Repairer and/ora local authority.8Entering the vehicleLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DOOR LOCKS AND RELEASE LEVERSWhile a door is open, the locking latchis exposed. Do not attempt to manuallyclose the latch as it may alsoautomatically ‘soft close’ and trapitems or body parts.1. Unlock:• Press any unlock button to unlock allof the doors. Alternatively, pull eitherfront door release handle (3) once tounlock all of the doors.• Pull either rear door release handleonce to unlock the individual rear door.Note: The unlock button is inhibitedwhen the vehicle is locked with theSmart key.2. Lock: With all the doors closed, press anylock button to lock all of the doors.3. Door release handle: Pull to unlock andopen the door. If the door is locked, pullingeither front door handle once will unlock allof the doors. Pulling either rear door handleonce will unlock the individual rear door.Note: When activated, the Rear child securityswitch (located on the driver’s door switchpack) will inhibit the rear door lock and unlockbuttons and the rear door release handles. See28, CHILD SAFETY LOCKS.SINGLE LOCKINGPress the lock button briefly. Single lockingsecures the vehicle and prevents the doors andluggage compartment being opened fromoutside of the vehicle. The doors can beunlocked and opened from inside the vehicle.The hazard warning lamps will flash once asconfirmation.DOUBLE LOCKINGNever Double lock the vehicle withpeople, children or pets inside. In theevent of an emergency they would beunable to escape, and the emergencyservices would be unable to releasethem quickly.When the vehicle is Double locked thedoors cannot be opened, either frominside or outside the vehicle.Press the lock button twice within 3 seconds.Double locking secures the vehicle and preventsthe doors and luggage compartment from beingunlocked or opened from inside or outside ofthe vehicle, except with the correct Smart key.The hazard warning lamps will flash twice (witha long second flash) and an audible warningwill sound as confirmation.The audible warning can be enabled/disabled by your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.LOCK CONFIRMATIONIf you are uncertain whether the vehicle islocked and armed (either by Single or Doublelocking), press the lock button again. The hazardwarning lights will flash to indicate and confirmthe current lock status.Note: If the vehicle is not already locked andarmed, pressing the lock button will Single lockthe vehicle. Press again to Double lock.9Exiting the vehicleRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
MISLOCKIf one of the doors, the bonnet or the luggagecompartment are not shut fully when the vehicleis locked using the Smart key or by Keylesslocking, the vehicle will not lock and 2 warningtones will sound. Check that all doors, thebonnet and the luggage compartment are closedproperly and lock the vehicle again.If one or more of the doors fails to lock properlywhen a lock attempt is made using the Smartkey, 2 warning tones will sound and one ormore of the doors may not be locked.Note: Operating the interior or exterior doorhandles, while attempting to unlock, lock, orchange the child lock status of the vehicle(including Drive-away locking), may cause thesecurity system to ignore any unlock, lock, orchild lock requests.GLOBAL CLOSINGMake sure that no children, pets, orobstructions are in any open aperturebefore operating Global closing.Make sure that all of the doors are closed, thenpress and hold the lock button on the Smart keyfor 3 seconds. Alternatively, press and hold thelock button on the door handle. The vehicle willsingle lock and the alarm will be fully armedimmediately. After 3 seconds, all of the windowswill close.Note: If the button on the door handle isreleased before the windows have fully closed,the windows will stop closing.KEYLESS LOCKINGRemove all Smart keys and emergencykey blades from the vehicle when it isleft unattended. This will help preventthe alarm being disarmed and thereforehelp prevent theft.The Smart key may not be detected if itis placed within a metal container or ifit is shielded by a device with a back-litLCD screen, such as a smart phone,laptop (including when inside a laptopbag), game console etc.The vehicle will not lock automatically.To Single lock the vehicle, press the button onthe door handle once. The hazard warning lampswill flash once as confirmation (in somemarkets, an audible warning will sound).To Double lock the vehicle, press the buttontwice within 3 seconds. The hazard warninglamps will flash twice (with a long second flash).In some markets, a double audible warning willsound.Note: Keyless locking will only activate if all ofthe doors, bonnet and the luggage compartmentare closed and the Smart key is outside thevehicle. If the above conditions are not met, 2audible error warnings will sound.FULL ALARMTo set full alarm protection, make sure that allthe windows and the sunroof are closed. Onvehicles fitted with Double locking, press thelock button twice within 3 seconds. The hazardwarning lights will flash twice to confirm thealarm state and, in some markets, an audibletone will sound.Note: If the alarm is armed and a window or thesunroof are left open, the alarm may sound dueto movement of air currents, detected by theintrusion sensors in the front interior lightconsole.The intrusion sensors can be temporarilydisabled, for the next time the vehicle is locked,via the Vehicle Set-up area of the Instrumentpanel menu.10Exiting the vehicleLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PERIMETER ALARMTo set Perimeter alarm protection, press thelock button. The hazard warning lamps will flashto confirm the alarm state.BATTERY-BACKED SOUNDERIn certain markets, a separate battery backedsounder is fitted. This device will sound thealarm if the vehicle battery or the alarm sounderis disconnected when the security system isarmed.DEACTIVATING THE ALARM WHENTRIGGEREDIf the alarm has been triggered, it can bedeactivated by any one of the followingmethods:• Pressing the unlock button on the Smartkey.• Opening a door using Keyless entry.• Pressing the START/STOP button with avalid Smart key present.TILT SENSORThe Tilt sensor detects any change in thevehicle's angle to the ground. When the alarmis armed and the vehicle Double locked, anychange in the vehicle's angle will activate thetilt alarm.Note: The tilt sensors can be temporarilydisabled, for the next time the vehicle is locked,via the Vehicle Set-up area of the Instrumentpanel menu.PASSIVE ARMINGThis vehicle is fitted with a passive armingfeature which can, if enabled, automatically armthe anti-theft system. Passive arming willautomatically arm the perimeter alarm system60 seconds after the driver's door is closed,provided all doors, bonnet and luggagecompartment are closed, the ignition is switchedoff and there are no valid Smart keys inside thevehicle.Passive arming will not lock the vehicle,although access to the luggage compartmentvia the interior or exterior release buttons willbe prevented and the fuel filler flap will belocked.Passive arming can be enabled/disabled by your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.AUTOMATIC RE-LOCKING AND RE-ARMING OF THE ALARMAutomatic relock and re-arm is a feature which,if enabled, automatically relocks the vehicle andarms the anti-theft system.If the vehicle is in a locked and armed state andthe remote unlock button is pressed, but noneof the doors or the luggage compartment areopened within 40 seconds, the vehicle willautomatically relock all the doors and theluggage compartment and will re-arm the alarmsystem.Note: Automatic relocking and arming will onlyrelock and arm to the last locked and armedstate.Automatic relocking and re-armingcan be enabled/disabled by yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.11Exiting the vehicleRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SENSOR FAULTSIf the security systems detect a fault with oneof the security sensors, an error tone will soundfrom the alarm after the vehicle is unlocked anddisarmed. If this condition occurs, please visityour Retailer/Authorised Repairer forrectification.EMERGENCY LOCKINGIn the event of the battery discharging or a faultoccurring with the Keyless locking system, thedoors must be locked manually.All unlocked doors, except the driver’s door,should be locked using the following procedure.Finally the driver’s door should be locked viathe external door lock. See 4, UNLOCKINGTHE VEHICLE.Note: Do not leave the emergency key blade inthe vehicle at any point during the emergencylocking procedure.1. Open the door and locate the emergencylock access cover. There is a small chamferon the back of the cover; using a finger nail,push up and away from the door to removethe cover.2. Insert the emergency key blade firmly intothe emergency lock until a click is heard.The emergency key blade can now beremoved.Note: The emergency key blade is stowedin the Smart key. See 4, UNLOCKING THEVEHICLE.3. Replace the emergency lock access coverby fitting the lower clip first, then pushingthe cover until it clicks into place.4. Close the door and check to make sure thedoor is locked.Repeat the procedure for all other unlockeddoors.12Exiting the vehicleLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ELECTRIC SEATSDo not adjust the seat while the vehicleis moving. Doing so could cause a lossof vehicle control and personal injury.1. Cushion length adjustment.2. Bolster adjustment (inflate/deflate).13Front seatsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
3. Lumbar support adjustment.4. Seatback angle adjustment.5. Head restraint height adjustment.6. Height adjustment.7. Forward and rearward adjustment.8. Cushion front tilt adjustment.To adjust the seats, the Smart key must be inthe vehicle and the ignition switched on.If an obstruction is encountered while the seatis in motion, the seat will stop moving andfurther movement will be restricted until reset.To reset the seat:1. Remove the obstruction.2. Adjust the seat to the point wheremovement is restricted.3. Press and hold the switch for at least 2seconds to override the restriction.PASSENGER SEAT AWAYWhen fitted, the driver can adjust the positionof the front passenger seat. Press for forwardor rearward adjustment.Note: Passenger seat away will not function ifthe front passenger seat belt is fastened.DRIVING POSITION MEMORY1. Memory set button.2. Memory presets.Once you have adjusted the driver's seat,steering column (22, ADJUSTING THESTEERING WHEEL) and exterior mirrors (56,EXTERIOR MIRRORS) the vehicle can memorisethese settings using the driver memory buttons.Once the passenger seat has been adjusted,these settings can be memorised using thepassenger memory buttons.1. Press the memory set button to activate thememory function.2. Press one of the preset buttons within 5seconds to memorise the current settings.For the driver’s settings, MEMORY 1 (2 or3) SETTINGS SAVED will be displayed onthe message centre accompanied by anaudible chime to confirm the settings havebeen memorised.A seat position can only be memorised duringthe 5 second period.Any existing settings for a memory preset willbe over-written when programming a memoryposition.14Front seatsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
RECALLING A MEMORISED POSITIONPress the appropriate memory preset button(for the driver’s settings, MEMORY 1 (2 or 3)SETTINGS RECALLED will be displayed in theMessage centre).RESTRICTED SEAT TRAVELIf an obstruction is encountered while the seatis in motion, the seat will stop moving andfurther movement will be restricted until reset.To reset the seat:1. Remove the obstruction.2. Adjust the seat to the point wheremovement is restricted.3. Press and hold the switch for at least 2seconds to override the restriction.SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITIONThe driver and front passenger mustnot ride with the seat fully reclined.Do not adjust the seat while the vehicleis moving.The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags,all contribute to the protection of the user.Correct use of these components will give yougreater protection, therefore you should observethe following points:1. Sit in an upright position, with the base ofyour spine as far back as possible. Toachieve optimum benefit of the seat belt inthe event of an accident, do not recline theseat excessively.2. Do not move the driver's seat too close tothe steering wheel. Ideally, a minimumdistance of 254 mm is recommendedbetween the breastbone and the steeringwheel airbag cover. Hold the steering wheelin the correct position with your armsslightly bent.3. Adjust the head restraint so that the top ofthe head restraint is above the centre lineof the head.4. Position the seat belt so that it is mid-waybetween your neck and your shoulder. Fitthe strap tightly across your hips, notacross your stomach.Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and enables you to maintain fullcontrol of the vehicle.TOUCH SCREEN SEAT COMFORT ANDADJUSTMENTThe front and rear seat heating or coolingtemperature and the driver's remote adjustmentof the seating positions, can all be controlledfrom the front Touch screen. See 141, SEATCOMFORT AND ADJUSTMENT.15Front seatsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
EXECUTIVE CLASS SEATS1. Lumbar support adjustment.2. Forward and rearward seat adjustment.Note: This is a 4-way switch when used tooperate the front passenger seat. The switchis then used to adjust the forward andbackward movement plus the raising andlowering of the seat. See item (4).3. Seatback angle adjustment.4. Front passenger seat adjustment: Press toselect and then use switches (2) and (3) tomake the required adjustments.REAR SEAT POSITION MEMORY1. Press and hold the switch to return the rearseat to the home position to allow easierentry and exit.2. Memory set button.3. Memory presets.Once you have adjusted the rear seats (see 16,EXECUTIVE CLASS SEATS) the vehicle canmemorise these settings using the rear seatmemory buttons.1. Press the memory set button to activate thememory function.2. Press one of the preset buttons within 5seconds to memorise the current settings.A seat position can only be memorised duringthe 5 second period.Any existing settings for a memory preset willbe over-written when programming a memoryposition.16Rear seatsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
REAR SEAT MASSAGE1. Massage: Press to switch the massagefunction on/off.2. Press to select rolling wave.3. Press to select lumbar wave.4. Press to select shoulder wave.Note: The massage programs have a 10 minutecycle, which will need to be re-selected forrepeated use.The Rear seat massage can also be set via thefront Touch screen and rear seat screens. See142, SEAT MASSAGE.REAR SEAT SCREEN - SEAT COMFORTThe rear seat heating or cooling temperatureand rear seat massage can all be controlled fromthe rear screens. See 141, SEAT COMFORT ANDADJUSTMENT.FOLDING TABLEIf the vehicle is involved in anaccident, or subject to sudden brakingor direction change, loose items on thetable can cause serious injury.Stow the table when not in use.To open the table: Pull the table by the handle(1) and then pull the underneath front edge ofthe table (2) to guide it in to it's final horizontalposition (3).To close the table: Pull the front edgeunderneath of the table down and then push thetable into the closed position.REAR SEAT SAFETYNever allow passengers to travel in theluggage compartment under anycircumstances.17Rear seatsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
All vehicle occupants should be seatedcorrectly, and wear a seat belt at alltimes when the vehicle is in motion.Do not cover the ventilation ventslocated in the parcel shelf behind therear head restraint.18Rear seatsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTSAdjust the head restraint so that thetop of the head restraint is above thecentre line of the head. An incorrectlyadjusted head restraint increases therisk of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision.It is posible to swivel the head restraintforwards or backwards. For greaterprotection in the event of a collision,the head restraint should be adjustedso that it is as close to the back of thehead as is practical.Never adjust the head restraint whilethe vehicle is in motion.ELECTRIC FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTSFollow the instructions for the design of headrestraint fitted to your vehicle.1. To adjust the height of the head restraint,see 13, ELECTRIC SEATS2. To adjust the angle of the head restraint,press the locking button on the side of therestraint and tilt to the desired position.Note: There is no angle adjustment on ahead restraint where a DVD screen is fitted.1. Pull the wing heads forward into the first orsecond position.2. Rotate the head restraint to adjust the angle.Note: There is no angle adjustment on ahead restraint where a DVD screen is fitted.3. To adjust the height of the head restraint,see 13, ELECTRIC SEATSNote: It is not possible to remove the electricfront head restraints.MANUAL FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS1. To raise, pull the restraint upwards, it willclick and lock in position.Note: Do not try to raise the head restraintfurther than the third adjustment position.2. To lower, depress the locking collar andpush down on the restraint.3. To adjust the angle of the head restraint,press the locking collar on the side of therestraint and tilt to the desired position.19Head restraintsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The head restraint can only be removedif the seat is moved forward or back to createmore space.To remove the head restraint, adjust the angleof the back of the seat forward or back to createmore space. Press both locking collars at thesame time and lift the restraint out of the seat.Do not drive or carry passengers withthe head restraint removed from anoccupied seat. The absence of acorrectly adjusted head restraintincreases the risk of neck injury in theevent of a collision.WARNING: Always store a removedhead restraint securely.REAR HEAD RESTRAINTSIt is possible to swivel the headrestraint forwards or backwards. Forgreater protection in the event of acollision, the head restraint should beadjusted so that it is as close to theback of the head as is practical.Follow the instructions for the design of headrestraint fitted to your vehicle.1. To raise, pull the restraint upwards, it willclick and lock in position.2. To lower, depress the locking collar andpush down on the restraint.3. To adjust the angle of the head restraint,press the locking collar on the side of therestraint and tilt to the desired position.4. To adjust the centre head restraint, tilt therestraint forward.5. Raise or lower the centre head restraint asrequired. The restraint can be locked in 1of 3 height positions.Note: Do not use the locking collars to raise orlower the centre head restraint.20Head restraintsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
1. Pull the wing heads forward into the first orsecond position.2. To raise, pull the restraint upwards, it willclick and lock in only one position.Note: Do not try to raise the head restraintfurther than the one adjustment position.3. To lower, depress both the locking collarsat the same time.REAR HEAD RESTRAINT REMOVALDo not drive or carry passengers withthe head restraint removed from anoccupied seat. The absence of acorrectly adjusted head restraintincreases the risk of neck injury in theevent of a collision.If the centre rear head restraint isremoved to allow the fitting of a childseat. Always store the removed headrestraint securely.It is possible to remove the centre rear headrestraint, if necessary, to enable the fitment ofa child restraint:1. Raise the head restraint to its uppermostposition.2. Press both locking collars.3. Lift the head restraint out of the seat.Make sure that the head restraint is refitted oncethe child seat is removed.Note: It is not possible to remove either the leftor right rear head restraints.To refit the head restraint, make sure it is facingin the correct direction, insert the stems of thehead restraint into the sockets and push itdownwards until at least the first click.21Head restraintsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEELNever adjust the steering wheel whilethe vehicle is moving.Do not use steering wheel mountedsecurity devices. Movement of thesteering wheel in Exit and Entry mode,could result in damage to the vehicle orpossible injury to the occupant.The steering wheel can be adjusted for tilt andreach as follows:• Move the control forwards or rearwards toadjust reach.• Move the switch up or down to adjust tilt.Up to 3 steering wheel positions can be storedand recalled, along with seat and exterior mirrorpositions, by the Driving position memory. See14, DRIVING POSITION MEMORY.ENTRY AND EXIT MODEWith the steering column adjustment control inthe AUTO position, the steering column willmove to provide easier entry and exit from thevehicle, as follows:•Exit: When the driver’s door is opened, thesteering column will move to the uppermosttilt position.•Entry: When the driver’s door is closed andthe ignition is switched on, the steeringcolumn will return to its previously selecteddriving position.Note: If the column control is moved away fromAUTO when the column is in the Exit position,the column will still move back to its previousdriving position when the driver’s door is closedand the ignition is switched on.Note: If the column is manually adjusted duringEntry or Exit operation, column movement willstop.HEATED STEERING WHEELTo activate the heated steeringwheel, press the switch, see 280,DRIVER CONTROLS. Press again toswitch off.22Steering wheelLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
USING THE SEAT BELTS1. Putting on a seat belt: Draw the belt outsmoothly, making sure that the belt height,the seat and your position on the seat arecorrect.When correctly positioned, the seat beltshould cross the collar bone at themid-point between the neck and the end ofyour shoulder.Where possible, rear seat passengersshould adjust their seating position toachieve the same seat belt position.2. Fastening a seat belt: With the seat beltcorrectly positioned, place the metal tongueinto the buckle nearest to you. Press it inuntil a click is heard.To release the seat belt, press the redbutton.Note: When releasing the seat belt, it isadvisable to hold the belt before pressingthe release button. This will prevent the beltfrom retracting too quickly.3. Seat belt use during pregnancy: Positionthe lap strap comfortably across the hips,beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonalpart of the seat belt between the breastsand to the side of the abdomen.Position the seat belt correctly for thesafety of the mother and unborn child.Never wear just the lap strap, andnever sit on the lap strap while usingjust the shoulder strap. Both of theseactions are extremely dangerous, andmay increase your risk of serious injuryin the event of an accident or duringemergency braking.Never place anything between you andthe seat belt in an attempt to cushionthe impact in the event of an accident.It can be dangerous, and will reducethe effectiveness of the seat belt inpreventing injury.4. Seat belt height adjustment: Press torelease the catch.23Seat beltsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
With the catch pressed, move themechanism up or down to the requiredheight. Make sure the locking mechanismhas engaged.When correctly positioned, the seat beltshould cross the collar bone at themid-point between the neck and the end ofyour shoulder.Where possible, rear seat passengersshould adjust their seating position toachieve the same seat belt position.Make sure the seat belt height iscorrectly adjusted and the mechanismis locked in place before driving.Maladjustment of the seat belt couldreduce its effectiveness in a crash. Donot attempt to adjust the seat beltheight once the vehicle is in motion.Doing so may cause you to lose controlof the vehicle, or incorrectly adjust theseat belt.Do not use comfort clips or otherdevices that would create slack in theseat belt system.No modifications or additions shouldbe made by the user which will eitherprevent the seat belt adjusting devicesfrom operating to remove slack, orprevent the seat belt assembly frombeing adjusted to remove slack. Aslack seat belt offers a greatly reducedlevel of occupant protection in animpact.Seat belts are designed to bear uponthe bony structure of the body andshould be worn low across the front ofthe pelvis, chest and shoulders, asapplicable; wearing the lap section ofthe belt across the abdominal areamust be avoided.Seat belts should be adjusted as firmlyas possible, consistent with comfort,to provide the protection for which theyhave been designed. A slack belt willgreatly reduce the protection affordedto the wearer.Make sure that any belt positioningsliders are adjusted so as not tointroduce slack.Belts should not be worn with strapstwisted. Each belt assembly must onlybe used by one occupant; it isdangerous to put a belt around a childbeing carried on the occupant’s lap.Riding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a collisionor sudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts andairbags) is greatly reduced by recliningyour seat. Seat belts must be snugagainst your hips and chest to workproperly. The more the seatback isreclined, the greater the chance thatan occupant's hips will slide under thelap belt or the occupant's neck willstrike the shoulder belt. Drivers andpassengers should always sit well backin their seats, properly belted and withthe seatbacks upright.The airbag Supplementary RestraintSystem (SRS) is designed to add to theoverall effectiveness of the seat belts.It does not replace them. Seat beltsmust always be worn.Seat belts should be worn by allvehicle occupants, for every trip, nomatter how short. Failure to do so willgreatly increase the risk of death orserious injury in the event of anaccident.24Seat beltsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Never wear just the lap belt or just theshoulder belt of a lap/shoulderdiagonal seat belt. Both of theseactions are extremely dangerous andmay increase your risk of injury.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERSThe seat belt pre-tensioners activate inconjunction with the Supplementary RestraintSystem (SRS) to provide additional protectionin the event of a severe frontal impact. Theyautomatically reduce any slack in a seat belt toreduce forward movement of a front seatoccupant.The seat belt pre-tensioners willactivate only once and then must bereplaced. Failure to replace them willreduce the effectiveness of the SRS inreducing the risk of serious injury ordeath in the event of an accident.After any impact, have the seat beltsand pre-tensioners checked and, ifnecessary, replaced by a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.SEAT BELT SAFETYEach seat in the vehicle will have a dedicatedseat belt. Each seat belt is designed for anindividual seat occupant, aged older than 12years, or with a body mass greater than 36 kg.Occupants with a lower age, or a lower bodymass, should use an appropriate child restraint.See 29, CHILD SEAT POSITIONING.The front seat belts are equipped with a loadlimiter. This will help to regulate theover-tension of a seat belt in a severe impact,to help reduce the possibility of injury to theoccupant.A seat belt should be replaced if thewebbing becomes frayed,contaminated or damaged.It is essential to replace the entireassembly after it has been worn in asevere impact, even if damage to theassembly is not obvious.If any damage, wear, cuts, defects, orimpaired operation are noted with theseat belts, the vehicle should be takento a Retailer/Authorised Repairer forimmediate attention. Do not use thevehicle if the seat belts cannot beoperated correctly.Seat belts should be inspected orreplaced by qualified personnel only.All replacement parts should be, atleast, the same specification as thevehicle's original equipment. If indoubt, consult a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.Do not attempt to service, repair,replace, modify, or tamper with, anypart of the vehicle's seat belts; doingso may render the seat belts asineffective.Care should be taken to avoidcontamination of the webbing withpolishes, oils and chemicals, andparticularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mild soapand water. Contaminated seat beltsmay not operate correctly in an impactand cannot be relied upon.When using seat belts to restrain itemsother than occupants, make sure thebelts are not damaged, or exposed tosharp edges.Do not carry hard, fragile, or sharpitems between your person and theseat belt. In an impact, the pressureon such items can cause them to break,which in turn may cause death orserious injury.25Seat beltsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SEAT BELT CHECKSNote: If the vehicle is parked on an incline, theseat belt mechanism may lock. This is a safetyfeature and the belt should be gently eased outfrom the upper anchorage.The seat belts should be inspected regularly tocheck for fraying, cuts, wear to the webbing,and the condition and security of themechanism, buckles, adjusters, and mountingpoints.• With the seat belt fastened, give thewebbing near the buckle a quick upwardpull. The buckle must remain securelylocked.• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel theseat belt to the limit of its travel. Check thatit unreels smoothly with no snatches orsnags. Allow the belt to fully retract, againchecking for smooth operation.• Partially unreel the seat belt, then hold thetongue plate and give a quick forward pull.The mechanism must lock and prevent anyfurther unreeling.If any of the seat belts fail to meetthose criteria, immediately contactyour Retailer/Authorised Repairer.SEAT BELT REMINDERSeat belt reminder commences when the vehicleis in motion and the driver's seat belt isunbuckled. Dependent on the market, an audiblechime sounds and the warning indicator in theInstrument panel illuminates. See 45, SEATBELT (RED). The visual and audible warningsapplicable to the Seat belt reminder feature aremarket dependent, to meet individual marketrequirements. The warning signals given mayalso change, depending on whether the vehicleis stationary or when the vehicle's speedexceeds a predetermined threshold. In certainmarkets, the Seat belt reminder feature alsoapplies to the front passenger seat.A graphic displayed in the Message centreindicates which seat belts are fastened at thestart of a journey, and also when a seat belt isfastened or unfastened during a journey.Each seating position is represented by apassenger icon, the colour of which indicatesthe seat belt status:• Green - seat belt, in the indicated position,is fastened.26Seat beltsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• Red - seat belt, in the indicated position,has been unfastened while the vehicle'signition is on. This indicator will turn greyafter 30 seconds.• Grey - seat belt not fastened.Note: The indicators will be displayed for 30seconds each time there is a status change, e.g.,a seat belt is unfastened or fastened, or a dooris opened and then closed.In addition, an audible warning will sound underthe following conditions:• The seat belt of an occupied front seat isnot fastened or is unfastened during ajourney.• A rear seat belt is unfastened.Note: If a heavy object is placed on the frontpassenger seat, it may activate the Seat beltminder feature. It is recommended that anyobjects placed on the front passenger seat aresecured using the seat belt.27Seat beltsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CHILD SAFETY LOCKSIf children are to be carried in the rear seatpositions, it is recommended that the rear doorinterior handles are disabled.Press the switch to activate the child door locksand to also inhibit the rear windows. The LEDindicator will illuminate when active and amessage will be displayed in the Messagecentre.To switch off, press the switch again. The LEDlamp will extinguish and a message will displayin the Message centre.CHILD SEATSFor optimum safety, children shouldtravel in the rear of the vehicle at alltimes; front passenger seat travel isnot recommended. However, if it isessential that a child travels in thefront (not permitted in Australia), setthe vehicle's seat fully rearward andseat the child in an approvedforward-facing child seat. Do not usea rearward-facing child seat - aninflating airbag could impact with theseat and cause serious injury.Do not use a forward-facing child seatuntil the child using it is above theminimum weight of 9 kg and able to situp unaided. Up to the age of two, achild's spine and neck are notsufficiently developed to avoid injuryin a frontal impact.Do not allow a baby or infant to be heldor carried on the lap. The force of acrash can increase effective bodyweight by as much as thirty times,making it impossible to hold onto thechild. At all times, children should berestrained in age and size appropriatechild seats to reduce the risk of deathor serious injury in a crash.Children could be endangered in acrash if their child restraints are notproperly secured in the vehicle. Alwaysfollow the instructions that accompanythe child seat carefully.Children typically require the use of abooster seat appropriate to their ageand size, thereby enabling the seatbelts to be properly fitted, reducing therisk of injury in a crash. Children couldbe endangered in a crash if their childrestraints are not properly secured inthe vehicle.Do not use a child seat that hooks overthe seatback. This type of seat cannotbe satisfactorily secured and is unlikelyto be safe for your child.The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are designedfor adults and larger children. For their safety,it is very important for all infants and childrenunder 12 years of age to be restrained in asuitable child safety seat, appropriate to theirage and size.28Child safetyLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
If it is essential that a child travels in the frontpassenger seat (and national or state legislationpermits this), Jaguar Land Rover Limitedrecommends that the following preparationsare made before fitting the child restraint:• Adjust the front passenger seat fullyrearwards.• Adjust the lumbar support to its minimumsupport position.• Adjust the seat cushion to its highestposition. If cushion front tilt adjustment ispossible, adjust it to its lowest position.• Adjust the seatback to an upright positionto support the child restraint.• Adjust the seat belt upper anchorage to itslowest position.Extreme hazard! Do not use a rearwardfacing child restraint on a seatprotected by an airbag in front of it!NEVER use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH orSERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD canoccur.This symbol, affixed to the front door B-post onthe passenger side, warns against the use of arearward-facing child seat in the front passengerseat, when a front passenger airbag is fitted andoperational.This symbol, affixed to the passenger sidesun-visor, warns against the use of arearward-facing child seat in the front passengerseat, when a front passenger airbag is fitted andoperational.CHILD SEAT POSITIONINGCrash statistics show that children aresafest when properly restrained in achild or infant restraint system that issecured in a rear seating position.Seat belts (or suitable child restraints)should be used by all vehicleoccupants, for every trip, no matterhow short. Failure to do so will greatlyincrease the risk of death or seriousinjury in the event of an accident.Information given within the table is correct atthe time of going to press. However, availabilityof child restraints may change. Please consultyour Retailer/Authorised Repairer for the latestrecommendation.Note: The information contained in the followingtable may not be applicable to all countries. Ifyou are in any doubt regarding the type andfitment of child seats, seek advice from yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.Note: Ages given are approximate. In case ofdoubt, the child’s weight, not age, should beused when considering an appropriate childseat.29Child safetyRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The legislation which governs how andwhere children should be carried when travellingin a vehicle, is subject to change. It is theresponsibility of the driver to comply with allregulations in force.Seating positionsMass groupRearcentre***Rear centreRearoutboard**Frontpassenger*XUUX0 = Up to 10 kg0 to 9 monthsXUUX0+ = Up to 13 kg0 to 18 monthsXUUUFI = 9 to 18 kg9 months to 4 yearsXUUUFII = 15 to 25 kg4 to 9 yearsXUUUFIII = 22 to 36 kg8 to 12 yearsU= Suitable for universal category restraintsapproved for this mass group.UF = Suitable for forward-facing Universalcategory restraints approved for this massgroup.X= Not suitable for child restraint fitment in thismass group.* The front passenger seat should be positionedfully rearward, the seat cushion to its highestposition and the seatback adjusted to an uprightposition to support the child restraint. If thehead restraint has been removed, make surethat it is refitted before the seat is used by apassenger.** For vehicles fitted with adjustable secondrow seats, adjust the seatback to the uprightposition to support the child restraint.*** For vehicles fitted with Executive class rearseats, the centre position is unsuitable for bothforward and rearward-facing child seats.When installing a child seat in the rear, the frontseat must be moved forward and upwards toinstall any rearward-facing child seat. Care mustbe taken not to load any part of the child seatwhen repositioning the front seat. The spaceavailable for front seat occupants will bereduced by the installation of anyrearward-facing child seat.30Child safetyLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ISOFIX Child seat positioningRecommendedchild restraintsystemSecond rowoutboard seatsFixturesSize classesMass group as shown on thechild restraint-XISO/L1FCarrycot-XISO/L2GBritax/RömerBaby Safe Pluswith Baby-SafeISOFIX BaseILISO/R1E0Up to 10 kg0 to 9 monthsILISO/R1E0+ Up to 13 kg0 to 18 months-ILISO/R2D-ILISO/R3C-ILISO/R2DI9 to 18 kg9 months to 4 years -ILISO/R3CBritax/RömerBaby Duo PlusIUFISO/F2BIUFISO/F2XB1IUFISO/F3A----II/III 15 to 36 kg4 to 12 yearsIUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraintsystems of universal category, approved for usein this mass group.IL = These ISOFIX child restraint systems areof the specific vehicle, restricted orsemi-universal categories.X= Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraintfitment in this mass group.Note: The information contained in the abovetable may not be applicable to all countries. Ifyou are in any doubt regarding the type andfitment of child seats, seek advice from yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.Note: Ages given are approximate. In case ofdoubt, the child’s weight, not age, should beused when considering an appropriate childseat.Note: ISOFIX anchorages are provided forsecond row outer seating positions. ISOFIXchild restraints should be securely attached,following the manufacturer’s instructions atthese locations only.RECOMMENDED CHILD SEATSRecommended seatChild size/ageBritax/Römer Baby SafePlusGroups 0 and 0+Britax/Römer Duo PlusGroup IBritax/Römer Kid PlusGroup II and III31Child safetyRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTEvery time a child travels in the vehicle, observethe following:• Use appropriate child restraints.• Carefully follow the instructions providedby the manufacturer of the restraint system.• Adjust the harnesses for every child onevery journey.• Make sure that all slack is removed fromthe adult seat belt.•Always attach the top tether when installingan ISOFIX seat (If applicable to seat type).• Always check the security of the childrestraint.• Do not dress a child in bulky clothing, orplace any objects/padding between the childand the restraint.•Regularly check the fit and condition of childrestraints. If the fit is poor, or wear/damageis visible, replace the restraint immediately.•Set a good example - always wear your seatbelt.• For child seats fitted with a support leg,adjust the leg so that it rests firmly on thefloor.• For some child seats, it may be necessaryto remove the head restraint to make sureof a stable fit. Always make sure the headrestraint is stowed correctly, and refit thehead restraint after the child seat isremoved.Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted childrestraints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts,harnesses, or for attaching other itemsor equipment to the vehicle.BOOSTER SEATSIn a situation where a child is too large to fitinto a child safety seat, but is still too small tosafely fit the 3-point belt, a booster seat isrecommended for maximum safety. Follow themanufacturer's instructions for fitting and use,then adjust the seat belt to suit.INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILDRESTRAINTSDo not attempt to fit ISOFIX restraintsto the centre rear seating position. Theanchor bars are not designed to holdan ISOFIX restraint in this position.If the restraint is not correctlyanchored, there is a significant risk ofinjury to the child in the event of acollision or emergency braking.WARNING: child restraint anchoragesare designed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fitted childrestraints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts,harnesses, or for attaching other itemsor equipment to the vehicle.ISOFIX anchorages are provided at the outerseat positions on the second row seats.For vehicles fitted with Executive class rearseats, before fitting an ISOFIX seat, adjust theseatback to the fully upright position.32Child safetyLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To install an ISOFIX child seat:1. This symbol is shown on a label sewn intothe seats to indicate the position of theLATCH lower anchorages.2. Locate the lower anchor bars which areaccessible through the gap between theseatback and seat base. Insert the protectiveguides supplied with the child seat, asshown. The insertion positions for theguides are identified by the ISOFIX labels.3. Slide the child seat locking mechanism intothe protective sleeves and onto the anchorbars.If an upper tether is fitted to the child seat, see33, INSTALLING TETHER ANCHORAGE CHILDRESTRAINTS.Test the security of the child restraint. To dothis, attempt to pull the restraint away from thevehicle's seat and twist the restraint from sideto side. Even if the restraint appears secure, youshould still check the anchor points visually, tomake sure they are correctly attached.Note: Always make sure that if an upper tetheris provided, it is fitted and tightened correctly.Note: For child restraints fitted with a supportleg, adjust the leg so that it rests firmly on thefloor.INSTALLING TETHER ANCHORAGECHILD RESTRAINTSAlways follow the child seat or restraintsystem manufacturer’s instructionswhen fitting tether straps.When fitting a child seat or restraintsystem, always pass the tether strapover the top of the seatback andbeneath the head restraint.If removing a head restraint in order tofit a child restraint, always secure thehead restraint when storing it.The vehicle is equipped with tether anchoragepoints, located behind the rear seat headrestraints. These should be used to attach strapsfrom child seats or child restraint systems.Always fit the upper tether anchorage andtighten correctly.33Child safetyRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Make sure that the rear seatback issecurely and completely latched to thevehicle, in the normal upright position.1. Pass the tether strap over the seatback andbeneath the head restraint*.2. Release the access cover for the relevanttether anchorage point.3. Attach the tether strap hook to the tetheranchorage point. Make sure that the tetherstrap hook is facing towards the back of theseat.4. Tighten the tether strap according to thechild seat, or the child restraint,manufacturer's instructions.Note: *On vehicles fitted with Executive classrear seats, raise the centre armrest to theupright position and pass the strap over the top.34Child safetyLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AIRBAGS AND ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS1. Front passenger airbag.2. Seat-mounted side airbags.3. The curtain airbags may deflate at a slowerrate than the front or side airbags, to affordprolonged protection.4. Driver’s airbag.Note: The general location of airbags fitted tothe vehicle are marked by the word AIRBAG.Always contact your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer if:• An airbag inflates.• The front or sides of the vehicle aredamaged.• Any part of the airbag SupplementaryRestraint System (SRS) shows signs ofcracking or damage, including any trimcovering the airbags.•The amber airbag warning lamp illuminates.High speed impacts may cause seriousinjury or death, irrespective of safetyfeatures fitted to a vehicle. Alwaysdrive with caution and considerationfor the vehicle’s characteristics, roadand weather conditions, and do notexceed any speed limits in force.Seat belts should be worn at all times,by the driver and passengers in allseating positions. The airbagSupplementary Restraint System (SRS)cannot provide protection in sometypes of impact. Under thesecircumstances, the only protection willbe provided by a correctly worn seatbelt.35AirbagsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Active head restraintsBoth front seats are equipped with Active HeadRestraints (AHR) which reduce the risk of neckand spinal injury (whiplash).In the event of a rear impact, the head restraintmoves upwards and forwards, supporting theoccupant’s head.After activation, the whiplash protectionmechanism resets automatically and does notneed to be replaced.AIRBAG OPERATIONAirbags provide additional protection in certaintypes of collision only - they do not replace theneed to wear a seat belt. All occupants, in allseating positions, should always wear their seatbelt, whether or not an airbag is present in thatseating position.For the airbags to operate correctly,the roof lining and door post trims mustbe in good condition, correctly fitted,and free from obstruction. Anydamage, wear, or incorrect fitmentshould be referred to your Retailer/Authorised Repairer as soon aspossible, for examination and repair.Airbags inflate at high speeds and cancause facial abrasions and otherinjuries. To minimise the risk of injury,make sure that all vehicle occupantswear correctly positioned seat belts,sit correctly in the seats, and positionthe seats as far back as practical.Airbag inflation takes placeinstantaneously, and cannot protectagainst the effects of secondaryimpacts. Under these circumstances,the only protection will be provided bya correctly worn seat belt.Airbag deployment is dependent on the rate atwhich the passenger compartment changesvelocity following the collision. Circumstancesaffecting different collisions (vehicle speed,angle of impact, type and size of object hit, etc.),vary considerably and will affect the rate ofdeceleration accordingly.The airbags and Supplementary RestraintSystem (SRS) are not designed to operate as aresult of:• Rear impacts.• Minor front impacts.• Minor side impacts.• Heavy braking.• Driving over bumps and pot holes.Therefore, it follows that considerable superficialdamage to the vehicle can occur, withoutcausing the airbags to deploy.AIRBAG OBSTRUCTIONDo not obstruct the operation of theairbags by placing any part of yourperson or any objects in contact with,or close to, an airbag module. If theairbag inflates, objects or any part ofyour person could interfere with theinflation of the airbag or be propelledinside the vehicle, causing injury tothe occupants.Do not allow passengers to obstructthe operation of the airbags by placingfeet, knees, or any other part of thebody, or any other objects in contactwith, or in close proximity to, an airbagmodule.Do not place objects between theairbag module and the seat occupant.36AirbagsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Do not use non-approved seat coversor accessory seat covers that have notbeen designed for use with airbags. Ifin doubt, consult your Retailer/Authorised Repairer.Make sure that a gap is maintainedbetween the side of the vehicle, andthe head and torso. This will enableunobstructed inflation of the curtain,and seat-mounted side airbags.Do not attach or position items on, orclose to, the roof lining, front seatbackrests, or to an airbag cover, whichcould interfere with the inflation of theairbag or be propelled inside thevehicle, causing injury to theoccupants.Airbags cannot deploy correctly if they areobstructed. Examples of obstructions are:• Any parts of an occupant’s body in contactwith, or close to, an airbag cover.• Objects placed on, or close to, an airbagcover.• Clothing, sun screens or other materialhanging from grab handles.• Clothing, cushions or other materialcovering seat mounted airbags.• Seat covers which are not approved byJaguar or specifically designed for use withseat mounted airbags.This list is not exhaustive. It remains theresponsibility of the occupants to make surethat the airbags are not obstructed in any way.FRONT AIRBAGSThe front passenger and driver airbags are ableto deploy in 2 stages, depending on the severityof the frontal impact. In a severe impact, theairbags inflate fully to offer maximumprotection. In a lesser impact, full deploymentis not required, so the airbags are partiallyinflated.SIDE AIRBAGSThese are designed to protect the thorax regionof the torso and will deploy only in the event ofa side impact and then, only on the side of theimpact.CURTAIN AIRBAGSThe curtain airbags are deployed in sideimpacts, providing greater protection fromserious head injuries.For the curtain airbags to deploycorrectly, the roof lining and A-posttrim must be undamaged and fittedcorrectly. Any damage or suspectfitting should be referred to a Retailer/Authorised Repairer for examination.Note: Curtain airbags will not inflate as a resultof frontal or rear impacts alone.37AirbagsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT EFFECTSWhen an airbag inflates, a fine powderis released. This is normal and not anindication of a malfunction. Thepowder may cause irritation to the skinand should be thoroughly flushed fromeyes and any cuts or abrasions. Thispowder can cause breathing difficultiesfor asthma sufferers or other peoplewith respiratory problems. If thisoccurs, get out of the vehicle as soonas it is safe to do so or get fresh air byopening a window. If breathingproblems persist, seek medicalattention.Airbag deployment is accompanied bya very loud noise, which may causediscomfort and temporary loss ofhearing.After inflation, some airbagcomponents will be very hot. Do nottouch the airbag components until theyhave cooled sufficiently.After inflation, the front andseat-mounted side airbags deflateimmediately. This provides a gradualcushioning effect for the occupants andalso makes sure the driver's forwardvision is not obscured.AIRBAG WARNING LAMPThe airbag warning lamp is mounted in theInstrument panel and will illuminate as a bulbcheck when the ignition is switched on. See 46,AIRBAG (AMBER).The warning lamp indicates a potentialfault with the vehicle restraint systemwhich could result in serious injury ordeath in the event of a severe accident.If the warning lamp indicates that afault is present in the system, do notuse a child restraint on the frontpassenger seat.If any of the following warning lamp conditionsoccur, the vehicle should be checked by yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer immediately:• The warning lamp fails to illuminate whenthe ignition is switched on.• The warning lamp fails to extinguish within6 seconds of the ignition being switchedon.• The warning lamp illuminates at any time,other than during the bulb check, when theignition is on.When the ignition is switched on, a diagnosticcontrol unit monitors the readiness of thesystem's electrical circuits. The elements of theSupplementary Restraint System (SRS)components include:• SRS warning lamp.• Rotary coupler.• Airbag modules.• Seat belt pre-tensioners (front seat belts).• Airbag diagnostic control unit.• Crash sensors.• Airbag wiring harnesses.• Airbag status indicator.• Front seat belt buckle switches.• Front seat track position sensor.AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATIONPhone systems should only be installedby qualified persons familiar with theoperation of, and requirements for,vehicles fitted with SupplementaryRestraint System (SRS). If you are inany doubt, seek advice from yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.38AirbagsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Do not attempt to service, repair,replace, modify, or tamper with, anypart of the SRS. This includes wiringor components in the vicinity of SRScomponents. Doing so may cause thesystem to trigger, or render the systeminoperative.Do not use any electrical testequipment or devices in the vicinity ofSRS components or wiring. Doing somay cause the system to trigger, orrender the system inoperative.For your safety, all of the followingoperations should only be carried outby a Retailer/Authorised Repairer, orsuitably qualified person:• Removal or repair of any wiring orcomponent in the vicinity of any SRScomponents.• Installation of electrical, or electronic,equipment and accessories.• Modification to the front or sides of thevehicle's exterior.• Attachment of accessories to the front orsides of the vehicle.Always contact your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer if:• An airbag inflates.• The front or sides of the vehicle aredamaged.• Any part of the airbag SRS shows signs ofcracking or damage, including the trimcovering the airbags.DISABILITY MODIFICATIONSOccupants with disabilities which may requirethe vehicle to be modified, must contact aRetailer/Authorised Repairer before anymodifications are made.39AirbagsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
INSTRUMENT PANEL1. Tachometer.2. Gear selector position display.3. Temperature gauge.Serious engine damage can occur if thevehicle is driven while the engine isoverheating.If the pointer moves onto the red line, theengine is overheating. Stop the vehicle assoon as safety permits and allow the engineto idle until the temperature reduces. If,after several minutes, the temperature doesnot reduce, switch off the engine and allowit to cool. If the problem persists, seekqualified assistance immediately.Note: If engine overheating occurs, theremay be a noticeable reduction in enginepower and the air conditioning may ceaseoperation. This is a normal operatingstrategy, to reduce load on the engine andassist with engine cooling.4. Speedometer.5. Current speed.6. Message centre.7. External temperature.8. Trip information.9. Total distance (odometer).10. Fuel gauge.Never allow the engine to run out of fuel.The resultant misfire can seriouslydamage the catalytic converter.If the amber low fuel warning lampilluminates, the vehicle should be refuelledas soon as possible. The approximatedistance that can be travelled on theremaining fuel can be viewed via the Tripcomputer range function.As a reminder for the location of the fuelfiller, there is an arrow head symbol, nextto the fuel pump symbol, pointing to therelevant side of the vehicle.11. Clock.40Instrument panelLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
INSTRUMENT PANEL MENUA number of vehicle features and displaysettings may be configured via the Instrumentpanel menu.To display and navigate through the Instrumentpanel menu, operate the menu control on thesteering wheel.1. Steering wheel menu control: Press OK toactivate the menu, then use as follows:• Press the up/down arrow to scroll upor down through a list.• Press the right arrow to view a sub-list.• Press the left arrow to return to theprevious menu.• Press the OK button to select thehighlighted item from a list.2. Scroll through the Main menu options asfollows:•Driving Features•Trip Computer•Settings•Tyre Pressures•Service: Displays with the ignition onand the engine running.•Source•Queue/Favourites: Dependant on thesource selected.•Recents: Displays with the phoneconnected.•Display ThemeInfo panel: Select to change theinformation displayed within theInstrument panel.Map: Select to set the Instrument panelto display the full screen navigationmap, with guidance and junction view.Theme: Select to change theappearance of the Instrument panel.WARNING AND INFORMATIONMESSAGESDo not ignore warning messages, takeappropriate action as soon as possible.Failure to do so may result in seriousdamage to the vehicle.If the message is suppressed, anamber or red warning icon will remainilluminated until the cause of themessage is rectified.For information regarding the individualmessages, their meanings, and any actionrequired, please refer to the relevant sectionwithin this handbook.If more than one message is active, each isdisplayed in turn for 2 seconds in order ofpriority.Note: Messages are displayed in order ofimportance, with critical warning messagesbeing the highest priority.41Instrument panelRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Warning messages may be accompanied by anaudible warning, and the message text may havethe handbook symbol next to it. Warningmessages are displayed until the conditioncausing the fault is rectified or the message issuppressed using the OK button on the steeringwheel. If the message is suppressed, a warningicon will remain illuminated until the cause ofthe message is rectified.TRIP COMPUTERThe computer memory stores data for a journeyor series of journeys until it is reset to zero.There are 3 trip memories available, A, B andAuto. You can specify which trip memory isviewable using the Instrument panel menu.USING THE TRIP COMPUTERA short press (1 second or less), or a series ofshort presses, of the TRIP button will changethe Trip computer display. The options availableare:• Trip distance.• Trip average speed.• Trip average fuel consumption.• Instantaneous (short term average) fuelconsumption.• Range available from remaining fuel.• Driving style.• Blank display.To reset the Trip computer values to zero, pressand hold the TRIP button for 2 seconds.To reset the fuel consumption value, press andhold the TRIP button until the display clears.The distance, average speed and average fueleconomy values for trip Aand trip Bcan bereset. Set the Trip computer display to showthe trip that you wish to reset, then press andhold the TRIP button until the messageresetting trip is displayed.It is not possible to manually reset the Auto tripmemory. This resets automatically each timethe ignition is switched on.Trips may be added together, or removed torecord a continuous journey. Press the TRIPbutton for longer than 1 second, when Auto tripmemory values for distance, average speed andaverage fuel economy are displayed, thenadding last journey or removing last journeywill appear on the screen. Press the TRIP buttonfor longer than 1 second, and the previous tripinformation will be added to or, removed from,the current trip and the new total will bedisplayed. There is no limit to the number oftimes this can be done before the ignition isswitched off.TRIP DISTANCEDistance travelled since the last memory reset.The maximum trip reading is 9 999.9(kilometres or miles). The computer willautomatically reset to zero if this distance isexceeded.RANGEThis shows the predicted distance (kilometresor miles) that the vehicle should travel on theremaining fuel, assuming fuel consumptionstays constant.42Instrument panelLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
METRIC/IMPERIAL/MIXED DISPLAYThe Trip computer readings can be changedbetween metric, imperial and mixed units in theTrip Computer menu of the Message centre.See 41, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.Note: Temperature display can be changedbetween °C(Celsius) and °F(Fahrenheit)independently of Metric or Imperial units.SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATORAn upcoming service interval will be notified tothe driver via the Message centre, as either adistance or time left until the service is due.Once the distance or time are exceeded, thedisplay will show a negative (-) value to indicatethat a service is overdue.One or both types of service interval (distanceand time) may be displayed.Details of the next service can be found in theService Instrument panel menu. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.43Instrument panelRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORSRED warning lamps are for primary warnings.A primary warning must be investigatedimmediately by the driver or qualified assistancebefore continuing.AMBER and YELLOW warning lamps are forsecondary warnings. Some indicate that avehicle system is in operation, others indicatethat the driver must take action and then seekqualified assistance as soon as possible.GREEN and BLUE lamps within the instrumentpanel indicate system status.LAMP CHECKA warning lamp bulb check is initiated when theignition system is switched on and lasts for 3seconds (except for the airbag warning lampwhich will remain on for 6 seconds). If anywarning lamp remains on after this period,investigate the cause before driving.Some warning lamps have associated messagesdisplayed in the Message centre.Note: Not all warning lamps are included in thecheck (e.g. high beam headlamps and directionindicators).CRITICAL WARNING MESSAGE (RED)Illuminates when a critical warningmessage is available in the Messagecentre.GENERAL WARNING/INFORMATIONMESSAGE (AMBER)Illuminates when a non-criticalwarning message or an informationmessage is available in the Messagecentre.ENGINE TEMPERATURE (RED)Illuminates when the enginetemperature is too high. TheMessage centre will also display themessage ENGINE OVERHEATING.Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits andseek qualified assistance before continuing.LOW OIL PRESSURE (RED)If the lamp flashes or illuminateswhile driving, stop the vehicle assoon as safety permits and switchoff the engine immediately.Check and top up the oil level, if necessary. Startthe engine, if the lamp remains illuminated,switch the engine off immediately and seekqualified assistance before continuing.BRAKE (RED)Do not drive if the message Brake FluidLow is displayed. Check the brake fluidlevel and top-up as necessary. Ifnecessary, seek qualified assistancebefore continuing.Illuminates briefly as a bulb checkwhen the ignition is switched on. Ifthe lamp illuminates while driving,suspect low brake fluid level or afault with the Electronic BrakeDistribution (EBD) system.Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits andcheck and top-up the brake fluid, if necessary.If the lamp remains illuminated, seek qualifiedassistance before continuing.44Warning lampsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PARKING BRAKE (RED)Illuminates when the parking brakeis correctly applied. If the lampflashes, a fault has been detected.Seek qualified assistance urgently.BATTERY CHARGE (RED)Illuminates as a bulb check, whenthe ignition is switched on andextinguishes when the engine isstarted.If the lamp remains on or illuminates whiledriving, there is a fault with the battery chargingsystem and a message will be displayed in theMessage centre. Seek qualified assistanceurgently.SEAT BELT (RED)Illuminates, accompanied by achime, when the vehicle is in motionand an occupied front seat belt isunbuckled. The lamp will extinguishwhen the relevant seat belt(s) isbuckled.Note: Objects on the front passenger seat mayactivate the seat belt reminder. It isrecommended that any objects placed on thefront passenger seat are secured using the seatbelt. See 23, USING THE SEAT BELTS.BRAKE (AMBER)Illuminates briefly as a bulb checkwhen the ignition is switched on.If the lamp illuminates after starting the engineor while driving, suspect worn brake pads or afault with the Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)system.The vehicle can still be driven with care, butseek qualified assistance urgently.ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)(AMBER)If the ABS and brake warning lampsare illuminated at the same time, donot drive the vehicle until the fault isrectified. Seek qualified assistanceimmediately.Illuminates briefly as a bulb checkwhen the ignition is switched on.If the lamp remains on or illuminates whiledriving, there is a fault with the ABS system.Drive with care, avoiding heavy brakeapplication and seek qualified assistanceurgently.ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM(AMBER)Illuminates when there is a systemfault. The headlamps will stilloperate, but without this featureoperating correctly. Seek qualifiedassistance as soon as possible.ENGINE/TRANSMISSION (AMBER)Illuminates briefly as a bulb checkwhen the ignition is switched on. Ifthe lamp illuminates when theengine is running, there is anemissions related fault with theengine or transmission. The vehiclecan be driven but may enterlimp-home mode with the possibilityof reduced performance. Seekqualified assistance as soon aspossible.If the warning lamp flashes while the engine isrunning, reduce speed and seek qualifiedassistance urgently.45Warning lampsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
GLOW PLUGS (AMBER)Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on, to indicate that theglow plugs are active.DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)(AMBER)Illuminates briefly as a bulb checkwhen the ignition is switched on.If the lamp flashes while driving, the DSCsystem is active.A fault with the DSC system is indicated by thewarning lamp illuminating and an associatedwarning message. The vehicle can still bedriven, but without DSC assistance. Seekqualified assistance as soon as possible.DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)OFF (AMBER)Illuminates when DSC is switchedoff.If TracDSC is selected, the warning lamp willalso illuminate and the message TracDSC isdisplayed for 4 seconds.REAR FOG LAMP (AMBER)Illuminates when the rear fog lampsare switched on.FOLLOW MODE (AMBER)Illuminates when the Adaptive cruisecontrol system is in follow mode.AIRBAG (AMBER)Illuminates as a bulb check whenthe ignition is switched on andextinguishes when the engine isstarted.If the lamp illuminates when driving, there is afault with the airbag system. Seek qualifiedassistance as soon as possible.LOW FUEL WARNING (AMBER)Illuminates when the fuel level islow. Refuel at the earliestopportunity.The arrow shows which side of the vehicle tolocate the fuel filler cap.AUTOMATIC SPEED LIMITER (AMBER)Illuminates when Automatic SpeedLimiter is active.EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE (AMBER)Illuminates when the externaltemperature is low enough that icemay be present on the road.PROGRESS CONTROL SYSTEM(AMBER)Illuminates to confirm that theProgress control system is enabled.INTELLIGENT STOP/START OFF(AMBER)Illuminates when the Intelligentstop/start system is switched off.46Warning lampsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (YELLOW)The warning lamp illuminates,accompanied by a message in theMessage centre, to warn that one ormore tyres are significantlyunder-inflated. Stop the vehicle assoon as possible, check the tyrepressures and inflate to therecommended pressure.The lamp will flash to indicate a system fault.HIGH BEAM (BLUE)Illuminates when the high beamheadlamps are switched on orflashed.GEAR SHIFT (GREEN)The Gear shift indicator illuminatesbriefly at the recommended gearchange point (upshift), while inManual gear selection mode only.The Gear shift indicator will not illuminate whileCruise control is active, unless Cruise controlis over-ridden by pressing the throttle pedal.Note: This warning indicator is only a guide. Itremains the responsibility of the driver tooperate the vehicle in an appropriate mannerfor the prevailing conditions.SIDE LAMPS (GREEN)Illuminates when the side lamps areswitched on.AUTO HIGH BEAM (GREEN)Illuminates when the Auto highbeam feature has switched on thehigh beams.INTELLIGENT STOP/START (GREEN)Illuminates when the engine is shutdown by the Intelligent Stop/Startsystem.Note: Other warnings normally associated withan engine shutdown, for example the ignitionwarning lamp, do not illuminate during anengine shutdown by the Intelligent Stop/Startsystem.FORWARD ALERT (GREEN)Illuminates when Forward alert isactive.DIRECTION INDICATORS (GREEN)The appropriate warning lamp willflash when the direction indicatorsare operated.If a direction indicator bulb fails, the audibleticking and warning lamp will sound and flashat twice the normal rate, when that directionindicator is selected.CRUISE CONTROL (GREEN)Illuminates when Cruise control orAdaptive cruise control is active.47Warning lampsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORSChime or tone/remedyHazard or ConditionA chime will sound until the lamps are switched off or the driver’sdoor is closed (unless the lighting control is in the AUTOposition).External lamps remain on whenthe driver’s door is opened.A ticking will sound until the hazard indicators are switched off.Hazard warning indicators on.A ticking will sound until the indicators are switched off.Direction indicators on.A short tone as the memory selection is saved.Memory 1 (2 or 3) settingssaved.A chime will sound if a seat belt is unbuckled while the vehicleis moving. The warning will cease if the occupied seat’s belt isre-buckled, the ignition is switched off or more than 3 minuteshas elapsed.Seat belt reminder.If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving, a continuouschime will sound; release the EPB. If there is a fault with thesystem which would prevent the application of the EPB, a briefsequence of chimes is initiated.Electric Parking Brake (EPB).Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)driver intervene.A chime will sound to indicate that the ACC system is no longeroperating.ACC low speed automatic switchoff.A short warning chime. Reduce speed.Speed is over 15 km/h (9 mph)above the set limit speed.A chime will sound. Select Park (P).Gear selector is not in Park (P)with the ignition off.Intermittent slow, low pitched chime. Disarm the vehicle.Entry delay warning (Europeanmarkets only).A chime will sound. Hold the Smart key close to the auxiliaryswitch pack. See 4, UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE.The Smart key cannot bedetected.A chime will sound.DSC OFF48Warning lampsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LIGHTING CONTROL1. With the headlamps on, push the switchaway from the steering wheel to select highbeam. The blue warning indicator in theInstrument panel will illuminate.2. Pull the switch towards the steering wheeland release to flash the high beam on andoff. The high beam will remain on for aslong as the switch is held.3. Side lamps.4. Low beam.5. AUTO: When ambient light fades, the sidelamps and headlamps will switch onautomatically.6. Exit delay of 30 seconds.7. Exit delay of 60 seconds.8. Exit delay of 120 seconds.Note: If the rotary control is in the AUTOposition there will be no exit delay and theheadlamps will extinguish when the ignitionsystem is switched off.Press the headlamp button on the Smart key toswitch off the headlamps during an exit delayperiod.If the rotary control is moved to the OFFposition, with high beam still activated, bothlow and high beam will be extinguished. Bothlow and high beam will illuminate when theheadlamps are switched on again.DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPSWith the rotary control in the OFF or AUTOposition, the front Daylight running lamps willswitch on automatically with the followingconditions:• The ignition is on.• The engine is running.• The gear selector is in Drive (D) or Reverse(R) - market dependent.49Exterior lightsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The lamps remain on if the gearselector is subsequently moved to Neutral(N).• The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is notapplied (is released) - market dependent.APPROACH LAMPSThe headlamps can be illuminated remotely fora programmed length of time, by pressing theheadlamp button on the Smart key. See 4,UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE. Press the buttonagain to switch off.ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM(AFS)Adaptive front lighting is designed to give thedriver improved visibility, using a swivellingheadlamp unit, a static bending lamp and acornering lamp. These lamps broaden the beamof the headlamps when cornering in differentcircumstances.The headlamp unit swivels accordingly whencornering, to improve light spread on bends inthe road.Static bending lamps: The static bending lampsoperate when necessary, to provide an evenbroader light spread.Cornering lamps: At speeds up to 40 km/h (25mph), to provide improved visibility at junctions,the system switches on the lamp if it hasreceived an input from the vehicle's directionindicator. Only the lamp on the same side asthe operating indicator illuminates. The lampwill self cancel after 3 minutes of continuousoperation.WINDSCREEN WIPER DETECTIONThis function only operates when AUTO isselected. The side lamps, tail lamps andheadlamps will switch on automatically if thewindscreen wipers are switched on for 20seconds or more. Once the windscreen wipersare switched off, the side lamps and headlampswill automatically switch off 2 minutes later.AUTO HIGH BEAMThis feature automatically selects and deselectshigh beam, under specific conditions of roadlighting and in the absence of other vehicle’slights. The system is only active when theambient light drops below a predeterminedlevel.This function is only active if the rotary controlis in the AUTO position and the lighting controlis in the central position.The system will only activate when the vehicle'sspeed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph). The systemwill deactivate when the vehicle's speed dropsbelow 24 km/h (15 mph).Note: Auto high beam does not operate whenReverse (R) gear is selected.To manually select high beam, move the lightingcontrol to the high beam position, as normal.To return to Auto high beam, move the lightingcontrol back to the central position.To manually override to low beam from highbeam, pull the lighting control to the flashposition and Auto high beam will be cancelled.To return to Auto high beam, push the lightingcontrol to the high beam position and thenreturn it to the central position.When Auto high beam is enabled, the systemindicator will illuminate, see 47, AUTO HIGHBEAM (GREEN).Note: Make sure that the sensor in the rear-viewmirror is not blocked or obstructed.50Exterior lightsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The following may also affect the operation ofAuto high beam:• Highly reflective road signs.• Dimly lit road users, for example, cyclistsand pedestrians.• Adverse weather conditions, for example,fog, heavy rain and snow.• Dirty or obscured sensor.• Dirty, damaged, or misted windscreen.• Oncoming vehicles partially obscured by acentral road barrier.• An icy or frosted windscreen.Note: Make sure to defrost the windscreenduring winter conditions.To switch off Auto high beam, turn the rotarycontrol from AUTO to headlamps on.The Auto high beam feature can be disabled/enabled using the Driving Features menu, 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROADNo mechanical adjustment is required or theneed for any external obscuration decals.These headlamps are fully compliant withcurrent homologation requirements in all ECEcountries.HEADLAMPS - CONDENSATIONIn certain circumstances, misting may occur onthe inside of a lamp lens. This is caused bynatural changes in environmental conditions.This misting is not detrimental to lampperformance and will clear during normal usage.51Exterior lightsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
INTERIOR LIGHTS1. Front seat foot-well illumination.2. Glove box lamp.3. Vanity mirror lamps.4. Rear seat foot-well illumination.5. Rear vanity mirror lamps (long wheelbasevehicles only).6. Front reading lamps: Touch the lens brieflyto switch on/off or for approximately 2seconds to switch automatic illuminationof the rear interior lamps on/off.7. Front interior courtesy lamp: Illuminateswhen the doors are unlocked andextinguishes 20 seconds after all of thedoors are closed or when the vehicle islocked.52Interior lightsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The lamps are operated by proximitysensors. Move your finger close to (ortouch) the appropriate lens to switch on/off.Touch the lens for 2 seconds to switchautomatic illumination on/off (INTERIORLIGHTS OFF or INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTO isdisplayed in the Message centreaccordingly).8. Rear interior and reading lamps: All 3 lampsswitch on automatically when the rear doorsare opened.Press the appropriate switch to activate theouter reading lamps manually.9. Rear reading lamps: Press the appropriateswitch to activate a reading lamp manually.10. Rear interior courtesy lamp: Switches onautomatically when the rear doors areopened.53Interior lightsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
WIPER OPERATION1. Automatic rain sensing mode (AUTO): Thefront wipers will respond and adaptautomatically to the ambient rain conditions,selecting the appropriate wiper frequencyfor the prevailing conditions. The sensitivityof the system can be adjusted by rotatingthe collar (2).2. Rotate the collar to adjust the sensitivity ofthe automatic rain sensing mode whenposition (1) is selected. The higher thesensitivity position the more responsive thesystem will become.When automatic rain sensing mode isselected, or when sensitivity is increased,the system will perform a single wipe.3. Low speed continuous wipe.4. High speed continuous wipe.Do not operate the windscreen wiperson a dry screen.In freezing or very hot conditions, makesure that the wipers have not stuck tothe windscreen before operating.Remove any snow, ice or frost from thewindscreen, around the wiper arms andblades, and the screen scuttle, beforeoperating the wipers.5. Pull the wiper/washer control towards thedriver for a single wipe, or hold for furthercontinuous wipes.6. Windscreen wash/wipe: Press and releaseto start a wash/wipe programme consistingof a number of low speed wipes. Washerfluid is sprayed during the up-stoke of thefirst 2 wipes. Continue to hold if additionalwasher fluid is required. A few seconds afterthe programme finishes a drip wipe willclear any residual fluid from the windscreen.Note: Check and top-up the washer fluidlevel at least every week, 210, CHECKINGTHE WASHER FLUID LEVEL.Drip wipe on the windscreen can beenabled/disabled by a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.Washer fluid dispensing during boththe up and down strokes of thewipers can be enabled/disabled bya Retailer/Authorised Repairer.Note: If the wipers leave smears on the glassafter the car has been washed, this may be dueto wax or other residue. Should this occur, cleanthe glass with washer fluid.Note: The windscreen will no longer be wipedeffectively and the automatic rain sensingfunction will degrade if the wipers become worn.Always replace worn or damaged wiper bladesas soon as possible.Note: If the wiper blades become stuck orjammed, an electronic cut-out may temporarilyhalt wiper operation. If this happens, switch offthe wipers and the ignition. Clear anyobstructions and free the wiper blades, beforeattempting to switch on the ignition.To prevent damage to the bonnet, makesure that the wiper arms are in the'service' position before lifting the wiperblades away from the windscreen.54Wipers and washersLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: To set the wipers in the service positionfor maintenance, see 197, WIPERS SERVICEPOSITION.SPEED-DEPENDENT MODEIf the vehicle decelerates to a stop with thewipers operating*, the wipers will switch to thenext lowest speed. When vehicle speedincreases to over 8 km/h (5 mph), the originalwiper speed settings are restored.*Not applicable if Automatic rain sensing modeis selected.This feature can be enabled/disabledby a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.RAIN SENSORMake sure that the wipers are switchedoff before entering a car wash. If the rainsensitive wipers operate during the carwashing process damage may occur tothe wiper mechanism.The rain sensor is mounted on the inside of thewindscreen, behind the rear view mirror. Thesensor is able to detect the presence andamount of water on the windscreen andautomatically activate the windscreen wipersaccordingly.Note: Static droplets may not be detected oninitial start-up. A single wipe should be used toclear the windscreen.To activate the rain sensitive wipers, move thewiper/washer control to the AUTO position. Thebehaviour of the system may be tailored todriver preference by rotating the collar.Note: In dry and often sunny conditions, opticalinfluences and dirt accumulation on thewindscreen may result in the windscreen wipersactivating inadvertently. To prevent this, it isrecommended that under these conditions thewiper controls are returned to the OFF position.The Rain sensor feature can be enabled/disabledin the Instrument panel menu. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.HEADLAMP WASHERSIf the headlamps are on, and there is sufficientliquid in the washer reservoir, operating thescreen wash will also power wash theheadlamps.The headlamp power wash will operate on everyforth operation of the screen washer, providedthe headlamps are still switched on andapproximately 10 minutes have elapsed sincethe last headlamp wash.Switching the headlamps or ignition off andback on again, will reset the cycle.Note: The headlamp power wash is inhibitedwhen the washer fluid reservoir level is low.55Wipers and washersRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
EXTERIOR MIRRORS1. Left mirror adjustment.2. Right mirror adjustment.3. Powerfold/unfold: Press both buttonssimultaneously. This feature is inhibited atspeeds over 110 km/h (70 mph).The mirrors can be adjusted and folded whenthe ignition is on and for up to 5 minutes afterthe ignition is switched off, provided the driver’sdoor is not opened.Press the appropriate button to select the mirrorto be adjusted (button indicator illuminates),then use the joystick control to adjust the mirrorglass.Note: Depending on the type of lens used,distances may be difficult to judge accuratelywhen only using the mirrors.The mirrors can be configured toautomatically fold when the vehicleis locked and unfold when unlocked.This feature can be enabled ordisabled by your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.If the mirrors are accidentally knocked out ofposition (i.e. so only one is folded), press bothbuttons simultaneously to resynchronise.Note: If the mirrors were folded using theswitches, they will not unfold when the vehicleis unlocked.56MirrorsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: Up to 3 different exterior mirror positionscan be stored and recalled using the drivingposition memory feature. See 14, DRIVINGPOSITION MEMORY.MIRROR DIP WHEN REVERSINGThe mirrors can be configured so that whenReverse (R) gear is selected, the passenger doormirror is automatically adjusted to provide animproved viewing angle for reversing.The exact dipped position can be adjusted usingthe joystick control, when the mirror is dipped.The next time reverse is selected, the newlyadjusted position will be selected.When the gear selector is moved out of reverse,or if vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (7.5 mph)while reversing, the mirror will return to itsprevious position.Mirror dip can be selected or deselected fromthe Instrument panel menu. SelectConvenience Features from the Settings menu,then select the desired option from the list.57MirrorsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSCEIVERIn some countries, the Radio Frequency (RF)transceiver is also known as the HomeLink®Universal Transceiver.The RF transceiver is located in the rear viewmirror. It can be programmed to transmit thesignals of up to 3 different hand heldtransmitters. These can be used to operategarage doors, entry gates, home lighting,security systems, or other RF operated remotedevices.Do not use the RF transceiver with anygarage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature, asrequired by safety standards.When programming the RF transceiverto a garage door opener or entry gate,make sure that the area is clear ofpeople and objects. This will preventpotential harm or damage, as the gateor garage door will activate duringprogramming.This device may suffer from interference,if operated in the vicinity of a mobile orfixed station transmitter. Thisinterference is likely to affect thehand-held transmitter, as well as the RFtransceiver.For further information, see 59, INFORMATIONAND ASSISTANCE.BEFORE PROGRAMMINGWhen programming a remote device thatmay require you to press and re-pressthe hand-held transmitter, unplug thedevice during the programming process,to prevent possible motor failure.For best results, fit a new battery to thehand-held transmitter before programming. Ifthe remote device’s receiver is equipped withan antenna, make sure the antenna is extended.PROGRAMMINGTo program the RF transceiver:1. Switch the vehicle’s ignition on.2. Position the hand-held transmitter 25 to 75mm from the rear view mirror.3. Simultaneously press and hold the memorybutton on the hand-held transmitter, andthe desired memory button on the RFtransceiver. An indicator LED, located onthe left side of the mirror, will start flashingslowly.4. When the LED starts flashing quickly,release both buttons.To operate the remote device, press and holdthe programmed memory button on the RFtransceiver for 2 seconds. If the LED illuminatescontinuously, the RF transceiver has beenprogrammed successfully, and the remotedevice will operate.Note: You may need to press the button on theRF transceiver up to 3 times.If the remote device does not operate, and theLED flashes quickly, further programming willbe required.These additional programming steps mayrequire assistance from another person.1. Locate the smart/learn program button onthe remote device you wish to program.58Garage door openerLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The name and location of this buttonmay vary, depending on the manufacturerof the remote device.2. Press and release the smart/learn programbutton, and within 30 seconds, press andhold the desired memory button on the RFtransceiver for 2 seconds.Note: You may need to press and hold thememory button on the RF transceiver for 2seconds, a further 2 times.Note: Some entry gate systems require you tocycle (press and re-press) the hand-heldtransmitter every 2 seconds duringprogramming. If this is the case, continue topress and hold the memory button on the RFtransceiver until the LED flashes quickly.The RF transceiver should now be programmed.Repeat the programming steps, if you wish toadd further remote devices to the RFtransceiver.To operate a programmed remote device, pressand hold the relevant memory button on thetransceiver. Release the button when the devicestarts operating.REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE GARAGEDOOR OPENER BUTTONTo program a remote device to a previouslyprogrammed RF transceiver memory button:1. Press and hold the desired RF transceivermemory button. After approximately 20seconds, the LED will start to flash slowly.2. Follow the instructions described in step(2) onwards, as described inPROGRAMMING.TO ERASE ALL PROGRAMMINGTo erase all programming from the RFtransceiver:1. Switch the vehicle’s ignition on2. Simultaneously press and hold memorybuttons 1and 3on the RF transceiver.After approximately 10 seconds, the RFtransceiver LED will start to flash. At this point,release both memory buttons on the RFtransceiver. All programming will have nowbeen erased from the RF transceiver.Note: Do not press and hold the buttons forlonger than 20 seconds.INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCEIt is recommended that when you sellthe vehicle, you erase all programmingfrom the RF transceiver.For information on the range of compatibleremote devices, or for assistance, contact yourRetailer/Authorised repairer. Alternatively, visitthe HomeLink website www.homelink.com.Note: Retain the original remote featurehandset, for future programming requirements.Note: The manufacturer is not responsible forany radio or TV interference caused byunauthorised modifications to this equipment.Such modifications could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.59Garage door openerRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ELECTRIC WINDOWS1. Front window switches: The windows willoperate for 5 minutes after the engine isswitched off, as long as none of the doorsare opened.Make sure that the Smart key isremoved when leaving passengers inthe vehicle. This will preventunsupervised operation of thewindows, sun blinds and sunroof,which may result in injury.Any ice should be removed from thewindows prior to operation.2. Rear window switches: The windows willoperate for 5 minutes after the engine isswitched off, as long as none of the doorsare opened.Note: The rear window switches are alsoused to operate the rear electric door blinds.See 61, SIDE WINDOW BLINDS.3. Rear isolator switch: Isolates the rearwindows, rear door handles, rear electricseats, door sun blinds and rear sunroofblind.If children are carried in the rear seats,the isolator switch should be used toprevent operation of the rear doorhandles and rear windows.4. Sunroof: Press once to tilt the roof. Oncetilted, press again to open the roof.60WindowsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Press to close the roof from tilt. From thefully open position, press once to close tothe tilt position, then press again to closefully.Roof movement can be halted at any timeby pressing the button again.Note: The front roof blind will open whenthe roof is tilted or when the roof is fullyopened.The roof blinds are electrically operated.Do not try to operate them manually.To prevent accidental damage, makesure any roof rack load will not interferewith the opening of the sunroof.If the sunroof encounters resistance whenclosing it will stop, and then open fully. Thisis to prevent serious injury or damage tothe mechanism.5. Rear screen sun blind.6. Rear sunroof blind: One push of the buttonwill fully open or close the blind. Openingor closing cannot be halted part-way.7. Front sunroof blind: One push of the buttonwill fully open or close the blind. Openingor closing cannot be halted part-way.Note: The blind cannot be closed when thesunroof is open.8. Rear screen sun blind.9. Rear sunroof blind: One push of the buttonwill fully open or close the blind. Openingor closing cannot be halted part way.SIDE WINDOW BLINDSBefore operating the rear door electricsun blind, make sure that no objects orparts of the body are in a position toobstruct the operation of the sun blind.Rear door electric sun blindsTo raise the door sun blind: With the rearwindow fully closed, pull and release the reardoor window switch.To lower the door sun blind: Push down andrelease the rear door window switch.Note: The door sun blinds will operate for 5minutes after the engine is switched off, unlessa door is opened.Door sun blind restrictions:• All rear window switches will operate therespective door sun blinds.• A door sun blind will only operate if the rearwindow is fully closed.• The door sun blinds can only be fully raisedor fully lowered, there is no part-wayposition.• Anti-trap protection: If an obstruction isdetected, the door sun blind will reverse tothe fully opened or closed position.• Anti-play/tamper protection: Deactivationwill occur if the door sun blind is operatedrepeatedly in a short space of time (40movements within 60 seconds). The sunblind will not operate again forapproximately 60 seconds.Note: If the rear door electric sun blind fails tooperate correctly, the blind operation may needto be reset. See 198, SIDE WINDOW BLINDRESET.ONE-TOUCH WINDOW OPERATIONThe front windows have one-touch openoperation. Briefly press the switch down fullyand release, the window will lower until fullyopen.The rear windows open in 2 stages:• Briefly press the switch down fully andrelease; the window will open 65 - 75 mmto the comfort stop position.61WindowsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: This position reduces resonance(booming sound) that can occur whendriving with a front window open. Open therear window on the same side of the vehicleas the open front window, to reduceresonance.• Briefly press the switch down fully andrelease a second time, to fully open thewindow.The front and rear windows also have one-touchclose operation. Briefly pull the switch up fullyand release, the window will rise until fullyclosed.Pressing or pulling the switch again will stop awindow in one-touch operation.WINDOW ANTI-TRAP PROTECTIONBefore closing a window, make surethat no occupants have any part of theirbody in a position where it could betrapped. Death or serious injury couldoccur, even with an anti-trap system.Anti-trap protection is designed to stop windowmovement if an obstruction or resistance isdetected. Check the window and its apertureand remove any obstructions. The overrideprocedure is as follows:-1. Attempt to close the window. Anti-trap willprevent closure and lower the window.2. Within 10 seconds, attempt to raise thewindow again. Anti-trap will prevent closureand lower the window.3. Attempt to close the window for a thirdtime, this time holding the switch in theclose position. The window will raise whilethe switch is held. Hold until closed.Note: If this procedure fails to remove theblockage, or if the windows do not operatecorrectly, the window operation may need to bereset. See 197, WINDOW RESET.SUNROOF ANTI-TRAP MECHANISMBefore closing the sunroof, make surethat no occupants have any part of theirbody in a position where it could betrapped. Even with an anti-trap systemdeath or serious injury could occur.The anti-trap mechanism can be overridden toallow the roof to be closed when movement isrestricted by dirt. To override the anti-trapmechanism, press and hold the front of theswitch until the roof reaches the closed position.If the sunroof fails to operate correctly, it mayneed to be reset. See 197, SUNROOF RESET.62WindowsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS1. Cubby box: To access, press the button.2. Cup holders: To access, slide the coversapart.Do not drink, or use the drinks holderswhen driving.3. Storage area or ashtray (depending onvehicle specification): Press and release,where indicated, to open.4. Glove-box: Open using the glove-boxrelease (arrowed).Note: When Valet Mode is selected, theglove-box release is disabled.5. Rear armrest cubby box: Press the sidecatches to access the cup holders orstorage area.6. Front door stowage.63Storage compartmentsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
7. Rear door stowage.Executive class rear seats1. Cup holders: To access, press the button.Do not drink, or use the drinks holderswhen driving.2. Storage area.3. Rear storage compartment: To access,press the button.AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETSOnly use Jaguar approved accessories.Using any other equipment may damagethe vehicle's electrical system. If you arein any doubt, contact a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.To access the auxiliary power sockets, removeor pull out the protective cover.For vehicles fitted with cigar lighters, these arealso auxiliary power sockets. To access thesocket, remove the cigar lighter.64Storage compartmentsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
OPENING AND CLOSING THELUGGAGE COMPARTMENTDo not open the luggage compartmentif a cycle rack is fitted. Remove anycycles and/or racks before opening theluggage compartment.The Smart key may not be detected if itis placed within a metal container, or ifit is shielded by a device with a back-litLCD screen, such as a smart phone,laptop (including in a laptop bag), gamesconsole, etc.The vehicle must not be driven with theluggage compartment lid unlatched andnot completely closed.Any items placed in the luggagecompartment should be arranged toallow the lid to be completely closed andsecurely latched.Do not repeatedly attempt to close theluggage compartment after itautomatically re-opens, or the latch mayoverheat. If the cause of the automaticre-opening cannot be determined, thenunlock all of the doors and the luggagecompartment with the Smart key. Makesure that all of the doors, the bonnet,and the luggage compartment arecompletely closed and then lock thevehicle again with the Smart key.The luggage compartment can be opened usingthe appropriate button on the Smart key (1), orvia Keyless entry. It can also be opened usingthe exterior release (2), provided the doors areunlocked and the gear selector is in Park (P).To close the luggage compartment, lower theluggage compartment lid to the fully latched/closed position.Powered luggage compartments can also beopened by pressing the interior release button,located on the driver's side lower fascia. See280, DRIVER CONTROLS. When the lid is fullyopen, press the button again to close.Note: If the button is pressed again, before theluggage compartment lid is fully open, thenmovement of the lid will stop.65Luggage compartmentRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
While the powered luggagecompartment is open, the locking latchis exposed. Do not attempt to manuallyclose the latch, as it may alsoautomatically soft-close and trap itemsor body parts.Powered luggage compartments can also beclosed by pressing the luggage compartmentclose button.Note: If an obstruction is detected, the poweredluggage compartment lid will return to the fullyopen position. Remove any obstruction andthen press the close button again.If the luggage compartment lid is opened, afterthe vehicle has been Single locked (See 9,SINGLE LOCKING) or Double locked (See 9,DOUBLE LOCKING), make sure of the followingto successfully close and re-lock the luggagecompartment:The Smart key needs to remain outside and ata distance of less than 1m from the rear of thevehicle when closing the luggage compartmentlid; either manually or when using the poweredluggage compartment close button.The hazard warning lamps will flash once toconfirm the vehicle is locked.If a valid Smart key is detected within thevehicle, or a valid Smart key is not detectedwithin a metre of the rear of the vehicle, thenthe luggage compartment lid will re-open to theunlatched position and an audible mislockwarning will sound. This will also prevent theoperation of the close button, for vehicles witha powered luggage compartment lid.Note: Do not store any valid Smart keys insidethe vehicle.LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT OPENINGHEIGHTIt is possible to set the maximum height towhich the luggage compartment lid will open.This is useful in parking areas with very lowroofs or just for ease of use.• Open the luggage compartment lid to theposition which you want to set as themaximum height.•Press and hold (for 10 seconds) the luggagecompartment close button.• Close the luggage compartment, then openagain to check that it opens to theprogrammed height.The maximum opening height is now set.To reset the maximum opening height to full,repeat the process, but fully open the luggagecompartment lid before pressing and holdingthe button.66Luggage compartmentLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTSAll items carried in the vehicle shouldbe properly secured.Four load securing points are provided in therear luggage area to assist in safely securingitems.Note: A range of approved luggage retentionaccessories are available from your retailer/Authorised Repairer.LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTEMERGENCY RELEASEThe mechanical luggage compartment releaseprovides a means of escape in the event ofsomeone being locked in the luggagecompartment. Adults are advised to familiarisethemselves with the operation of the releasehandle.The release handle glows in the dark and islocated on the inside of the luggagecompartment lid. To open the luggagecompartment from the inside, pull the handlewhile pushing the luggage compartment lidupwards.Return the handle to its stowage position afteruse.67Luggage compartmentRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASEWHEN BATTERY IS DISCHARGEDIf the battery becomes discharged when theluggage compartment is shut, it will benecessary to supply power to the release circuitin order to open it.Supplying power to the release circuitin the following manner may cause afuse to blow. For this reason it isrecommended that the followingprocedure is only carried out by suitablyqualified persons.With the bonnet open and the engine coverremoved (see 216, FUSE BOX LOCATIONS),connect jump lead cables to a suitable 12vsupply, then proceed as follows:1. Remove the cover from the positiveterminal.68Luggage compartmentLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
2. Attach the positive jump lead clamp to thepositive terminal.3. Attach the negative jump lead clamp to theearthing post.4. Press the luggage compartment releasebutton on the remote control.Do not attempt to start the vehicle withpower supplied in this way.69Luggage compartmentRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
STARTING THE ENGINENever start the engine, or leave itrunning, when the vehicle is in anenclosed space. Exhaust gases arepoisonous and can causeunconsciousness and death if inhaled.If the engine fails to start, do notcontinue cranking as this will dischargethe battery. It may also damage thecatalytic convertor due to unburnt fuelpassing through the exhaust.Note: The Smart key may not be detected if itis placed within a metal container or if it isshielded by a device with a back-lit LCD screen,such as a smart phone, laptop (including wheninside a laptop bag), game console etc. Keepthe Smart key clear of such devices whenattempting Keyless entry or Keyless starting.To start the engine:1. Make sure that a valid Smart key is insidethe vehicle.2. Make sure that Park (P) or Neutral (N) isselected.3. Firmly press the brake pedal.4. Press and release the engine START/STOPbutton.Note: For vehicles with diesel engines, thedelay period before cranking begins will belonger in low ambient temperatures due toextended glow plug operation. During thisextended delay the brake pedal must remainpressed.Once the engine has started, the brake pedalcan be released if it is safe to do so.SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEWhen the vehicle is stationary:1. Make sure that the vehicle is parked withPark (P) selected and the parking brakeapplied.2. Press and release the engine START/STOPbutton.It is not advisable to switch off theengine while the vehicle is moving.However, if a situation arises whereengine switch off is urgent, the followingprocedure applies:1. Press and hold the engine START/STOPbutton for 2 seconds, or2. Press and release the engine START/STOPbutton twice within 3 seconds.SWITCHING ON THE IGNITIONTo switch on the ignition without starting theengine:70Starting the engineLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
1. Make sure the brake pedal is not pressedand that a valid Smart key is inside thevehicle.2. Press and hold the engine START/STOPbutton until the warning lamps illuminate.3. Release the engine START/STOP button.If the brake pedal is applied when theengine START/STOP button is pressed,the engine will start.ROLLING RE-STARTA rolling restart can be initiated by selectingNeutral (N) and pressing the engine START/STOP button.KEYLESS START BACKUPIf the vehicle has been unlocked using theemergency key blade or the Smart key is notdetected by the vehicle, it will be necessary touse the keyless start backup to disarm the alarmand start the engine.The keyless start backup can only be used whenthe message Smart Key Not Found - Refer toHandbook is displayed in the Message centre.1. Position the Smart key flat against the fasciain the position shown.2. Firmly depress the brake pedal.3. Press and release the engine START/STOPbutton.Once the engine has started, the brake pedalcan be released if it is safe to do so.If the Smart key is not recognised, or the enginestill fails to start, consult a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.IF THE ENGINE FAILS TO STARTNote: If the engine fails to crank when theengine START/STOP button is pressed and therehas been a recent collision, the fuel systeminertia switch may have been tripped. Seekqualified assistance.Note: The following information applies to petrolengine vehicles only.If the engine persistently fails to start:1. Make sure the brake pedal is not pressedand that a valid Smart key is inside thevehicle.2. Make sure that Park (P) or Neutral (N) isselected.3. Press and hold the engine START/STOPbutton until the warning lamps illuminate.4. Slowly press the accelerator pedal fully andhold it in the fully pressed position.5. Press and release the engine START/STOPbutton. The engine will begin to crank.6. Release the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.If the engine still fails to start, or fails to crank,consult a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.71Starting the engineRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
INTELLIGENT STOP/STARTThe Intelligent stop/start system is designed toimprove fuel efficiency and is automaticallyactivated when the vehicle's ignition is switchedon. Unless it is required to support other vehiclesystems, the engine will switch off if the vehicleis stopped, for example, at traffic lights. Whenthe brake pedal is released and a drive gear isselected, the engine will restart automatically.Note: Always disable the Intelligent stop/startsystem before wading.During operation of the Intelligent stop/startsystem, a warning lamp will illuminate. See 47,INTELLIGENT STOP/START (GREEN).To activate an automatic engine stop, stop thevehicle from a speed greater than 4 km/h (2.5mph). Apply sufficient brake pressure to makesure the vehicle is stationary.To activate an automatic engine restart, releasethe brake pedal with Drive (D) or Sport (S)selected.The engine will also restart if one of thefollowing occurs:• Intelligent stop/start is deactivated.• The accelerator pedal is pressed.• An automatic transmission shift paddle isused to select a gear.• Reverse (R) gear is selected.• The Climate control system demandincreases.• The vehicle's speed exceeds approximately1 km/h (0.5 mph).• The vehicle's battery charge becomes low.• Brake vacuum has been reduced, forexample, using the brake pedal repeatedlywith the engine off.The following conditions will prevent anautomatic engine stop:• An automatic transmission shift paddle hasbeen used to select a gear.• The external temperature is less thanapproximately 0°C.• The external temperature is more thanapproximately 40°C.• The engine has not reached its operatingtemperature.• The driver's seat belt is not fastened.• Demand from the Climate control systemrequires the engine to be running, forexample, when in Defrost mode.• The vehicle's battery charge is low.• Intelligent stop/start is deactivated.• The bonnet is opened.Note: Even when activated, it is normal that theIntelligent stop/start system will not always stopthe engine when the vehicle is stationary, andmay restart the engine prior to setting off.DEACTIVATING INTELLIGENT STOP/STARTTo switch the Intelligent stop/startsystem off, press the ECO stop/startbutton. For more information, see280, DRIVER CONTROLS.To confirm that the system has been switchedoff, the button LED will extinguish, and themessage ECO Stop/Start Off is momentarilydisplayed in the Message centre.If the ECO stop/start button is pressed whilethere is a fault with the system, the messageECO stop/start fault is momentarily displayedin the Message centre.Note: If the ECO stop/start button is pressedwhile an automatic engine stop is in progress,the engine will restart.72Intelligent stop/startLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The Intelligent stop/start system willautomatically reactivate the next time thevehicle's ignition is switched on.DRIVER EXITNote: The Driver exit feature is only availablewhen Intelligent stop/start is enabled.To prevent the vehicle from being inadvertentlyleft in a driveable condition, the vehicle willdetect when a driver is not present, andautomatically switch off the ignition system.If Drive (D), Sport (S), or Neutral (N) is selected,the Driver exit feature will switch the vehicle'signition off if the following conditions exist:• The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, and:• The brake pedal is released.If Park (P) is selected, the Driver exit featurewill switch the vehicle's ignition off, if thedriver's seat belt is unbuckled.Once the vehicle's ignition has been switchedoff, the vehicle can be locked if required. See9, SINGLE LOCKING.73Intelligent stop/startRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION1. To select Drive (D) or Reverse (R) gear,press the brake pedal and rotate the rotarydrive selector.2. To select Sport mode, from Dpress therotary drive selector down and rotate to S.3. Gear shift paddles (left paddle fordownshifts, right paddle for upshifts), see75, MANUAL GEAR SELECTION.Note: The gear shift paddles can beconfigured to operate in 'S only' or 'D andS' via the Driving Features menu. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.4. Pull briefly to change gear.To exit manual mode, either pull and holdthe shift-up paddle for approximately onesecond (to return directly to automaticoperation in Dor S) or, if in S, rotate thegear selector to the Dposition.Note: The selected gear will be displayed in theinstrument panel, also see 90, DYNAMIC.Never select the Park (P) position whilethe vehicle is in motion.Never select the Reverse (R) positionwhile the vehicle is in forward motion.Never select a forward gear while thevehicle is moving backwards.Do not rev the engine or allow it to runabove normal idle speed while selectingDor R, or while the vehicle is stationarywith any gear selected.Do not allow the vehicle to remainstationary with a drive gear selected andthe engine running. Always select ParkPor Neutral Nif the engine is to idle fora prolonged period.74GearboxLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
If the rotary drive selector is obstructed, removethe obstruction and then start the engine. Theselector should elevate.If the rotary drive selector fails to elevate andthere is no obstruction, a fault in the system isindicated. The selector can be used in thelowered position, but be aware that it will notautomatically select Pwhen the engine isswitched off. Therefore Pshould be selectedmanually. The fault should be rectified by aRetailer/Authorised Repairer at the earliestopportunity.MANUAL GEAR SELECTIONWhen the rotary drive selector is in the Dposition (unless set to 'S only' mode), manualmode may be directly accessed by the singleaction of operating the steering wheel mountedshift paddles.If continued use of manual mode is required,the rotary drive selector may be subsequentlymoved to the Sposition to enter permanentmanual mode.If the rotary drive selector remains in the Dposition, temporary manual mode will be heldwhile the driver is accelerating, decelerating,cornering or continuing to request shifts via thepaddles.When the transmission is set topermanent manual mode (i.e., using thepaddles to change gear while in the Sposition and Dynamic mode is selected,see 90, DYNAMIC) transmissionupshifts are fully controlled by the driver.This means that the transmission willnot change up a gear automatically, evenwhen the vehicle's rev limit is reached.The gear position indicator in theMessage centre will glow amber, toindicate that the next gear should beselected. The gear shift warning lampwill also illuminate. See 90, DYNAMIC.ROTARY GEAR SELECTORThe rotary drive selector elevates out of thecentre console when the engine is started, inreadiness for gear selection.Pshould be selected before switching off theengine. However, it is possible to switch theengine off with R,D,orSselected - the selectorwill automatically select P, while retracting intothe centre console.Note: If the engine is switched off with Nselected, the system will wait for 10 minutesbefore selecting P. This procedure is to allowthe vehicle to be conveyed through a car washonly and should not be used for vehicle recoverypurposes.To prevent the transmission from automaticallyselecting P(e.g., for vehicle recovery purposes)it is necessary to activate the Emergency parkrelease. Vehicle recovery should only beundertaken by qualified personnel.LIMP-HOME MODENote: The driver should be aware that thevehicle’s performance will be reduced and musttake this into account when driving. Also theuse of the gear shift paddles will be disabled.In this event, seek qualified assistance as soonas possible.In the event of an electrical or mechanicalfailure, transmission operation will be limited.P,R,N,Dand Smay still be used to enable thevehicle to be driven to a safe area.Some faults will cause the selector to be lockedin position until the ignition is switched off. Ifthe selected range flashes, it signifies that thedriver request cannot be engaged. Re-select Nand repeat the attempt.If the transmission is still unable to select therequested gear, contact your Retailer/Authorised Repairer.75GearboxRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) isunable to compensate for drivermisjudgement. It remains the driver'sresponsibility to drive with due careand attention, in a manner which issafe for the vehicle, its occupants andthe other road users.DSC optimises vehicle stability, even in criticaldriving situations. The system controls dynamicstability when accelerating and when startingfrom a standstill. Additionally, it identifiesunstable driving behaviour, such as understeerand oversteer and helps to keep the vehicleunder control by manipulating the engine outputand applying the brakes at individual wheels.Some noise may be generated when the brakesare applied.TRACDSCVehicle safety may be reduced byinappropriate use of TracDSC. TracDSCshould only be used in suitableconditions.TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC, withreduced system interventions. With TracDSCengaged, traction may be increased, althoughstability may be reduced compared to normalDSC. TracDSC is intended for use only on drytarmac, by suitably experienced drivers.TracDSC should not be selected for othersurfaces or by drivers with insufficient skill andtraining to operate the vehicle safely withTracDSC function engaged.SWITCHING BETWEEN DSC ANDTRACDSCPress and hold the DSC switch forless than 10 seconds (3 seconds forXJR). The Message centre willtemporarily display either TracDSCor DSC ON.• The warning lamp in the instrument panelwill illuminate while TracDSC is selected.• The warning lamp will flash when DSC orTracDSC is active (cruise control willautomatically disengage if this occurs).SWITCHING DSC OFF• Press and hold the DSC switch for morethan 10 seconds (3 seconds for XJR).• The Message centre will display DSC OFFand a short warning chime will sound.• The DSC OFF warning lamp in theInstrument panel will illuminate.SWITCHING DSC ON• Press and release the DSC switch.• The DSC system will switch on, theMessage centre will temporarily display DSCON.• The DSC OFF warning lamp in theInstrument panel will be extinguished.Note: Switching the engine off and then onagain, will always revert DSC status to DSC ON,regardless of which mode is selected.ACTIVE DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL(Supercharged vehicles only)The Active differential control (E-diff) improvestraction on uneven road surfaces and can alsoimprove stability in oversteer situations.76Stability controlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
If the warning message EDIFF SYSTEM FAULTis displayed and DSC is off, then TracDSC willbe automatically selected. The vehicle can stillbe driven and DSC modes can be selected, butseek qualified assistance as soon as possible.If the warning message EDIFF NOT AVAILABLEis displayed, the system has temporarily shutdown to prevent overheating. The vehicle canstill be driven and the E-diff will be operationalagain when the system has cooled sufficiently.77Stability controlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ADAPTIVE DYNAMICSIf the general warning lamp illuminates (see 44,GENERAL WARNING/INFORMATION MESSAGE(AMBER)) and the message ADAPTIVEDYNAMICS FAULT is displayed in the Messagecentre, some reduction in ride comfort may beexperienced. If the fault persists, consult aRetailer/Authorised Repairer.78SuspensionLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
IMPORTANT INFORMATIONDo not rest your foot on the brake pedalwhilst the vehicle is in motion.Never allow the vehicle to coast(freewheel) with the engine switchedoff. The engine must be running toprovide full braking assistance. Thebrakes will still function with theengine off, but far more pressure willbe required to operate them.If the red brake warning lampilluminates, safely bring the vehicle toa stop, as quickly as possible and seekqualified assistance.Never place non-approved floormatting or any other obstructions underthe pedals. This restricts pedal traveland braking efficiency.Driving through heavy rain or water can havean adverse effect on braking efficiency. Undersuch circumstances, it is recommended thatyou lightly apply the brakes intermittently, todry the brakes.HILL START ASSISTHill start assist activates when starting a hillascent from a stationary position. When thebrake pedal is released, Hill start assistsmoothly releases the brake pressure, allowingthe vehicle approximately 2 seconds to moveaway without rolling backwards.Any fault with Hill start assist will be indicatedby the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warninglamp being illuminated and a message in theMessage centre. See 46, DYNAMIC STABILITYCONTROL (DSC) (AMBER).EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST (EBA)If the driver rapidly applies the brakes, EBAautomatically boosts the braking force to itsmaximum, in order to bring the vehicle to a haltas quickly as possible. If the driver applies thebrakes slowly, but conditions mean that ABSoperates on the front wheels, EBA will increasethe braking force in order to apply ABS controlto the rear wheels.EBA stops operating as soon as the brake pedalis released.A fault with the EBA system is indicated by thebrake warning lamp (see 45, BRAKE (AMBER))illuminating and an associated warningmessage. Drive with care, avoiding heavy brakeapplication and seek qualified assistance.ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCEDISTRIBUTION (EBD)EBD controls the balance of braking forcessupplied to the front and rear wheels, in orderto maintain maximum braking efficiency.If the vehicle has a light load (only the driver inthe vehicle for example), EBD will reduce thebraking force applied to the rear wheels. If thevehicle is heavily laden, EBD will allow greaterbraking force to the rear wheels.A fault with the EBD system is indicated by thebrake warning lamp (see 44, BRAKE (RED))illuminating and an associated warningmessage. Gently and safely stop the vehicle andseek qualified assistance.79BrakesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)The parking brakes operate on the rearwheels. Therefore, secure parking of thevehicle is dependent on being on a hardand stable surface.The switch which operates the EPB is mountedon the centre console, to the rear of the gearselector.To disengage the EPB (1): With the ignitionsystem on, or with the engine running, applythe brake pedal and press down on the EPBswitch.The Drive away release feature allows the EPBto release automatically as the vehicle is drivenaway.If the EPB is applied while the vehicle isstationary and Dor Ris selected, applying thethrottle will automatically release the EPB.Note: Automatic release of the EPB is onlypossible when the driver’s door is closed, orthe driver’s seat belt is buckled.The EPB is also automatically released whenthe gear selector is moved from the Pposition.If the EPB is inadvertently applied when thevehicle is moving at above 3 km/h (1.8 mph),Caution! Park Brake Applied is displayed in theMessage centre, the warning indicator in theInstrument panel will illuminate and a warningchime will sound.If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving,releasing the switch or pressing the acceleratorwill disengage the EPB.Note: If the accelerator pedal is already pressedbefore the EPB switch has been pulled up, theEPB will be applied.Note: If the vehicle is in motion, the EPB shouldonly be used as an emergency brake.Always apply the EPB when the vehicleis parked.To engage the EPB (2): Pull the EPB switchupwards and release. The switch will return tothe neutral position.The EPB warning lamp in the Instrument panelwill illuminate. See 45, PARKING BRAKE (RED).The warning lamp in the Instrument panel willremain on for a short time, if the EPB is appliedwhen the ignition system is reverted toConvenience mode.If a fault in the system is detected, Park BrakeFault or Cannot Apply Park Brake will bedisplayed in the Message centre. Seek qualifiedassistance as soon as possible.If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, Apply Foot And Park Brake willbe displayed in the Message centre when theignition is next switched on. Press the brakepedal and pull the EPB switch up to apply theEPB. This is required to reset the EPB system.The EPB will now function correctly.80BrakesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ASL CONTROLSASL allows a speed limit to be set that the driverdoes not wish to exceed.In certain conditions, such as a steepdownhill gradient, the vehicle speedmay exceed the set speed limit. Thisis because engine braking is unable tomaintain or reduce the vehicle speed.The ASL button switches between Cruise controland ASL. The systems cannot be usedsimultaneously. ASL operates at speedsbetween 0 km/h (0 mph) and the Maximumvehicle speed, and can be set at speeds between32 km/h (20 mph) and Maximum vehicle speedminus 8 km/h (5 mph).Note: Although ASL only operates at speedsabove 32 km/h (20 mph), the maximum speedlimit can be set while the vehicle is stationary.1. ASL on/off: The ASL indicator lamp willilluminate when ASL is active. See 46,AUTOMATIC SPEED LIMITER (AMBER).2. Set/increase speed limit: Press to move theindicator on the speedometer to therequired speed.When a speed has been set, the engine willrespond normally up to the set speed.Further accelerator pressure will notincrease the speed beyond the set speedunless sudden, rapid acceleration(kickdown) is applied. If kickdown isinitiated, ASL will be suspended and will notbe reactivated until the vehicle speed isbelow the set speed.3. Decrease speed limit: Press to move theindicator on the speedometer to therequired speed.4. Suspend ASL assistance: ASL can also besuspended by applying sudden, rapidacceleration (kickdown).5. Resume ASL assistance: ASL will onlyresume if the vehicle speed is less than theset speed and greater than 32 km/h (20mph). If these criteria are not met, amessage will be displayed in the Messagecentre.81Automatic speed limiter (ASL)RFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
USING CRUISE CONTROLIn certain conditions, such as a steepgradient, the vehicle speed mayexceed the set cruising speed. This isbecause engine braking is unable tomaintain or reduce the vehicle speed.Driver intervention may be required.1. SET+: Press to set the speed or to increasethe set speed. The cruise control warninglamp will illuminate to confirm cruisecontrol is operational (see 47, CRUISECONTROL (GREEN)).The cruising speed can also be increasedusing the accelerator. When the desiredspeed is reached, press the button to setand maintain the new speed and thenrelease the accelerator.Note: Cruise control can only be engagedat speeds in excess of 30 km/h (18 mph).2. RES: Press to resume the set speed.RES should be used only if the driver isaware of the set speed and intends toreturn to it.3. CANCEL: Press to cancel but retain the setspeed in memory.Cruise control will also be cancelled if thebrake pedal is pressed, the gear selector ismoved to Neutral (N), or if DSC is activated.4. Press to decrease the set speed.The system is operated by controls mountedon the steering wheel. The driver can alsointervene at any time by use of the brake oraccelerator pedals.Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed formore than 5 minutes, cruise control will becancelled.82Cruise controlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROLOVERVIEWThe Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system isdesigned to aid the driver to maintain a gapfrom the vehicle ahead or a set road speed ifthere is no slower vehicle ahead.ACC is not a collision warning oravoidance system. Additionally, ACCwill not react to:•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.The ACC system uses a radar sensor, whichprojects a beam directly forward of the vehicle,to detect objects ahead.The radar sensor is mounted behind the badgein the upper grille, to provide a clear viewforward for the radar beam.• Only use ACC when conditions arefavourable (i.e., main roads with trafficmoving in lanes).•Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog,heavy rain, spray or snow.• Do not use on icy or slippery roads.• It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert,drive safely and be in control of the vehicleat all times.• Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt,metal badges or objects, including vehiclefront protectors, which may prevent thesensor from operating.• Do not use ACC when entering or leaving amotorway.• Do not use during abrupt or sharp turns,e.g., traffic islands, junctions, areas withmany parked vehicles or areas shared withpedestrians.USING ACCThe system is operated by controls mountedon the steering wheel. The driver can alsointervene at any time, by use of the brake oraccelerator pedals.Setting the vehicle's speed, activating anddeactivating ACC is done in the same way asusing Cruise control. See 82, USING CRUISECONTROL.1. Gap decrease button.2. RES (Resume): Resumes the ACC set speedafter it has been disengaged.3. CAN (Cancel) button.4. Gap increase button.ENTERING FOLLOW MODEWhen in Follow mode, the vehicle willnot decelerate automatically to a stop,nor will the vehicle always deceleratequickly enough to avoid a collision.Once a set speed has been selected, the drivercan release the accelerator and the set roadspeed will be maintained.83Adaptive cruise controlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane ora slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, thevehicle's speed will be adjusted automaticallyuntil the gap to the vehicle ahead correspondsto the default gap setting (gap level 3). Thevehicle is now in Follow mode. The amberwarning lamp in the Instrument panel will beilluminated, see 46, FOLLOW MODE (AMBER).The Message centre will display the gap, set inthe form of a vehicle with a varying number ofbars in front of it.The vehicle will then maintain the constant timegap to the vehicle ahead until:• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speedabove the set speed.• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or outof view.• A new gap distance is set.If necessary, the vehicle's brakes will beautomatically applied, slowing the vehicle andmaintaining the gap to the vehicle in front.The maximum braking which is applied by theACC system is limited and can be overriddenby the driver applying the brakes, if required.Note: Driver braking will cancel ACC.If the ACC system predicts that its maximumbraking level will not be sufficient, then anaudible warning will sound while the ACCcontinues to brake. DRIVER INTERVENE will bedisplayed in the Message centre. The drivershould take immediate action.When in Follow mode, the vehicle willautomatically return to the set speed when theroad ahead is clear, for instance when:• The vehicle in front accelerates or changeslane.• The driver changes lane to either side orenters an exit lane.The driver should intervene, if appropriate.If a direction indicator is used, ACC will reducethe gap to the vehicle ahead so as to respondmore quickly to the anticipated manoeuvre. Ifa manoeuvre is not actioned, the previous gapwill be restored after a few seconds. Enhancedresponse may not occur if ACC detects that itis inappropriate, i.e., you are already too closeto the vehicle ahead or you are already inanother lane.CHANGING THE FOLLOW MODE SETGAPIt is the driver's responsibility to selecta gap appropriate to the drivingconditions.Four gap settings are available and the selectedgap setting will be displayed in the Messagecentre when either gap adjustment button ispressed.Each gap level is indicated by an additional barin front of the vehicle icon in the Message centre(one bar (gap level 1) being the shortest, fourbars (gap level 4) being the longest). After theignition is switched on, the default gap (gaplevel 3) will be automatically selected, ready forACC operation.If Winter mode is selected, then the longest gap(gap level 4) will initially be selected.OVERRIDING THE SPEED ANDFOLLOW MODEWhenever the driver is overriding theACC by depressing the acceleratorpedal, the ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes to maintain separationfrom any vehicle ahead.84Adaptive cruise controlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The set speed and gap can be overridden bypressing the accelerator pedal when cruising atconstant speed or in Follow mode. If the vehicleis in Follow mode, the warning lamp will go outwhen the ACC is overridden by the driver usingthe accelerator and CRUISE OVERRIDE will bedisplayed on the Message centre. When theaccelerator is released the ACC function willoperate again and vehicle speed will decreaseto the set speed, or a lower speed if Followmode is active.QUEUE ASSISTQueue assist is an enhancement of AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) and, when active, willfollow a vehicle ahead to a standstill. It isintended for use in lines of traffic on majorroads, where minimal steering is required.If a vehicle ahead slows to a halt, Queue assistwill bring the vehicle to a stop and hold itstationary.While the vehicle is held stationary, Queue assistwill request the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) toapply if:• The driver cancels Queue assist.• The vehicle is stopped for more than 3minutes.• Driver intention to exit the vehicle isdetected.• A malfunction is detected.As the vehicle ahead moves away, a brief presson the accelerator will resume ACC operation.At very low speed, Queue assist may stop forstationary objects, e.g., when the vehicle aheadchanges lane to reveal a stationary object. Thevehicle's radar cannot always distinguishbetween a stationary vehicle and a fixed objectlike a road sign, drain cover or temporarybarrier. This may cause unexpected braking orcancellation and the driver should intervene, ifappropriate.ACC AUTO OFFACC will disengage, but not clear the memorywhen:• The CAN button is pressed.• The brake pedal is pressed.• Neutral (N), Park (P) or Reverse (R) gear isselected.• Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) activates.• Maximum vehicle speed is reached.ACC will disengage, and clear the memorywhen:• The ignition system is switched off.• A fault occurs in the ACC system.RESUMING THE SPEED AND FOLLOWMODERES should only be used if the driver isaware of the set speed and intends toreturn to it.By pressing the RES button after ACC has beencancelled, for example, after braking, the ACCwill become active again provided that the setspeed memory has not been erased. The originalset speed will be resumed (unless a vehicleahead causes Follow mode to become active)and the set speed will be displayed in theMessage centre for 4 seconds. Queue assistmay be resumed above 10 km/h (6 mph).Note: When the set speed is resumed, the rateof acceleration is influenced by the previouslyset Follow mode gap. A closer set gap willpromote greater acceleration.Note: When resuming a set speed while in acurve, acceleration is reduced. A more severecurve will reduce acceleration further.Remember that ACC and Queue assist areprimarily for use when minimal steering isrequired.85Adaptive cruise controlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ACCThe system acts by regulating the speed of thevehicle using engine control and the brakes.Gear changes may occur in response todeceleration or acceleration while in ACC mode.ACC is not a collision avoidance system.However, during some situations, the systemmay provide the driver with an indication thatintervention is required.An audible alarm will sound, accompanied bythe message DRIVER INTERVENE if the ACCdetects:• A failure has occurred while the system isactive.• That using maximum ACC braking only isnot sufficient.Note: ACC operates when the gear selector isin position Sor D.Note: When ACC is engaged, the acceleratorpedal rests in the raised position. Fully releasethe pedal to allow normal ACC operation.Note: When braking is applied by the ACCsystem, the vehicle's brake lamps will beswitched on, although the brake pedal will notmove.Note: When Intelligent stop/start is fitted, it mayoperate during a Queue assist stop. Press theaccelerator pedal for longer than normal torestart the engine and move off.DETECTION BEAM ISSUESDetection issues can occur:1. When driving on a different line to thevehicle in front.2. When a vehicle edges into your lane. Thevehicle will only be detected once it hasmoved fully into your lane.3. When going into and coming out of a bend.86Adaptive cruise controlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
4. When moving around a stationary vehicle.This may cause uncertainty as to whichvehicle should be followed.5. When the vehicle ahead turns out of yourlane. This may cause uncertainty as towhich vehicle should be followed.In these cases, ACC may brake late orunexpectedly. The driver should stay alert andintervene, if necessary.ACC MALFUNCTIONIf a malfunction occurs during operation of thesystem in cruise or follow modes, the ACCsystem will switch off and cannot be used untilthe fault is cleared. The message DRIVERINTERVENE appears briefly and is then replacedby the message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE. Ifmalfunction of the ACC or any related systemoccurs at any other time, the message CRUISENOT AVAILABLE will be displayed. It will not bepossible to activate the ACC system in anymode.Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the sensoror cover may inhibit ACC operation. Fitting of avehicle front protector or metallised badges mayalso affect ACC operation.The ACC system relies on its radar to detectobjects and constantly scans ahead. If the radardetects no objects ahead in ACC or Followmode, then the ACC will be deactivated, theaudible alarm sounds and the message DRIVERINTERVENE displays briefly. The message ACCSENSOR BLOCKED will then be displayed.The same messages may also be displayedwhile driving on open roads with few objectsfor the radar to detect.Clearing the obstruction allows the system toreturn to normal operation. If the obstructionis present when ACC is inactive (e.g. on initialstarting or with the ACC system switched off),the message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will bedisplayed.Tyres other than those recommended for yourvehicle, may have different sizes. This can affectthe correct operation of the ACC.FORWARD ALERT FUNCTIONThe system may not react to slowmoving vehicles.Limited detection and warning of objects ahead,is provided during ACC operation by the ACCFORWARD ALERT warning. The enhancedforward alert feature additionally provideswarnings when ACC is not engaged; if an objectis detected close ahead, then the warning toneand message will be issued. The brakes will notbe applied.The forward alert system does not initiate anyaction. The driver must take appropriate actionwhen the FORWARD ALERT message isdisplayed. However, the system monitors driveractions (e.g. braking, steering or indicating) andmay not initiate the warning display if theappropriate action has been taken early enough.The Forward alert function may be switched onor off from the Driving Features menu in theInstrument panel menu (see 41, INSTRUMENTPANEL MENU). When the warning lamp in theInstrument panel illuminates Forward alert isenabled, see 47, FORWARD ALERT (GREEN).The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:• Press the gap decrease button when ACCis disengaged to display and then decreasethe sensitivity of the alert.• Press the gap increase button to displayand then increase the sensitivity of the alert.87Adaptive cruise controlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The forward alert set gap is retained whenthe ignition is switched off.FORWARD ALERT is displayed in the Messagecentre.ADVANCED EMERGENCY BRAKEASSISTThe system may not react to slowmoving vehicles and will not react tostationary vehicles or vehicles travellingin the opposite direction.Warnings may not appear if the distanceto the vehicle ahead is very small or ifsteering wheel or pedal movements arelarge (e.g. to avoid a collision).The system utilises the same radarsensor as ACC and Forward alert - thesame limitations of performance apply.Advanced emergency brake assist is availableat speeds above approximately 7 km/h (5 mph)and improves braking response duringemergency braking, when a moving vehicle isdetected close ahead.If the risk of collision increases after theFORWARD ALERT warning is displayed,advanced emergency brake assist is activated.The brakes are automatically applied gently inpreparation for rapid braking (this may benoticeable). If the brake pedal is then pressedquickly, full braking is implemented, even if onlylight pressure is applied to the pedal. See 79,EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST (EBA).Note: Braking performance will only beimproved if the driver applies the brakes.Advanced emergency brake assist will functioneven if Forward Alert and ACC are switched off.If there is a fault with the system, FORWARDALERT UNAVAILABLE is displayed in theMessage centre. The vehicle can still be drivenand the braking system will still operate, butwithout advanced emergency brake assistance.Consult your Retailer/Authorised Repairer tohave the fault rectified.INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKINGThe Intelligent Emergency Braking(IEB) system may not react to slowmoving vehicles.The system will not react to stationaryvehicles or vehicles that are nottravelling in the same direction as yourvehicle.Warnings and automatic braking maynot occur if the distance to the vehicleahead is very small, or if the steeringwheel and pedal movements are large(e.g., to avoid a collision).IEB uses the same radar sensor as ACCand Forward alert. The samelimitations of performance apply. See83, ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROLOVERVIEW.When ACC is fitted, IEB is available at all speedsand will function even if ACC and Forward alertare switched off. The purpose of IEB is to reducethe impact speed with a slower vehicle aheadwhen a collision becomes unavoidable. IEB canbe disabled/enabled via the Instrument panelmenus, Driving Features and IEB. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.88Adaptive cruise controlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
If an imminent risk of collision occurs, anaudible warning is given. If a collision becomesunavoidable, IEB will apply the brakes at up tomaximum pressure. After IEB has activated, IEBSystem Was Activated is displayed in theMessage centre and the system is inhibited fromfurther operation until reset by a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.Note: The distance required to slow or stop thevehicle is dependent on the condition of thevehicle's tyres and the current road surface.If the radar sensor is blocked, by snow or heavyrain, for example, or there is a fault with thesystem, IEB Not Available is displayed in theMessage centre. The vehicle can still be drivenand the braking system will still operate, butwithout IEB. If the radar sensor is notconsidered to be blocked, consult a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.89Adaptive cruise controlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DRIVING MODES OPERATIONChanging between the driving modes will altervarious vehicle settings, for example, enginerevs may alter on selection of a different drivingmode, while at a constant accelerator pedalposition, and steering system feel may alsobecome heavier or lighter. These changes arenot dramatic but will be noticeable.The driving mode button is locatedin the centre console, close to thegear selector. See 280, DRIVERCONTROLS.To change the driving mode:• Press the driving mode button once - thedriving mode icons will appear in theMessage centre.• Within 2 seconds, press the driving modebutton until the required driving mode iconis highlighted.• A message will appear in the Messagecentre to confirm that the driving mode hasbeen selected, and the icon for the selecteddriving mode will appear in the right lowercorner of the Message centre.Note: If OFF is selected, a message in theMessage centre will confirm that theprevious driving mode is switched off, andthe icon will be extinguished in the Messagecentre.If no driving mode is selected, press the drivingmode button once to engage Winter drivingmode.If Winter, or Dynamic, driving mode is selected,press the driving mode button once to switchthe driving mode off.DYNAMICThe Dynamic driving modecoordinates the vehicle's controlsystems to help deliver a highperformance driving experience,enabling the vehicle's full potentialto be exploited. The vehicle'sresponses are aimed at involving thedriver in a more focused andpurposeful driving experience.Note: The Dynamic driving mode cannot beactive at the same time as the Winter drivingmode. Dynamic driving mode will remainselected for approximately 6 hours after theignition is switched off, after which point it willneed to be re-selected, if required.Note: During manual gear selection, see 75,MANUAL GEAR SELECTION, with Dynamicdriving mode selected and the transmission inSport (S), the transmission up-shifts are fullycontrolled by the driver. The transmission willnot change up automatically, even when theengine's (revolutions per minute (rpm)) speedlimit is reached. A gear shift indicator warninglamp will illuminate briefly, in the Messagecentre, at the recommended (up-shift) gearchange point. See 47, GEAR SHIFT (GREEN).WINTERThe Winter driving mode enhancesvehicle stability in low gripconditions. This helps the vehicle toperform in a more gentle andcontrolled manner, trying to avoidskidding; allowing more confidentprogress under adverse conditions.90Driving modesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The Winter driving mode cannot be activeat the same time as the Dynamic driving mode.The Winter driving mode will remain selectedindefinitely, even after the ignition is switchedoff. The Winter driving mode must be deselectedif no longer required.91Driving modesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITIONThe Traffic sign recognition system isa driving aid only. It remains thedriver's responsibility to drive with duecare and attention, in a manner whichis safe for the vehicle, its occupantsand the other road users. The drivershould still observe all other roadsigns, road markings, and situationsthat are not detected or recognised bythe Traffic sign recognition system.The Traffic sign recognition system uses theforward-facing camera, located in the base ofthe rear-view mirror, which detects speed signs,no overtaking signs and variable overhead speedsigns, to display symbols of the detected signsin the Message centre. Traffic signs with extrainformation (for example, reduced speed limitsfor wet road conditions) will also be detectedand compared with the vehicle’s systems (forexample, rain sensor, wipers, etc.) and may alsobe displayed in the Message centre. Speed limitinformation from the Navigation system will bedisplayed for roads with no signage.Note: If the Navigation is not available, theTraffic sign recognition system will use thecamera only.Note: Make sure the windscreen area in frontof the rear-view mirror is kept clean and free ofobstructions, for example, stickers, debris, mud,snow, ice, etc.The Traffic sign recognition system can beswitched on and off via the Driving Featuresmenu from the Instrument panel. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU. The system willoperate up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h(155 mph).The 3 basic functions of the Traffic signrecognition system are as follows:•Speed limit detection: A corresponding signwill be displayed in the Message centre.• Speed alert: When the vehicle's speed isgreater than (or equal to) the detected speedlimit, a flashing Red ring, around thedisplayed speed limit sign, will be displayedin the Message centre.Speed alert can be switched on/off, or thesettings can be adjusted to display at 3different settings:• When the vehicle's speed equals thedetected speed limit.• When the vehicle's speed is 5 mph or10 km/h above the detected speed limit;dependent on the Instrument panelbeing configured to display in mph orkm/h.• When the vehicle's speed is 10 mph or20 km/h above the detected speed limit;dependent on the Instrument panelbeing configured to display in mph orkm/h.• No overtaking zone: When a no overtakingsign has been detected, the system will alsodisplay a corresponding sign in theMessage centre.Note: The Traffic sign recognition system willnot detect road markings or situations with nosignage, for example, railway crossings, etc.Traffic sign recognition limitationsThe system may provide false information orfunction incorrectly in the following conditions:• Travelling in adverse weather conditions,for example, heavy fog, rain, snow, etc.• Concealed or covered signage.• Driving towards very bright lights/lamps.• The windscreen area in front of the camerais covered by a sticker, misted over, dirty,covered in snow or mud, etc.• Navigation information is incorrect.• Travelling in an area not covered by theNavigation system.92Driving aidsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• Non-conforming road signs.BLIND SPOT MONITORThe Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) systemis a supplement to, not a replacementfor, a safe driving style and use of theexterior and rear-view mirrors. Thesystem may not function under allspeeds, weather and road conditions.The BSM may not be able to giveadequate warning of vehiclesapproaching very quickly from behindor vehicles that are being overtakenrapidly.The BSM may not be able to detect allvehicles and may also detect objectssuch as roadside barriers, etc. Drivesafely at all times and use the exteriorand rear-view mirrors to avoidaccidents.The radar sensors may be impaired bymud, rain, frost, ice, snow, or roadspray. This may affect the system'sability to reliably detect a vehicle/object within the blind spot.Make sure the warning indicators in theexterior mirrors are not obscured bystickers or other objects.Do not attach stickers or objects to therear bumper, that may interfere with theradar sensors.The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system monitorsa zone that covers the area adjacent to thevehicle, that is not easily visible to the driver.The system uses a radar on each side of thevehicle to identify any overtaking vehicle/objectwithin the blind spot area (1) of the vehicle,while disregarding other objects which may bestationary or travelling in the opposite direction,etc.If an object is identified by the BSM system asbeing an overtaking vehicle/object, an amberwarning icon (2) illuminates in the relevantexterior mirror, to alert the driver that there isa potential hazard in the vehicle's blind spotand; therefore, that a lane change might bedangerous.The radar monitors the area extending from theexterior mirror rearwards, to approximately 6m behind the rear wheels and up to 2.5 m fromthe side of the vehicle (the width of a typicalcarriageway lane). The BSM is designed to workmost effectively when driving on multi-laneroads.93Driving aidsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: This radar sensor is approved in all RTTEcountries.Note: The system covers an area of a fixed lanewidth. If the lanes are narrower than a typicalcarriageway lane, objects travelling innon-adjacent lanes may be detected.Note: If rapidly overtaking vehicles are detectedon both sides simultaneously, the warning iconsin both mirrors will flash.The BSM automatically switches on andbecomes active when the vehicle is travellingat more than 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forward gear.When the system initiates, it performs aself-check, during which the warning icons inthe mirrors illuminate alternately for a shortperiod of time.The indicator dot (3) remains illuminated untilthe vehicle's forward speed exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph).The BSM is automatically disabled and an amberwarning indicator dot is displayed in the exteriormirrors when:• Reverse (R) gear is selected.• Park (P) is selected for vehicles withautomatic transmission.• The vehicle's speed is below 6 km/h (4mph).• The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is applied.The BSM can be enabled or disabled throughthe Instrument panel menu. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.Note: Automatic disabling of the BSM does notapply to vehicles with Reverse traffic detection.See 150, REVERSE TRAFFIC DETECTION.CLOSING VEHICLE SENSINGClosing vehicle sensing is asupplement to, not a replacement for,a safe driving style and use of theexterior and rear-view mirrors.Closing vehicle sensing may not beable to give adequate warning ofvehicles approaching very quickly fromdirectly behind the vehicle. Always usethe exterior and rear-view mirrors.The radar sensors may be impaired bymud, rain, frost, ice, snow, or roadspray. This may affect the system'sability to reliably detect anapproaching vehicle.Make sure that the warning indicatorsin the exterior mirrors are not obscuredby stickers or other objects.Do not attach stickers or objects to therear bumper, that may interfere with theradar sensors.94Driving aidsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
In addition to the functionality provided by theBlind Spot Monitor (BSM), Closing vehiclesensing monitors a larger area behind thevehicle. Closing vehicle sensing is designed toperform best on multi-lane motorways withfree-flowing traffic and is operational above 10km/h (6 mph) in a forward gear.1. Closing vehicle sensing monitors an areabehind the vehicle, up to a distance of 70m and approximately 2.5 m from each sideof the vehicle (the width of a typicalcarriageway lane).2. If a vehicle is detected approaching rapidly,an amber warning icon will flash in therelevant exterior mirror to indicate that thereis a potential danger.3. When the detected vehicle reaches the areamonitored by the BSM, the amber warningicon will illuminate continuously.Note: If rapidly overtaking vehicles are detectedon both sides simultaneously, the warning iconsin both mirrors will flash.Note: Closing vehicle sensing covers an area ofa fixed lane width. If the lanes are narrower thana typical carriageway lane, objects travelling innon-adjacent lanes may be detected.Note: Closing vehicle sensing is disabled whenthe vehicle is negotiating a tight radius curve.Note: When the BSM is disabled, Closing vehiclesensing is also disabled. See 41, INSTRUMENTPANEL MENU.Note: This radar sensor is approved in all RTTEcountries.BSM SENSORSThe BSM system will automatically disable ifeither of the sensors become completelyobscured; an amber indicator dot (3) isdisplayed in the exterior mirror and the messageBLIND SPOT MONITOR SENSOR BLOCKEDappears in the Message centre.Note: Blockage testing is initiated only whenthe vehicle's speed is above 10 km/h (6 mph)and will take at least 2 minutes of accumulateddriving above this speed, to determine that thesensor is blocked.If the sensors become blocked, check that thereis nothing obscuring the rear bumper and thatit is clear from ice, frost, and dirt.If a fault with one of the radar sensors isdetected, an amber warning indicator dot isdisplayed in the exterior mirror and the messageBLIND SPOT MONITOR NOT AVAILABLE isdisplayed in the Message centre.95Driving aidsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: Even if the detected fault affects the radarsensor on only one side of the vehicle, the wholesystem is disabled. If the fault is temporary, thesystem will operate correctly once the enginehas been switched off and then on again.If a fault in the system occurs, consult aRetailer/Authorised Repairer.96Driving aidsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PROGRESS CONTROL SYSTEMOVERVIEWThe Progress control system can help the driverto manoeuvre on slippery surfaces. The systemoperates in either a forward or a reversedirection at low speeds, for example, pullingaway from standstill, ascending or descendingan incline, and driving on unstable/slipperydriving surfaces such as, ice, snow, grass,gravel, sand, mud, etc.Note: This feature is also known as All SurfaceProgress Control (ASPC) or All Terrain ProgressControl (ATPC).USING THE PROGRESS CONTROLSYSTEMThe Progress control button islocated on the centre console. See280, DRIVER CONTROLS.Note: The driver’s seat belt must be buckledand all of the doors must be completely closedto enable the feature.Press and release the button, to enable theProgress control system. The button's LED lampwill illuminate, and a warning lamp will alsoilluminate in the Instrument panel to confirm.See 46, PROGRESS CONTROL SYSTEM(AMBER).Press and release the Progress control buttonagain to disable the system. The button's LEDlamp and the Progress control warning lampwill extinguish to confirm.When the ignition is switched off, the Progresscontrol system will be disabled.When enabled while the vehicle is stationary,the Progress control system will default to adescent control mode. The descent controlmode should be used in the event that thevehicle is to make a descent:• Select the required position for the rotarygear selector.Note: Any gear selector position can beused, including Neutral (N).• Release the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) orthe brake pedal, to allow gravity to makethe vehicle progress, up to the minimumfeature speed of 3.6 km/h (2.2 mph).• Progress control will hold this speed, untilthe system detects the use of theaccelerator pedal, brake pedal, or the Cruisecontrol SET+ button on the steering wheel.Note: Descent control mode will beresumed after the accelerator pedal, or thebrake pedal is released.Note: Progress control will change to a fullfunction mode, when it detects the use ofthe Cruise control SET+ button on thesteering wheel. See 98, PROGRESSCONTROL SYSTEM SETTINGS.Full function mode should be used for all othermanoeuvres that require the use of Progresscontrol, for example, while making an ascent,or pulling away on level ground, etc.Note: Full function mode will not operate withthe gear selector in the Neutral (N) position. Inthis event, a message will appear in theMessage centre.Note: Press and hold the brake pedal, whileusing the SET+ button when the vehicle isstationary.The Progress control system can also beenabled by pressing and releasing the buttonwhile the vehicle is moving, without the needto stop or apply the brake pedal. The currentvehicle speed will then be used as the set speedand the Progress control system will thendefault to the full function mode.97Progress control systemRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: If the vehicle's brakes are firmly applied,during the operation of Progress control, thesystem will exit the full function mode and willthen enter into the descent control mode.Note: Light and gentle application of the brakepedal, during the operation of Progress control,will lower the target vehicle speed. When thebrake pedal is fully released, the Progresscontrol system will maintain the speed at whichthe brake pedal was released.Note: The driver can override the Progresscontrol system at any time, with the use of thebrake pedal or the accelerator pedal.Note: If the vehicle's speed exceeds 30 km/h(18.6 mph), the Progress control system willbe suspended, and the system will then go intoa standby mode, until the vehicle's speed is lessthan 30 km/h (18.6 mph).Note: If the vehicle's speed exceeds 80 km/h(50 mph), the Progress control system will bedisabled. If required, the system will have to beswitched on again, via the Progress controlbutton.The driver must maintain full control ofthe steering and brakes at all times.When the Progress control system is enabledand the brake pedal is fully released, the systemwill help to provide controlled and progressiveassistance for the vehicle to:• Pull-away from stationary in a forward orreverse direction on level ground, and uphillor downhill.• Perform low speed manoeuvring in aforward or reverse direction.•Make progress and maintain a selected, lowtarget (set) speed, from 3.6 km/h (2.2 mph)up to 30 km/h (18.6 mph).In the event that the vehicle's braketemperatures exceed the normal operatinglimits, an ASPC temporarily unavailable warningwill be displayed in the Message centre. TheProgress control system will then fade-out andbecome temporarily inactive. Once the brakeshave returned to the normal operatingtemperatures, the message will extinguish andthe Progress control system will resume normaloperation, if still required.Do not attempt a steep descent if theProgress control system is not enabledor the warning message is displayed.PROGRESS CONTROL SYSTEMSETTINGSWhen the Progress control system is enabled,the desired target (set) speed for the vehiclecan be set and adjusted via the Cruise controlbuttons, mounted on the right side of thesteering wheel. See 82, USING CRUISECONTROL.•While the vehicle is moving, press the SET+button for the vehicle's current speed to bethe set speed. Press repeatedly (or pressand hold) to increase the target speed, upto a maximum speed of 30 km/h (18.6mph).Note: If the vehicle is at a standstill, thenpress and hold the brake pedal while usingthe SET+ button.Note: Light and gentle application of theaccelerator pedal will temporarily overridethe current set target speed. When theaccelerator pedal is fully released, theProgress control system will revert back tothe previously selected target speed.Note: Dependent on the vehicle'sspecification, the set speed will either bedisplayed as a marker on the speedometer,or displayed in the Message centre.98Progress control systemLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• (-): Press repeatedly (or press and hold) todecrease the desired target vehicle speed,down to a minimum speed of 3.6 km/h (2.2mph).Note: Light and gentle application of thebrake pedal will also lower the target vehiclespeed. When the brake pedal is fullyreleased, the Progress control system willmaintain the speed at which the brake pedalwas released. If the brake pedal is pressedwhen the Progress control system is active,then a slight pulsation movement might befelt through the brake pedal.•CAN: Press to put the Progress controlsystem into descent control mode. See 97,USING THE PROGRESS CONTROLSYSTEM.•RES: Press to resume the set speed, if thetarget vehicle speed has been lowered bygently applying the brake pedal.RES should only be used if the driver isaware of the set speed and intends toreturn to it.When the vehicle is travelling at speeds between30km/h (18.6 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph), theProgress control operation will be suspendedand the system will enter into a standby mode,then the Progress control warning lamp willalso flash. The Progress control system willresume operation if the vehicle's speed thenbecomes less than 30 km/h (18.6 mph), butdoes not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). If thevehicle’s speed does exceed 80 km/h (50 mph),then the Progress control system will bedisabled and the warning lamp will extinguish.If required, the system will have to be switchedon again.99Progress control systemRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TOUCH SCREEN HOME MENUAlways run the engine during prolongeduse of the Touch screen. Failure to doso may discharge the vehicle's battery;preventing the engine from starting.Avoid spilling or splashing liquids ontothe Touch screen.1. Touch to return to a higher menu level.Note: The Return icon will be disabled onthe HOME screen.2. Touch the screen or press the button, toselect the PHONE screen.3. Touch to select Voicemail when a phone isconnected, or the PHONE screen when nophone is connected.4. Touch the arrow or swipe the screen to theright, to select the MY HOME screens.5. Touch to select the media shortcut:• CD, Bluetooth®and USB: Alternatebetween play and pause.• Radio: Station mute.Alternatively, touch to switch the Mediasystem off.6. Status icons. See 101, TOUCH SCREENSTATUS ICONS.7. Touch the screen or press the button, toselect the media screen. If the Media systemis already switched on, then touch to selectthe current media source menu.Note: When the system is active, currentinformation for the media being played willbe displayed.8. Touch to select the FRONT CLIMATEscreen. See 136, FRONT CLIMATECONTROL.100Touch screen - HomeLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
9. Touch to select the SEAT COMFORT screen.See 141, HEATED SEATS,142, CLIMATESEATS,142, SEAT MASSAGE.10. Touch the arrow or swipe the screen to theleft, to select the EXTRA FEATURESscreens.11. Touch to set a destination or to cancelguidance if a destination is already set.12. Touch to select the NAVIGATION assistancemap.13. Touch to select Home Settings, via theSETTINGS pop-up menu.14. Press to switch DUAL VIEW on/off or selectthe AUDIO SETTINGS screen (on non-Dualview vehicles).15. Indicator for the number of availablescreens. The solid dot indicates the positionof the currently displayed screen.16. Press to select the HOME screen, or doublepress to select the PREVIEWS screen.17. Press to switch Park Assist on/off or toswitch the screen on/off (on vehicleswithout Park Assist fitted).For vehicles with Park Assist, the screencan be switched off via the SETTINGSpop-up menu.TOUCH SCREEN STATUS ICONSThe icons displayed at the top of the screenprovide information about the status of thevehicle feature or application.Phone signal strength indicator.Phone battery level indicator.Status of the Heated/Climate seats.Traffic Alerts.Wi-FI signal.Connecting.Phone set to divert incoming calls.Network connection status.TOUCH SCREEN USEDo not use excessive pressure whenselecting items on the Touch screen.Definitions for the various button taps andTouch screen gestures used in this handbook:• Touch: Briefly touch the screen's surfacewith your fingertip.•Touch and hold: Touch the screen's surfacefor an extended period of time.• Swipe: Move your fingertip over thescreen's surface in a fast linear movement.•Drag: Touch an object and move it with yourfingertip over the screen's surface, withoutlosing contact.• Pinch: Spread two fingers apart on a mapor image to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out.TOUCH SCREEN CAREDo not use abrasive cleaners on theTouch screen. For approved cleaningproducts, contact your Retailer/Authorised Repairer.101Touch screen - HomeRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
MY HOME SCREENThe MY HOME screen enables the user todisplay and arrange widgets and shortcuts toapplications.1. MY HOME screen: Multiple screens areavailable.2. Widgets and shortcuts: These are availablein different sizes and can be moved todifferent locations.3. Personalised MY HOME screen name:Touch to edit.4. Touch the arrows or swipe the screen toview other MY HOME screens, or return tothe HOME screen.5. Edit icon: Touch to display edit mode.EDITING SHORTCUTS, WIDGETS ANDSCREENSAdding a widget: Touch the Edit icon or touchand hold the screen to display edit mode. Next,touch any of the +symbols on the screen andselect from the available categories in the footer.Scroll through the gallery of widgets using thedirection arrows or by using a swipe action.Touch to select a widget; this will then displayon the MY HOME screen.Moving a widget: Touch and hold the screen,then drag the widget to a new location. To movethe widget to another MY HOME screen, dragit to the side of the screen.Resizing a widget: When the widget has beenselected, moved to a new location, or newlycreated, a resize toggle will be displayed. Touchthe toggle to resize the widget.Delete a widget: Touch and hold the screen,then drag the widget to the delete bar.102Touch screen - My homeLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Edit a personalised screen name: Touch thescreen name and enter text using the keyboard;touch OK to complete.Moving a screen: Pinch the screen or doublepress the Home button to display PREVIEWSof the HOME,MY HOME and EXTRA FEATURESscreens. Touch the preview to display thechosen screen. Touch the Edit icon or touchand hold the screen to display the EDITPREVIEWS screen. Touch and drag the screenpreview to the required position.Adding a screen: While in the PREVIEWSscreen, touch the Edit icon or touch and holdthe screen to display the EDIT PREVIEWSscreen. Touch the +symbol to create a new MYHOME screen. When adding or moving a widget,it can be dragged to the left side of the screen;this will then create a new MY HOME screen.Note: A maximum of 4 MY HOME screens canbe added.Deleting a screen: While in the PREVIEWSscreen, touch the Edit icon or touch and holdthe screen to display the EDIT PREVIEWSscreen. Touch and hold the chosen MY HOMEscreen and drag it to the delete bar and release.103Touch screen - My homeRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
EXTRA FEATURESTouch the Extra feature to launch the requiredapplication or setting screen:•Rear Media: See 108, REAR MEDIACONTROL FROM THE TOUCH SCREEN.•Eco Data: The Eco Data system is designedto help the driver maximise fuel economyby providing vehicle data and driving tips.Real time Eco Data can also be displayed inthe Instrument panel.•Cameras: See 153, SURROUND CAMERASYSTEM.•InControl Apps: See 182, INCONTROLAPPS.•Live: See 182, INCONTROL PRO SERVICES.•Seats: See 141, SEAT COMFORT ANDADJUSTMENT.•Valet Mode: See 104, SELECTING VALETMODE.•Contacts: See 159, CONTACTS.•Voice: See 175, USING VOICE CONTROL.•Bluetooth: See 122, PAIRING ANDCONNECTING USING THE MEDIA PLAYER.•Settings: See 106, GENERAL SETTINGS.Note: The number of Extra features will vary,depending on the specification of the vehicle.SELECTING VALET MODEValet mode allows the vehicle to be driven andlocked by a parking attendant, without givingaccess to the luggage compartment andglovebox. Valet mode also prevents operationof the Touch screen, to prevent access to phonenumbers or navigation addresses. Only essentialdriver assist features are available, such asCameras, Parking Aid, etc.Valet mode can be activated by using the MasterPIN (set in Settings) or by using a temporaryPIN (if the Master PIN is unknown), to allowsomeone other than the owner to set Valetmode.When set with the Master PIN, only the MasterPIN can unlock Valet mode. When set with atemporary PIN, the temporary PIN or the MasterPIN will unlock Valet mode.To select Valet mode:1. Touch Valet Mode in the EXTRA FEATURESscreen.2. Enter the Master PIN or a memorable 4 digittemporary PIN. If using a temporary PIN,you will be prompted to confirm the PIN. Ifyou wish to cancel the PIN, touch theReturn icon. If the confirmation PIN isincorrectly entered, you will be promptedto enter the PIN again. See 106, GENERALSETTINGS.3. The VALET MODE screen is displayed toindicate that a PIN has been accepted andValet Mode is active.The luggage compartment and glovebox arenow securely locked in Valet mode and the ValetMode On screen is displayed.DESELECTING VALET MODETo deselect Valet mode:1. When you re-enter the vehicle, touch thescreen.2. Enter your Master PIN or temporary PIN (ifused to set) and touch OK.Home screen is displayed to indicate that thePIN has been accepted and Valet mode has beendeactivated.• The luggage compartment and gloveboxwill return to the previously set securityrequirement.• The Touch screen will be enabled.104Touch screen - Extra featuresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: If the Master PIN is forgotten, Valet modecan only be deactivated by your Retailer/Authorised Repairer.105Touch screen - Extra featuresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
GENERAL SETTINGSTouch the Settings icon from any screen,followed by All Settings and then General.The General settings menu is divided intocategories:•Time and DateNote: Setting a year too far in the futurecould stop certain online apps fromworking, as the certificate will appear to beinvalid.•Display•Screensaver•Master PINNote: The default Master PIN is 1926. Thisshould be changed to your own PIN as soonas possible.•Legal information•Data Collection (only when set).Touch to display the list of settings for therequired system.SYSTEM SETTINGSTouch the Settings icon from any screen,followed by All Settings and then Features.The Features settings menu is divided intocategories.•Home•Navigation•Media•Phone•Climate•Rear Media•Seats•Connectivity•Cameras•InControl Apps•Live•Voice•Bluetooth.Touch to display the list of settings for therequired system.Note: The list will vary, depending on thespecification of the vehicle.106Touch screen - SettingsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
MEDIA CONTROLSIn the interest of safety, only operate,adjust or view the system when it issafe to do so.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.1. On/off and volume control:• Press to switch the system on/off.• Rotate to adjust the volume level(displayed on the Touch screen).Note: The Media system will operate withthe ignition on or off, but will always switchoff when the ignition is switched off. Switchthe system on again, if required.Note: If the volume is turned to zero whilea Compact Disc (CD) is playing, the CD willpause play. Play will resume when a greatervolume is selected.2. CD/DVD eject button.3. Media source options.4. Select Audio Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. See 109, AUDIO SETTINGS.5. Press for direct access to the media screen.6. CD/DVD loading slot: The player willaccommodate one disc at a time.Insert a disc into the loading slot untilresistance is felt. The player mechanism willcomplete the loading.7. Press to select DUAL VIEW or the AudioSettings menu. See 130, DUAL VIEWCONTROLS or 109, AUDIO SETTINGS.107Media overviewRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
REAR MEDIA CONTROL FROM THE TOUCH SCREENTouch Rear Media on the media screen, toselect the REAR MEDIA control screen.1. Touch to select the rear media source.2. Touch to switch the left-side rear screenon/off.3. Touch to switch the right-side rear screenon/off.4. Touch to access the Rear Media Settingsvia the SETTINGS pop-up menu.5. Touch to lock or unlock the remote control.6. Touch to listen to the selected media via thecabin's audio.7. Forward/Skip for the selected screen.8. Play/Pause for the selected screen (ifapplicable to the source selected).9. Rewind/Skip for the selected screen.Note: When the main REAR MEDIA controlscreen is displayed on the Touch screen, theremote control will be locked out.AUDIO STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS1. MODE: Short press to scroll through all ofthe media sources.2. Press to increase the volume for anysource.3. Press to decrease the volume for anysource.4. Seek up:Short press:108Media overviewLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• To select the next radio favourite.• To select the next track on the chosenmedia source - CD, MP3, etc.• When the phone is in use, press toscroll up lists of calls or contact entries.• To select the next TV channel on thechannel list or the next video/DVDchapter.Long press:• To auto-seek up the frequency to thenext radio station.• To fast forward the current playingtrack, video or chapter.5. Seek down:Short press:• To select the previous radio favourite.• To select the previous track or start ofthe current track on the chosen mediasource - CD, MP3, etc.• When the phone is in use, press toscroll down lists of calls or contactentries.• To select the previous TV channel onthe channel list or the previousvideo/DVD chapter.Long press:•To auto-seek down the frequency to thenext radio station.• To rewind the current playing track,video or chapter.AUDIO SETTINGSTo view, touch the Settings icon from anyscreen and then Audio Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu.To adjust the sound settings:• Touch +or -to adjust the Bass,Treble orSubwoofer levels. Alternatively, touch theslider bar and drag or touch anywhere onthe bar and release.To adjust balance and fade:Touch the arrows to move the sound focal pointto the desired area of the vehicle. Alternatively,touch the sound focal point and drag it to therequired position or touch anywhere on thevehicle graphic and release.To adjust surround sound settings:• If Meridian Surround or MeridianReference is available, touch Meridian,Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS Neo:6 to selectSurround sound. Select Stereo to switchSurround sound off.Note: Surround sound options are not availablefor certain sources where the surround soundmode is set automatically.LOADING DISCSTo prevent CD mechanism damage, donot insert any object other than aCD/DVD into the disc slot. Objects, suchas coins, tickets and cards, will cause amechanism error and permanentdamage to the device.Do not force the disc into the slot.109Media overviewRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Do not use irregular shaped CDs orDVDs, and those with a scratchprotection film or self-adhesive labelattached.Do not use mini-sized CDs, even with anadaptor.Recordable (CD-R) discs and re-writable(CD-RW) discs may not functioncorrectly.Recordable (DVD-R or DVD+R) discsmay not function correctly.Dual-format and dual-sided discs (DVDPlus, CD-DVD format) are thicker thannormal CDs and so playback cannot beguaranteed and jamming may occur.Only use an approved CD cleaning kit.Only use high quality 12 cm circular discs.The player will accommodate one CD or DVDdisc at a time.When a CD is loaded, the ripping media optionis available. Select Media Settings, via theSETTINGS pop-up menu.CONVERSATION ASSISTConversation assist uses the vehicle's audiosystem and the front and rear microphones toenhance the conversation over the vehicle'sinterior noise.The Conversation assist controls are located inthe VOLUME SETTINGS screen.Select All Settings via the SETTINGS pop-upmenu, and then Features. Next select Media,followed by Volume Settings. See 106, SYSTEMSETTINGS.Conversation assist offers 3 options:•Off: Touch to switch the system off.•Normal: Touch to select normal volume.•High: Touch to select high volume.When active, front passenger voices arereproduced through the rear speakers and rearpassengers voices are reproduced through thefront speakers. The system is disabled when ata standstill and progressively increases withvehicle speed and background noise.Note: The system is disabled when at astandstill, during phone calls, or at highervolumes, for example, when loud music isplaying.GRACENOTE®END USER LICENSINGAGREEMENTGracenote Terms of UseThis application or device contains softwarefrom Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote(the “Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to do disc or file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers orembedded databases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform other functions. Youmay use Gracenote Data only by means of theintended End-User functions of this applicationor device.This application or device may contain contentbelonging to Gracenote’s providers. If so, all ofthe restrictions set forth herein with respect toGracenote Data shall also apply to such contentand such content providers shall be entitled toall of the benefits and protections set forthherein that are available to Gracenote.110Media overviewLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers foryour own personal non-commercial use only.You agree not to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Software or anyGracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREENOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTESERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licence touse the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licenceterminates, you agree to cease any and all useof the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves allrights in Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers, includingall ownership rights. Under no circumstanceswill Gracenote become liable for any paymentto you for any information that you provide. Youagree that Gracenote may enforce its rightsunder this Agreement against you directly in itsown name.The Gracenote service uses a unique identifierto track queries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowing anything aboutwho you are. For more information, see the webpage for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for theGracenote service.The Gracenote Software and each item ofGracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”Gracenote makes no representations orwarranties, express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Data from theGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the rightto delete data from the Gracenote Servers or tochange data categories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient. No warranty ismade that the Gracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or that functioning ofGracenote Software or Gracenote Servers willbe uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced or additionaldata types or categories that Gracenote mayprovide in the future and is free to discontinueits services at any time.GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESEXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOTWARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BEOBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. INNO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FORANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS ORLOST REVENUES.©2013. Gracenote, Inc. All Rights Reserved.111Media overviewRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LICENSINGManufactured under licence from DolbyLaboratories.Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol areregistered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Manufactured under licence, under U.S. Patent#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762; 6,487,535; 7,003,467 & other U.S.and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS,the Symbol, and Neo:6 are registeredtrademarks, & DTS Digital Surround and theDTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Productincludes software. ©DTS, Inc. All RightsReserved.Manufactured under licence, under U.S. Patent#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued & pending. DTS andthe Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos aretrademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includessoftware. ©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.Music and video recognition technology andrelated data are provided by Gracenote®.Gracenote is the industry standard in musicrecognition technology and related contentdelivery. For more information, please visitwww.gracenote.com.112Media overviewLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and music andvideo-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,copyright ©2000 to present Gracenote.Gracenote Software, copyright ©2000 topresent Gracenote. One or more patents ownedby Gracenote apply to this product and service.See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustivelist of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote,CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote" logo are either registered trademarksor trademarks of Gracenote in the United Statesand/or other countries.113Media overviewRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AM/FM RADIO CONTROLSIn the interest of safety, only operateor adjust the system when it is safe todo so.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.1. Rear Media: Select for rear media options.2. Find: Touch to display options for findinga required station, frequency or genre.•STATION LIST: Touch the Station listicon to display a list of available stationson the selected waveband.•FREQUENCY INPUT: Touch theFrequency input icon to display thekeypad. Enter the required frequencyand touch OK.•GENRE: Touch the Genre icon to displaya list of available genres. Select therequired genre from the list.3. Favourites: Touch to display a single list ofAM,FM and DAB favourite stations. Touchthe star to remove the selected station fromthe Favourites list. Touch the stationfrequency or name to select that station andplay it.To rearrange the order of the list, touch theEdit icon. Drag and drop selected items, tothe desired position. Touch OK to confirm.4. Band: Touch to view and select a radioband; AM,FM or DAB. The radio will tuneto the last used station on that radio band.5. Source: Touch to display all media sources.6. Seek down:• Touch or swipe the Touch screen fromleft to right, to seek down to the nextradio station.• Touch and hold to activate continuousseek mode.7. Displays information about the currentstation.114AM/FM RadioLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Touch anywhere on the channel's name ornumber to view the frequency Input keypad.Enter the required frequency and touch OK.Note: The keypad will only allow the inputof possible frequencies valid for thevehicle's market.8. Displays information from the broadcastingstation. Touch to view further information(if available); touch again to close thefurther information display.9. Seek up:• Touch or swipe the Touch screen fromright to left, to seek up to the next radiostation.• Touch and hold to activate continuousseek mode.10. Touch the Favourite icon to add to or deletefrom the Favourites list. This will behighlighted when the tuned station is set asa favourite.11. Touch to view further information; touchagain to close the further informationdisplay.12. Select AM/FM Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. Touch to activate/deactivatethe following features: RDS,Traffic,News,Station list order,AF and REG. See 115,RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS).Note: The Media system provides a 2-channelradio, enabling occupants to listen to 2 differentradio stations at the same time (not available inall markets).Note: Electronic devices used within, connectedto, or within close proximity to the vehicle, mayaffect the performance of this system (e.g.,radio reception, etc.).RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS)Your radio is equipped with an RDS, whichenables the Media system to receive additionalinformation with normal FM radio signals.Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDSinformation.Select AM/FM Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu, to view or alter the RDS settings.•RDS: Select ON or OFF.•Traffic Alerts (TA): Provides local travelinformation.•News: Provides news information.•Station list order: List stations by Name orFrequency.•Alternative Frequency (AF): Select to allowthe radio to automatically retune to astronger AF for the current station. This isuseful on a journey where the vehicle travelsthrough different transmitter areas.•Regionalisation: When ON it allows anAlternative Frequency (AF) switch to localservices that have similar, but not identicalcontent.When OFF, it restricts AF switching toalternative services with identical, contentonly.115AM/FM RadioRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DAB RADIO CONTROLSIn the interest of safety, only operateor adjust the system when it is safe todo so.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.1. Rear Media: Select for rear media options.2. Find: Touch to display options for findinga required station.•DAB STATION LIST: Touch to view alist of available channels. The list isarranged in alphabetical order; selectthe up or down arrows to scroll throughthe list.•DAB GENRE:Touch to list availablegenres. These are channels groupedinto categories (Pop Music,Travel,etc.).•SEARCH: Touch to search using thekeypad. Enter the required channel andselect OK.3. Favourites: Touch to display a single list ofAM,FM and DAB favourite stations. Torearrange the order of the list, touch theEdit icon. Drag and drop selected items, tothe desired position. Press OK to confirm.4. Band: Touch to view and select a radioband; AM,FM or DAB. The radio will tuneto the last used station on that radio band.5. Source: Touch to display all media options.6. Seek down:• Short touch or swipe the Touch screenfrom left to right, to select the previouschannel.7. Display showing the current channel/frequency (FM).8. Channel information: Touch to view DABtext.9. Seek up:• Short touch or swipe the Touch screenfrom right to left, to select the nextchannel.116DAB radioLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
10. Touch the Favourite icon to add to or deletefrom RADIO FAVOURITES. This will behighlighted when a tuned station is set asa favourite.11. Artist or station text/graphic displayed. Ifunavailable, a generic graphic is displayed.Touch to view further information; touchagain to close the further informationdisplay.12. Select DAB Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. Touch to manage thefollowing features: Link to FM Stations,Frequency Band and Announcements. See117, DAB RADIO SETTINGS.Note: The Media system provides a 2-channelradio, enabling occupants to listen to 2 differentradio stations at the same time (not available inall markets).Note: Electronic devices used within, connectedto, or within close proximity to the vehicle, mayaffect the performance of this system (e.g.,radio reception, etc.).DAB RADIO SETTINGSIn DAB Settings:• If the Link to FM Stations setting isswitched on and the signal strength for achannel falls below an acceptable level, theMedia system will automatically switch tothe FM version of this station (only whenavailable).• Choose Frequency Band if moving to aregion that uses a different digital band.Available formats are:• Band 3.• Band L.• Band 3 & Band L.• Band 3 China.• Band 3 China & Band L.•Select Announcements, (Traffic, News, etc.)from the list. The selected announcementswill interrupt the current programme, whenbroadcast.117DAB radioRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PORTABLE MEDIA CONNECTIONSPortable media devices can be connected to themedia hub located in the cubby box. Rear seatpassengers can connect at the rear of the centreconsole. Optical discs can be inserted into theCD/DVD drive located in the centre console.Compatible portable devices include:• USB mass storage devices (e.g., a memorystick). Devices must use FAT or FAT32.Note: External hard drives are notrecommended to be left in the vehicle forextended periods, as it could reduce the lifeof the device.• Optical media (Album CDs or DVDs).• iPod (iPad, iPod Touch, iPhone, iPod Nanoand iPod Classic Gen4, Gen5, Gen6 aresupported - full functionality for olderdevices cannot be guaranteed). iPod ClassicGen1, Gen2, Gen3 and iPod Shuffle are notsupported.• Media devices that support HDMI or MHL.If you are connecting an iPod, mass storage orBluetooth®wireless technology device, use theTouch screen to operate and search the device.Many of the controls are similar to thoseavailable for CD playback.Please disconnect your iPod whenleaving the vehicle. Failure to do so mayresult in the iPod battery discharging.Note: The Media system will play MP3, WMA,WAV, AIFF, M4A, FLAC, AAC, AMR, LPCM andALAC files. Other formats are available.To maximise playback quality, it isrecommended that lossless compression isused for any media files on USB. Failing this, itis recommended that compressed files utilisea minimum bitrate of 192 kb/s (a higher bitrateis strongly recommended).Note: iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.,registered in the US and other countries.Note: Some MP3 players have their own filesystem that is not supported by this system. Touse your MP3 player, you must set it to USBRemovable Device or Mass Storage Devicemode.For a list of compatible Bluetooth wirelesstechnology devices, please refer to the Jaguarwebsite at www.jaguar.com.The Bluetooth wireless technology deviceslisted have been tested for compatibility withJaguar vehicles. Performance will vary, basedon the device’s software version and batterycondition. Devices are warranted by theirmanufacturer, not Jaguar.118Portable mediaLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CONNECTING A MEDIA DEVICERead the manufacturer's instructions forany device, before it is connected to theMedia system. Make sure that the deviceis suitable, and comply with anyinstructions regarding connection andoperation. Failure to do so may result indamage to the vehicle’s Media systemor the media device.Connect the device into the appropriate socket:1. HDMI/MHL socket.2. USB sockets.3. Rear media HDMI/MHL socket.4. Rear media USB sockets.5. Rear media HDMI socket.Note: On vehicles fitted with Executive classrear seats, the Rear media connection socketsare located in the rear storage compartment inthe centre armrest. See 63, STORAGECOMPARTMENTS.Note: Use the cable supplied with your mediadevice to connect to the USB socket.Note: High quality cables are recommended tobe used with Apple devices as this will enhanceoperation.Note: A USB hub cannot be used to connectmore than one USB device to the audio unit.Note: Devices connected to the USB ports willbe charged, but devices that are fully dischargedwill not play.Higher-rated devices that require more than7.5W to charge may not display an indicatorwhen charging; these devices will still chargewithout this indicator being displayed.Note: HDMI devices are not charged.Note: Apple devices should be updated to thelatest iOS version, otherwise, full support cannotbe guaranteed.Note: Voice command support can only beguaranteed for newer Apple devices, i.e, devicesthat use the lightning connector.Note: Options, such as Repeat and Shuffle,relate to the device currently playing; they willnot apply to any subsequent device. PreviousRepeat and Shuffle selections will bedeactivated when a new queue has been created.Note: The available sockets vary, according tovehicle specification.119Portable mediaRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PORTABLE MEDIA CONTROLSDo not adjust the main audio unit'scontrols, or allow the system to distractthe driver while the vehicle is moving.Driver distraction can lead toaccidents, causing serious injury ordeath.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.See 107, MEDIA CONTROLS.Portable media includes Media Library (internalstorage), CD, iPods, iPads, iPhones, USB massstorage, HDMI/MHL and Bluetooth®wirelesstechnology devices.1. Rear media: Select for Rear media options.2. Queue: Opens the current queue of tracksselected from the portable media devices(if supported). To add a track, album, artistor genre to the queue, touch and hold therespective item at any time, and aninformation banner will give furtherinstructions.Note: Selecting a track, album, artist orgenre not currently in the queue to play willcause the current queue to be erased.3. Find: Select the Artist, Album or Song iconto display results in alphabetical order.Select the More icon to display a list offurther available options (Playlists,Genres,Most played,Videos,Folder Browse etc.).• Select Folder Browse to view thecontents of the connected device, whichare displayed as dictated by the filestructure.120Portable mediaLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• Select a file to start playback. Select afolder or subfolder to view theircontents.• To return to the MEDIA LIBRARYscreen, touch the Return icon.4. Source: Displays all Media sources.• The list of media devices will bedynamically populated based onwhether they are connected.Note: Sound quality and volume levelsavailable from connected media devicesmay vary widely.5. Displays information about the currenttrack. Touch the displayed text to view a listof the tracks in album. Touch again to returnto the current track information display.Note: Only connected devices that supportID3 Tags shall have the informationdisplayed.Information is also displayed in theInstrument panel.6. Album artwork/graphic display. Ifunavailable, a generic graphic is displayed.Touch to view the list of tracks on thealbum, the queue list or information for thecurrent track, touch again to revert back orpress the Return icon.Note: ID3 Tag information displayed.7. Interactive time progress bar: Touch or dragto move forward/back through the currenttrack.8. Select Media Player Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu, to manage thevehicle's memory (import and delete files)and change the CD rip settings.9. More like this icon: Select to automaticallygenerate a smart playlist based on similartracks. Touch, at any time, to create a newlist based on the track currently beingplayed.Note: Loading time is dependent on contenttype.Note: When a CD is selected, the More likethis icon is replaced by a Rip icon.Notification will be displayed when rippingof the CD is complete.10. Repeat: Touch to repeat the current trackcontinuously; the Repeat icon will behighlighted when active. Touch again tocancel.11. Shuffle: Touch to shuffle the current musicqueue continuously; the Shuffle icon will behighlighted when active. Touch again tocancel.12. Skip/Scan forward:• Touch and release to skip forward tothe next track.• Touch and hold to scan forwardsthrough the current track. Play willresume when released.• Swipe the Touch screen from right toleft to skip to the next track.13. Pause/Play: Select to pause playback. Selectagain to resume playback.14. Skip/Scan backward:• Touch and release to skip back to theprevious track.• Touch and hold to scan backwardsthrough the current track. Playback willresume when released.• Swipe the Touch screen from left toright to skip to the previous track.PLAYING A PORTABLE DEVICEIf you are using a USB mass storage device orcompatible Apple device, you can controlplayback using the Touch screen controls.121Portable mediaRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
If you are using a Bluetooth®wirelesstechnology device, you can control playbackusing the Touch screen, but some controls maybe unavailable.If you are using any media device via theHDMI/MHL socket, then you must controlplayback from the device itself.It is recommend not to use a Hard DiscDrive via the USB link while the vehicleis in motion. These devices are notdesigned for in-car use and may bedamaged.CONNECTING MULTIPLE DEVICESYou can connect multiple devicessimultaneously to the portable media interfaceand switch between them using the Touchscreen. Select iPod,USB,Bluetooth orHDMI/HML, to switch between inputs.If, after changing to the newly-docked device,you change back to the first device, playbackwill resume at the point you left it (USB andiPod only).See 119, CONNECTING A MEDIA DEVICE.PAIRING AND CONNECTING USINGTHE MEDIA PLAYERNote: The process of pairing and connectingyour media device with the vehicle, using themedia device, will vary depending on the typeof media device.1. Switch on the ignition and make sure thatthe Touch screen is active.2. From the media screen, select All Settingsvia the SETTINGS pop-up menu. Next selectFeatures, followed by Bluetooth.3. The BLUETOOTH SETTINGS screen will bedisplayed; select Pair New Device.4. The vehicle’s Bluetooth wireless technologysystem will remain discoverable while inthe pairing screen.5. Using the media device, search for devices.On some media devices, this is referred toas a new paired device. See your device'soperating instructions for furtherinformation.The vehicle's default discoverable name isJaguar XJ.6. When the vehicle's discoverable name isdiscovered, follow the on-screeninstructions.Select Yes when prompted, to confirm thepairing. On some media devices, this willcomplete the pairing.Alternatively, on other media devices, thevehicle's system will display a PIN (PersonalIdentification Number). When prompted,either enter the PIN on your device, or selectYes, to confirm that the PIN displayed,matches the vehicle's PIN.7. Once your media device is paired andconnected to the system, a confirmationmessage will be displayed. Either, select theReturn icon or return to the previouslyselected media, and then select Source.8. Select your media device from the displayedmedia options.Note: If, when playing media through a wirelessconnected Apple device, the Apple device is thenalso connected to a USB port, the wirelessconnection will become disabled. To reconnectvia wireless, the USB connection will need tobe disconnected and the Apple devicereconnected via the BLUETOOTH SETTINGSscreen.Note: It can take a considerable amount of timeto sync an Apple device with a large quantity ofmedia on it. During this time, playback can onlybe accessed from the Apple device's mediaplayer and not via voice commands.122Portable mediaLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: After the Apple device has been syncedwith the Media system, the device can then becontrolled via the Media system or operated bythe Voice system. If the Apple device's track listis updated after the device was previouslysynced, the device will need to be re-synced tothe Media system. During this time, the Appledevice's voice commands will becometemporarily unavailable.For further information on Bluetooth®wirelesstechnology, see 161, BLUETOOTH®INFORMATION.CHANGING/DISCONNECTING A DEVICETo connect/disconnect a paired Bluetooth®device:1. Touch the Settings icon to seect AllSettings via the SETTINGS pop-up menu.Next select Features, followed by Bluetooth.2. The BLUETOOTH SETTINGS screen will bedisplayed; select Paired Devices.3. Paired devices will be listed; select Connector Disconnect.To unpair a paired Bluetooth device:1. Select All Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. Next select Features,followed by Bluetooth.2. The BLUETOOTH SETTINGS screen will bedisplayed; select Paired Devices.3. Paired devices will be listed; select thedevice's name followed by Forget Device.To forget all paired Bluetooth devices:1. Select All Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. Next select Features,followed by Bluetooth.2. The BLUETOOTH SETTINGS screen will bedisplayed; select Forget All Devices.IMPORTING/RIPPING MEDIAThe vehicle's internal storage, which is used fornavigation data, speech data and metadatadatabases, will also allow media to be storedby:•Importing media from USB memory devices(via the MEDIA PLAYER SETTINGS screen).• Ripping media from CDs.123Portable mediaRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
VIDEO MEDIA PLAYER CONTROLSIn the interest of safety, only operate,adjust or view the system when it issafe to do so.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.Note: The system will play MPEG1, MPEG2,WMV9, VC-1, H.264, H.263, MPEG4 ASP, RAW,VP6 and VP8 files.Note: To maximise the playback quality, it isrecommended not to playback video files witha resolution greater than 1 080p.Note: The quality of video playback may beaffected by the USB 3 memory device's speed.1. Rear Media: Select for rear media options.2. Queue: Opens the current queue of videosselected from the relevant device.3. Find: Touch the More icon to search, orselect from the list of videos. These aredisplayed in alphabetical order.4. Source: Touch to display all media sources.Note: The media sources (e.g., DVD or USB3 memory devices) will be displayed, onlyif they are inserted or connected.5. Touch to select full screen mode or wait forthe preview screen to time out.Touch the screen again to view the controlsat any time.6. Interactive time progress bar: Touch or dragto move forward/back through the currentvideo track.7. Select Media Player Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu.8. Zoom: Select to zoom in/out between the 2available options.9. Repeat: Touch to repeat the current videocontinuously. The Repeat icon will behighlighted when active. Touch again tocancel.10. Shuffle: Touch to shuffle the current videoqueue. The Shuffle icon will be highlightedwhen active. Touch again to cancel.124Portable mediaLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
11. Skip/Scan forward:• Touch and release to skip forward tothe next video track.• Touch and hold to scan forwardsthrough the current video track.Playback will resume when released.• Swipe the Touch screen from right, toleft to skip to the next video track.12. Select to Pause/Play: Select to pauseplayback. Select again to resume playback.A second touch will stop and reset thevideo.13. Skip/Scan backward:• Touch and release to skip backward tothe previous video track.• Touch and hold to scan backwardsthrough the current video track.Playback will resume when released.• Swipe the Touch screen from left toright, to skip to the previous videotrack.VIDEO MEDIA INHIBIT WITH VEHICLEMOVINGWhen the vehicle is moving, the video picturewill automatically be inhibited. A relevant safetymessage will be displayed on the Touch screen.If Dual view is fitted, a prompt for the passengerto activate Dual view is displayed. See 130,DUAL VIEW.FULL SCREEN VIEWWhen full screen mode is selected, the seekcontrols operate in the same manner as theydo in preview mode.125Portable mediaRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TELEVISION CONTROLSIn the interest of safety, only operate,adjust or view the system when it issafe to do so.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.Note: While Jaguar continue to work closelywith its partners to develop TV standardsworldwide, we cannot guarantee the TV featurein all countries at all times.1. Rear Media: Select for rear media options.2. Options: Touch to display various TVoptions.• Touch the Zoom icon to zoom in from16:9/4:3 to fit screen. Touch again tozoom out.• Touch the Audio icon to accessavailable alternative audio tracks for thecurrent broadcast.• Touch the Video icon to accessavailable alternative video feeds for thecurrent broadcast.3. Find: Touch to display options for findinga TV channel/programme.•CHANNEL LIST: Touch the icon to viewa list of available channels. Select theup or down arrows to scroll throughthe list or swipe the Touch screen upor down. Touch the name of thechannel to tune to and view thatchannel.•WHAT'S ON: Touch the icon to view theElectronic Programme Guide (EPG).To set a programme reminder: Selecta programme that is currently notbroadcasting, to display a summarypage. Select Set Reminder. Once set,an icon will display in the EPG. Only 4reminders can be set for the same time.126TelevisionLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To view a programme currently beingbroadcast, select the requiredprogramme to display a summary page.Select View Now to tune to thatchannel. The selected programmedisplays in full screen view.Note: The TV system is continually checkingthe availability of channels. It is possible fora channel to be in the list, but not actuallyavailable (e.g., when driving throughdifferent transmitter regions).4. Favourites: Touch to display a single list offavourite stations. To rearrange the orderof the list, touch the Edit icon in the footer.Drag and drop selected items to the desiredposition. Press OK to confirm.5. Source: Touch to display all radio andmedia options.6. Seek down: Touch or swipe the Touchscreen from left to right, to tune to and viewthe previous channel in the TV channel list.7. Current channel and programme titledisplay.8. Seek up: Touch or swipe the Touch screenfrom right to left, to tune to and view thenext channel in the TV channel list.9. Touch to add/delete from the Favouriteslist.10. Touch to browse to the next TV programme.Touch the programme banner to tune to thebrowsed channel.11. Select TV Settings via the Settings pop-upmenu. Select for Traffic Alerts (TA),News,Parental Lock,BCAS Serial Number,Channel Lock,Genre Lock, and RatingLock.12. Displays the current TV programme playingand what's playing next.13. Touch to browse to the previous TVprogramme. Touch the programme bannerto tune to the browsed channel.For information on the use of the audio/videocontrols on the audio unit and steering wheel,see 107, MEDIA CONTROLS.127TelevisionRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DVD PLAYER CONTROLSIn the interest of safety, only operate,adjust or view the system when it issafe to do so.Sustained exposure to high soundlevels (greater than 85 decibels) candamage your hearing.1. Rear Media: Select for rear media options.2. Options: Touch to access Zoom In/Out,Audio,Angle and Subtitle options.Note: The options displayed are dependenton the inserted DVD options.3. DVD Menu: Touch to access the DVD menu.•Top Menu: Only displayed if supportedby the DVD.•Resume: Touch to resume play.• Menu navigation keys: Touch to movethe menu up or down.Note: The DVD menu can also be selectedby touching the screen in full screen mode.4. Source: Touch to display all media options.5. DVD information: Touch to select full screenmode.Touch the screen again to view the controlsat any time. Alternatively, swipe the Touchscreen, to seek the previous/next chapter.6. Interactive time progress bar: Touch or dragto move forward/back through the currentDVD.7. Select DVD Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. Touch to activate/deactivatethe following features: Traffic and News.8. Seek up: Touch to view the next DVDchapter; touch and hold to fast forward.9. Pause/Play: Touch to pause playback. Touchagain to resume playback.10. Seek down: Touch to view the previous DVDchapter; touch and hold to rewind.128DVD playerLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
For information on the CD/DVD loading slot andeject button, and the use of the media controlson the Media system and steering wheel, see107, MEDIA CONTROLS,108, AUDIO STEERINGWHEEL CONTROLS, and 109, LOADING DISCS.129DVD playerRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DUAL VIEW CONTROLS1. Touch the Return icon to show media in fullview screen for the passenger, and returnthe driver to their previous screen.2. The information banner is momentarilydisplayed when Dual view is switched on.3. Indicates the screen being operated for thepassenger.4. When the vehicle is being driven, movingimages will be inhibited from the driver'sview and a relevant safety message will bedisplayed.Note: Moving images will be reactivatedwhen the vehicle is stationary.5. Touch to switch off Dual view mode.Note: Alternatively, long press the Dual viewbutton to switch off.6. Touch this icon, if the passenger wants tolisten to the selected Dual view source (e.g.,Media player), while viewing the samescreen as the driver (e.g., Navigation).Note: If the Dual view controls are not used forover 10 seconds, the display will revert to fullscreen view. Press the Dual view button againto view the controls.DUAL VIEWDual view allows the front passenger to view orlisten to media, while the driver is using analternative system (e.g., Radio or Navigation).1. While in the selected screen (e.g.,Navigation) press the Dual view button(located below the Touch screen).2. The SELECT SOURCE screen will bedisplayed. Select the chosen media source(e.g., Media player). This will be displayed,along with the Dual view controls in thefooter.130Dual viewLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
3. After the passenger has selected the mediasource and completed the required changes,the Return icon should be selected to givethe drivers view back, leaving the passengerto view their selected source.4. If the passenger wants to take control ofthe Touch screen, the Dual view buttonshould be pressed. This will take both thepassenger and the driver back to theselected media source and display the Dualview controls in the footer. To return to Dualview, touch the Return icon or press theDual view button.Note: The Dual view controls will also bedisplayed on the driver’s view.131Dual viewRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
HEADPHONES1. Press to switch the headphones on/off.2. Press to change the audio channel.3. Rotate to adjust the headphone volume.4. The status LED indicator lamp:• When a signal is being received, thelamp will illuminate continuously.•When a signal is not being received, thelamp will flash.• When the battery power is low, thelamp will flash and then go out after ashort delay.5. The battery cover retaining screw.6. The battery access cover.When the battery power is low, the headphoneswill emit a beeping sound every 90 seconds.To replace the batteries, use the following theprocedure:1. Remove the battery access cover retainingscrew (5).2. Pull the cover (6) away from theheadphones.3. Install the new AAA batteries.Note: Make sure that the polarity of thebatteries matches that shown inside theheadphone’s battery compartment.4. Replace the battery access cover.Note: The headphones will not operate ifthe batteries are fitted incorrectly.Note: Under normal usage, the expectedbattery life is 6 months.Note: Always use good quality batteries ofthe same type.Used batteries must be disposed ofcorrectly, as they contain harmfulsubstances. Seek advice on batterydisposal from a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer and/or the local authority.132HeadphonesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DEPLOYING THE REAR SEATSCREENS1. Push the release latch inwards at the bottomof the screen.2. Pull the underneath edge of the screen todeploy to the open position.When the display is fully open, the angle can beadjusted by pulling it towards the rear of thevehicle.Note: Care should be taken not to force thedisplay beyond the fully open position.When folded beyond the horizontal position, thedisplay will switch off in preparation for beingstored away. Opening the display, or pushingit back into the open position, will automaticallyswitch it back on.REAR SEAT REMOTE CONTROL1. Left screen select, or reactivate the screenwhen in standby mode (illuminates whenselected).2. Press and release to switch the selectedscreen on/off (all selected audio fromsources will continue).Press and hold to switch off the systemcompletely (audio and video source willstop).3. Right screen select, or reactivate the screenwhen in standby mode (illuminates whenselected).4. Press to toggle between the CLIMATE andSEATS screens.133Rear seat screensRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
5. Cursor control: Up*.6. Cursor control: Right*.7. OK: Press to confirm selection.8. Settings: Some settings for featuresdisplayed on the Rear seat screens areavailable, however, full functionality iscontrolled from the front Touch screen.9. DVD menu.10. Next track/file/channel/station.11. Cabin audio volume increase/decrease/mute(volume control for the headphones is onthe side of the headphones).12. Cabin audio on/off (when switched off, theheadphone's audio will be available).13. Play/Pause.14. Previous track/file/channel/station.15. Mark selection as a favourite.16. Press to return to a higher menu level.17. Cursor control: Down*.18. Cursor control: Left*.19. Shortcut to the rear HOME screen.20. Press once to view the selected mediasource. Press again to access the SELECTSOURCE menu.*These are multi-function keys depending onthe source selected.If the remote control becomes unpaired fromthe rear screens, re-pair via the Rear MediaSettings, on the SETTINGS pop-up menu. Oncethis is complete, both the Left and Right screenbuttons will flash twice. See 106, SYSTEMSETTINGS.REAR SEAT REMOTE CONTROLBATTERYLow battery power is indicated by the remotecontrol power button flashing 3 times whenpressed.To renew the batteries:• Remove the chrome battery cover.• Install 2 AAA batteries. Make sure thepolarity of the batteries matches that showninside the remote control batterycompartment.Note: The remote control will not operateif the batteries are fitted incorrectly.Note: Always use good quality batteries ofthe same type.• Replace the chrome battery cover.134Rear seat screensLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Battery disposal: Used batteriesmust be disposed of correctly, asthey contain harmful substances.Seek advice on disposal from yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer and/oryour local authority.REAR SEAT SCREEN - HOME SCREENThe rear screens allow rear seat passengers touse selected features that are also available tothe front occupants.The features displayed on the rear screens canonly be controlled by using the rear screenremote control. See 135, REAR SEAT SCREENSOVERVIEW.The following features are available for use bythe rear passengers:•Media: The Media system can be accessedvia the rear screens. Some of the featuresavailable will be different to the front Touchscreen options. See 114, AM/FM RADIOCONTROLS,118, PORTABLE MEDIACONNECTIONS,126, TELEVISIONCONTROLS, and 128, DVD PLAYERCONTROLS.•Navigation: The Navigation system can beviewed and operated from the rear screens.Some of the features available will bedifferent to the front Touch screen options.See 168, REAR SEAT NAVIGATION.•Seats: The rear seat heating or coolingtemperature can be adjusted via the rearscreens. See 141, SEAT COMFORT ANDADJUSTMENT.•Climate: The Rear climate control system,can only be adjusted via the rear screens.The system can be locked via the frontTouch screen. A Padlock icon is displayedwhen the Rear Climate control system hasbeen locked.The Rear climate control system cannot beswitched off via the rear screens. See 139,REAR CLIMATE CONTROL.•Settings: Some settings for features shownon the rear screens are available by pressingthe Settings button on the remote control,however, full functionality is controlled fromthe front Touch screen. See106, SYSTEMSETTINGS.REAR SEAT SCREENS OVERVIEWTo activate the system using the remote control,press the appropriate screen select (1) or (3),followed by the on/off button (2).Select the desired system. Subsequentselections on the remote control will operatethe last selected system.Note: To prevent accidental damage, alwaysstore the remote control in the stowage areaprovided, when not in use.135Rear seat screensRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROLTo access the FRONT CLIMATE screen, selectClimate from the HOME screen or press theClimate button.1. Temperature control: Rotate to adjust thetemperature (16°C - 28°C). The temperatureis displayed on the Touch screen.On the driver's side only, HI (high) or LO(low) can be selected.2. AUTO control: Press to switch automaticoperation on.Note: AUTO mode is the recommendednormal operating mode. The AirConditioning (A/C) and heating andventilation controls automatically providean optimum environment at the selectedtemperature.Note: The temperatures displayed on theFRONT CLIMATE screen are indicators only.When viewing the REAR CLIMATE screen,these indicators become active and can bechanged directly via the Touch screen.3. Defrost: Press to activate the blowers, A/Cand the front and rear screen heaters andto prohibit recirculation.4. Recirculation: Select to recirculate air insidethe vehicle.Press briefly to select timed recirculation.Recirculation will switch off automaticallyafter a set time (dependent on the ambienttemperature).136Climate and comfortLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Press and hold to select latchedrecirculation. Recirculation will remain onuntil the button is pressed again.Note: Prolonged use at low temperaturesmay cause the windows to mist.5. Air Conditioning A/C: Press to switch on/off. The A/C system can be switched on/offindependently of the other Climate controlfunctions.6. The blower speed: Rotate to adjust theblower speed.Blower speed is automatically set in AUTOmode. Adjusting the blower speed willcancel AUTO mode.With the blower speed set at minimum,rotate the control counter-clockwise toswitch the Climate control system off.7. Rear screen heater: Press to switch on/off.If left on, it will deactivate after a timedperiod, dependent on the outsidetemperature.8. Front screen heater: Press to switch on/off.If left on, it will deactivate after a timedperiod, dependent on the outsidetemperature.Note: In cold ambient conditions, the frontand rear screen heaters will switch onautomatically when the engine is started.This function can be switched on/off viaClimate Settings.9. Press to access the FRONT CLIMATE screenon the Touch screen.10. Select the down arrow or swipe down thescreen to view the REAR CLIMATE menu.Select the up arrow or swipe up the screento return to the FRONT CLIMATE menu. See139, REAR CLIMATE CONTROL.11. Blower speed indicator: Only displays inmanual mode.12. Temperature display.13. Air distribution to the feet: Touch to switchon/off.14. Air distribution to the face: Touch to switchon/off.15. Sync: Select to change all the front and rearpassenger climate settings to match that ofthe driver.16. Air distribution to the front windscreen:Touch to switch on/off.17. External temperature display.Note: When the external temperature is lowenough that ice may be present on the road,an amber snowflake warning lamp willilluminate in the Instrument panel. See 46,EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE (AMBER).18. Select Climate Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. From this menu, thetemperature units can be changed andautomatic deployment of the front and rearheated screen function can be switched on/off. Also, the sensitivity of the Air purity andthe Auto air flow speed can be adjusted,see 138, AIR QUALITY SENSOR.19. Select to switch the front and rear Climatecontrol systems on/off.Note: Some functions are not available on allvehicles.Note: If the Climate control system is switchedoff, pressing an AUTO button or the Defrostbutton will switch the Climate control systemon.Note: Water expelled by the A/C system maycollect underneath the vehicle when parked.This is not a cause for concern.137Climate and comfortRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AUTOMATIC RECIRCULATIONIf an air quality sensor is fitted, the Climatecontrol system will monitor exterior air pollutionand humidity, and select recirculation if eitherreaches a predetermined level. This feature onlyoperates when the Air purity function is active.The sensitivity of the air quality sensor can beset via the Climate Settings screen. See 138,AIR QUALITY SENSOR.AIR QUALITY SENSORThe sensitivity of the Air purity can be adjusted:1. Select Climate Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. See 136, FRONT CLIMATECONTROL.2. Select Air purity, and then next select theappropriate level; Low,Medium or High.To deactivate, touch OFF.138Climate and comfortLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLTo access the REAR CLIMATE screen from theTouch screen, swipe down the vehicle graphicor select the down arrow from the FRONTCLIMATE screen. See 136, FRONT CLIMATECONTROL.Alternatively, to access the CLIMATE screenfrom the rear screen, press the Climate buttonon the rear remote control. See 135, REAR SEATSCREENS OVERVIEW1. Temperature adjustment: Select the redarrow to increase and the blue arrow todecrease the temperature. The temperaturesetting is displayed between the arrows.2. Air distribution to the feet: Touch to switchon/off.3. Air distribution to the face: Touch to switchon/off.4. AUTO: Select to switch automatic operationon.5. Rear panel lock: Select to disable the Rearclimate control switches, in order to preventthe rear passengers from adjusting the Rearclimate settings. Select again to re-enablethe controls (front screen only).6. Select the up arrow or swipe up the vehiclegraphic to view the FRONT CLIMATEscreen. Select the down arrow to return tothe REAR CLIMATE screen (front screenonly).In addition to the selectable controls, the REARCLIMATE screen displays symbols that indicatethe status of heating and ventilation functions.Note: If the Climate control system is switchedoff, pressing a rear AUTO button will switch thesystem on.Note: If the system is in Defrost mode, all rearcontrols are disabled and no airflow is availableto the rear occupants.139Climate and comfortRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The Rear climate can be set with the controlslocated in the rear centre console.1. Temperature control: Rotate to adjust thetemperature (16°C - 28°C). The temperatureis displayed on the Touch screen (REARCLIMATE screen).2. AUTO control: Press to switch automaticoperation on/off.3. Blower speed: Rotate to the adjust blowerspeed.4. Air distribution to the face: Press to switchon/off. The switch indicator illuminateswhen on.5. Air distribution to the feet: Press to switchon/off. The switch indicator illuminateswhen on.6. Seat temperature control: Press the redarrow to increase and the blue arrow todecrease the temperature. The LEDsilluminate to indicate the current setting.7. Climatic seat zone control: Press to selectfull seat,cushion only or back only heatingor cooling temperature. The switchindicators illuminate accordingly.In addition to the selectable controls, theCLIMATE screen displays symbols that indicatethe status of heating and ventilation functions.Note: If the Climate control system is switchedoff, pressing a rear AUTO button will switch thesystem on.Note: If the system is in Defrost mode, all rearcontrols are disabled and no airflow is availableto the rear occupants.140Climate and comfortLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SEAT COMFORT AND ADJUSTMENTTo access the SEAT COMFORT screen, selectthe Seats icon on the HOME screen or press theSeats button on the fascia. See 100, TOUCHSCREEN HOME MENU.Rear seat passengers are able to control theseat heating or cooling temperature via theswitches on the rear centre console or from therear screens. See 17, REAR SEAT MASSAGEor 135, REAR SEAT SCREENS OVERVIEW.1. Temperature control: Select the red arrowto increase and the blue arrow to decreaseseat heating or cooling temperature2. Seat temperature on/off.3. Switch the seat massage on/off. See 142,SEAT MASSAGE.4. Vary the intensity of the selected massageprogram (front seats only).5. Select Seat Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu.6. Seats button: Press to display the SEATCOMFORT screen.Alternatively, select the Seats icon on theHOME screen, or select Seats from theEXTRA FEATURES screen. See 104, EXTRAFEATURES.7. Select the seat massage program.8. Touch the Seat adjust icon to togglebetween the SEAT COMFORT and SEATADJUST screens. See 144, REMOTE SEATS.9. Select the required front or rear seatposition.10. Select the required seat zone for heatingand cooling temperature position. See 142,CLIMATE SEATS.HEATED SEATSNote: The seat heaters will only operate whenthe engine is running.141Climate and comfortRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Rear seat passengers are able to control seatheating via the switches on the rear centreconsole or from the rear screens. See 17, REARSEAT MASSAGE or 135, REAR SEAT SCREEN -HOME SCREEN.The Heated seats are controlled through theTouch screen.To access the heating controls for frontand rear seats:• Press the Seats button on the fascia.• Or, select the Seats icon on the HOMEscreen.•Or, select Seats from the EXTRA FEATURESscreen. See 104, EXTRA FEATURES.Select the required front or rear seat position.Press the Power icon to switch the selected seatheating on/off.To adjust the seat heating:•Touch the red arrow to increase the heating.•Touch the blue arrow to reduce the heating.Alternatively, swipe the scale up or down to therequired level of heating.CLIMATE SEATSNote: The Climate seats will only operate whenthe engine is running.Rear seat passengers are able to control seattemperature via the switches on the rear centreconsole or from the rear screens. See 139, REARCLIMATE CONTROL or 135, REAR SEATSCREEN - HOME SCREEN.To access the temperature controls forfront and rear heated and cooled seats:• Press the Seats button on the fascia.• Or, select the Seats icon on the HOMEscreen.•Or, select Seats from the EXTRA FEATURESscreen. See 104, EXTRA FEATURES.Select the required front or rear seat position.Press the Power icon to switch the selected seattemperature on/off.To adjust the seat temperature:• Touch the red arrow to increase thetemperature.• Touch the blue arrow to reduce thetemperature.Alternatively, swipe the red/blue scale up ordown to the required temperature.To select the seat zone:• Touch the Seat zone icon.• Select the zone: Back,Base or All.Seat zone selection is also available by pressingthe selected seat position on the vehicle graphic.SEAT MASSAGENote: Seat massage will only operate when theengine is running.Seat massage may not operate when thevehicle's interior temperature is below 0°C orabove 50°C.Rear seat passengers are able to control seatmassage via the switches on the rear centreconsole or from the rear screens. See 17, REARSEAT MASSAGE or 135, REAR SEAT SCREEN -HOME SCREEN.Front and rear seat massage can be controlledthrough the front Touch screen:To access the seat massage controls forthe front and rear:• Press the Seats button on the fascia.• Or, select the Seats icon on the HOMEscreen.•Or, select Seats from the EXTRA FEATURESscreen. See 104, EXTRA FEATURES.Select the required front or rear seat position.Press the Power icon to switch the selected seatmassage on/off.142Climate and comfortLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To adjust the seat massage program:• Select the Seat massage program icon.• Select the appropriate icon for Wave,Up,Down,Shoulder or Lumbar massage.Note: Only Wave,Shoulder or Lumbarmassage, is available for rear seats.To adjust the seat massage intensity:• Touch the +or -icon to vary the intensityof the selected program. Alternatively, swipethe scale up or down to the requiredmassage intensity.Note: Seat massage intensity is onlyavailable for front seats.To set Auto Massage:• Select Seat Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. See 144, SEAT SETTINGS.Note: The massage programs have a 10 minutecycle, which will need to be reselected forrepeated use.143Climate and comfortRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
REMOTE SEATSThe front and rear passenger seats can becontrolled by the driver's seat adjustmentcontrols. To select the remote seat controlsscreen, touch the Seat adjust icon to togglebetween the SEAT COMFORT or SEAT ADJUSTscreens. See 141, SEAT COMFORT ANDADJUSTMENT.1. Driver's seat adjustment controls.2. Select the front or rear seat position to beadjusted. Once selected, the driver canadjust the seat using the seat adjustmentcontrols on the side of the driver's seat.3. Reset Rear Seats: Touch to enable thememory function. Use button 3 on thedriver's side to reset the rear seats to thehome position. See 14, DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY.4. Select Seat Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. See 144, SEAT SETTINGS.5. Touch the Seat comfort icon to togglebetween the SEAT ADJUST or SEATCOMFORT screens.SEAT SETTINGSSelect Seat Settings via the SETTINGS pop-upmenu:•Easy Entry Exit on/off:When Easy Entry Exit is enabled, the rearseats will automatically return to theirnormal position when a rear door is opened.The left or right side seats will be activatedby the corresponding door.•Auto Massage on/off:A time delay can be set from the start of ajourney. Press Time delay to select the timeoptions.144Climate and comfortLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
USING THE PARKING AID1. Parking Aid button.2. Parking Aid detection zones.3. 360°PDC (Park Distance Control) sensordetection zones.4. 360°PDC (Park Distance Control) virtualdetection zones.5. Touch to select the 360°PDC SETTINGSmenu.•Trajectory Lines: Select OFF or ON.6. Vehicle steering trajectory lines.7. Detection zones.• Grey blocks indicate objects detectedthat do not pose a threat (not in acollision path with the vehicle).• Coloured blocks indicate collisionthreats detected by the sensors.8. Touch to select the 360°PDC plan view andRear camera display.9. Touch to lower the volume of the 360°PDCbeeps.Parking Aid/360°Park Distance Controlsensors may not detect moving objects,such as children and animals, untilthey are dangerously close. Always useextreme caution when manoeuvring.The Parking Aid/360°Park DistanceControl sensors may not detect someobstructions, for example, narrow postsor small objects close to the ground.If accessories are fitted to the rear of thevehicle, particular care must be takenwhen reversing. The rear sensors willonly indicate the distance from thebumper to the obstacle.145Parking featuresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The Parking Aid/360°PDC systems assist thedriver while manoeuvring the vehicle at lowspeeds in confined spaces.When active, object tracking along the front andsides will be displayed on the Touch screen.The 4 side sensor zones provide the 360°PDCmonitoring along the vehicle sides. When anobject falls within the vehicle's sensing range,the Parking Aid/360°PDC system will track theobject and display it on the virtual sensors area.Graphics representing the vehicle's steeringtrajectory lines are also shown on this view.Should an object not be a collision threat to thevehicle, it will be displayed as a grey block; allother collision threats are displayed in colour.When the vehicle is stationary and an object/person approaches from the side, the virtualsensors will not detect it. Also, at vehiclestart-up, the vehicle has no sensor informationabout side objects/persons in the virtual zones.In both of these situations, an !will be displayedon the Touch screen in these zones.The front, side, and outer rear sensors monitora 1.2 m area around the vehicle. The inner rearsensors monitor a 1.8 m area at the rear of thevehicle.The Parking Aid/360°PDC system isautomatically activated when Reverse (R) gearis selected. The sensors will remain active untilthe vehicle's speed reaches 16 km/h (10 mph).If a forward gear is subsequently selected, thefront, outer rear, and side sensors will remainactive until the vehicle’s speed reaches 16 km/h (10 mph).Note: The Parking Aid system will always bedisabled if the vehicle's speed exceeds 16 km/h(10 mph).When an object is identified as a collision threat,the Parking Aid system will emit a warning tone,which increases in frequency as the vehicle getscloser to the object. The tone becomes constantwhen the obstacle is within 300 mm of thevehicle.If objects are detected in both the front and rearzones, an interchanging tone between the frontand rear will sound.Note: The sensors should be kept clean tomaintain accuracy and performance. See 199,SENSORS AND CAMERAS.PARKING AID SYSTEM FAULTIf a system fault is detected, the indicator buttonwill flash 3 times. Also, a graphic and themessage Parking Aid Unavailable. Consultyour dealer will be displayed on the Touchscreen. Contact a Retailer/Authorised Repaireras soon as possible.PARKING AID VOLUMEThe volume of the Parking Aid warning tonescan be adjusted by rotating the volume controlwhile the tones are active. See 280, DRIVERCONTROLS.Pressing the Mute icon on the Touch screen inthe Parking Aid or Camera features will reducethe audio output for that manoeuvre only.146Parking featuresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PARK ASSISTUsing the Parking Aid sensing technology, ParkAssist is an aid to manoeuvring the vehicle inand out of parking spaces. Park Assist will takecontrol of the vehicle's steering system tomanoeuvre the vehicle.The driver must maintain full control ofthe accelerator and brake throughout theparking manoeuvre.Note: A Park Assist manoeuvre can be cancelledat any point, by holding/turning the steeringwheel or by pressing the Park Assist button.Park Assist comprises of 3 different features:1. Parallel parking: For reversing into a parkingspace that is parallel to the vehicle.2. Perpendicular parking: For reversing into aparking space that is at 90°to the vehicle.3. Parking exit: For exiting from a parallelparking space.All Park Assist instructions are displayed in theMessage centre.Park Assist sensors may not detectmoving objects, such as children andanimals, until they are dangerouslyclose. Always use extreme cautionwhen manoeuvring and always useyour mirrors.Park Assist is a driving aid only. Itremains the driver's responsibility todrive with due care and attentionduring parking manoeuvres.Park Assist sensors may not detectsome obstructions, e.g., narrow posts,small objects close to the ground,protruding elevated objects and, in somecircumstances, bicycles or motor cyclesparked alongside the kerb.All sensors must be kept clean and freefrom debris or obstructions, e.g., leaves,mud, snow, ice, frost or insects. Failureto keep the sensors clean may result insensor miscalculation or falseindications.Park Assist must not be used if:• A temporary spare wheel is in use.147Parking featuresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• A sensor is damaged or the bumper isdamaged sufficiently to affect a sensormounting point.• A sensor is obstructed by items attached tothe vehicle, e.g., bumper covers, a bicyclerack, stickers, etc.•The vehicle is being used to transport a loadthat extends beyond the vehicle's perimeter.Note: All of the doors and the luggagecompartment lid must be securely closed whenusing Park Assist.Note: During any Park Assist manoeuvre, theParking Aid system will remain active and willsound when objects are detected near thevehicle.SELECTING PARK ASSISTA short press of the Park Assist button willswitch the system on.The Park Assist button can be used to togglethrough the 3 Park Assist options:1. A first press of the button switches thesystem on and selects Parallel park.2. A second press of the button selectsPerpendicular park.3. A third press of the button selects Parkingexit.4. A fourth press switches the system off.When selected, all instructions for the 3 ParkAssist options are displayed in the Messagecentre. Always take action when the text oraudio alerts an instruction.USING PARK ASSISTFor assistance when parking, select Parallelpark,Perpendicular park or Parking exit.As the vehicle is driven forwards, the size of apotential parking space is assessed.Note: For Park Assist to search effectively,maintain a distance of 0.5 m to 1.5 m from thevehicle and the row of parked vehicles/obstaclesbetween which you wish to park.Note: When first activated, Park Assist searchesfor a space on the passenger side of the vehicle.To search for a space on the driver’s side, signala turn in that direction (using the directionindicator).Note: The Park Assist auto-searching featurebecomes active when the vehicle's speed is lessthan 30 km/h (18 mph). When Park Assist isactivated, a previous space may already havebeen located. To obtain a previous space on theother side, signal a turn in that direction.When a suitable space is found, a shortconfirmation tone is given and a message isdisplayed in the Message centre.Note: If Park Assist senses that other vehiclesare too close on either side to perform a parkingmanoeuvre, a space will be rejected, even if itis large enough for the vehicle. The driverretains the option to switch Park Assist off andattempt the manoeuvre manually.For assistance in exiting a parallel parkingspace, select Parking exit.For Parking exit to operate correctly, yourvehicle must be parked in a space where othervehicles or objects are either:• Parked in front of your vehicle.148Parking featuresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• Parked in front and behind your vehicle.Parking exit is designed for exitingparallel spaces only. An attempt to useit in a perpendicular slot can result in acollision.Do not perform a Parking exitmanoeuvre until the message ReverseWith Care is displayed in the Messagecentre. This is also accompanied by theautomated steering symbol.For all 3 Park Assist features, follow theinstructions in the Message centre until theparking or exiting manoeuvre has beencompleted.Although the vehicle takes control duringthe parking or exiting manoeuvre, thedriver must maintain full control of theaccelerator and brake pedals throughout.Note: If the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 km/h (3mph) during the manoeuvre, Park Assist willdisplay a message until the vehicle's speeddecreases to less than 5 km/h (3 mph). If thevehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h (4 mph), ParkAssist will deactivate.If a system fault is detected, a continuous tonewill sound and a message will be displayed inthe Message centre. Consult a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.PARK ASSIST LIMITATIONSPark Assist is a supplement to, and nota replacement for, good observationand a safe driving style. It is thedriver's responsibility, at all times, tomake sure that reversing manoeuvresare carried out safely.Park Assist may provide inaccurate results if:• The size or shape of the parking spacechanges after it was measured.• There is an irregular kerb alongside theparking space or the kerb is covered withleaves, snow, etc.•The vehicle is being used to transport a loadthat extends beyond the perimeter of thevehicle.• The vehicle had a repair or alteration thatwas not approved by a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.• The vehicle has been fitted withnon-approved wheels or tyres, or there issignificant tyre wear.• One of the parked vehicles has anattachment at a raised height such as a flatbed, snow plough or cherry picker.• The parking space is located on a corner orcurve.• The sensors are dirty or covered in mud,ice or snow.• The weather is foggy, raining or snowing.• The road surface is bumpy such as gravel.• It encounters an obstruction that is thin orwedge shaped.•It encounters an obstruction that is elevatedand/or protruding, such as ledges or treebranches.• It encounters an obstruction with cornersand sharp edges.PARK ASSIST TROUBLESHOOTINGPark Assist is not searching for a parkingspace:• The system may not be activated.• The vehicle may be travelling at a speedabove 30 km/h (18 mph).• The sensors may be covered or partlyobscured by dirt, mud, ice or snow.149Parking featuresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Park Assist does not offer a certain parkingspace:• The sensors may be covered or partlyobscured by dirt, mud, ice or snow.•The space may not be large enough or theremay not be enough space on the oppositeside of the vehicle for the front to swing outduring the manoeuvre.• The vehicle may have been driven too faraway (more than 1.5 metres) from a row ofparked vehicles.• The vehicle may have been driven too close(within 410 mm) to a row of parkedvehicles.• The vehicle may have been driven inreverse. Park Assist will only search for aparking space when the vehicle is travellingin a forward direction.• The approach angle may not be suitable.Park Assist has not positioned the vehicleaccurately within the space:One or more of the system limitations criteriamay have been met. See 149, PARK ASSISTLIMITATIONS.REVERSE TRAFFIC DETECTIONThe Reverse Traffic Detection (RTD)system is a supplement to, not areplacement for, safe driving, goodobservation and use of the exterior andrear-view mirrors.Note: RTD is automatically disabled when ParkAssist is active.In addition to the functionality provided by theRear camera, the RTD system provides awarning to the driver of any moving vehicle, ateither side, that may pose an accident riskduring a reversing manoeuvre.An amber Warning icon (1) will flash in therelevant exterior mirror and an audible warningwill be emitted to indicate the presence of amoving vehicle. The Rear camera screen or theParking Aid screen (2) will also show a warningon the relevant side(s) of the screen. To switchfrom the Rear camera to the Parking Aid screen,touch the plan view Parking Aid vehicle image.To return to the Camera system, touch theCameras icon on the Parking Aid screen.150Parking featuresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The system can be enabled or disabled via theInstrument panel menu. See 41, INSTRUMENTPANEL MENU. When RTD is disabled, an amberarning indicator (3) will be displayed in bothexterior mirrors.REVERSE TRAFFIC DETECTIONSENSORSThe Reverse Traffic Detection (RTD) system willautomatically disable if any of the sensorsbecome partially or completely obscured. Theamber warning indicator dot will illuminate inthe exterior mirrors and the message ReverseTraffic Sensor Blocked appears in the Messagecentre.Check that there is nothing obscuring all rearbumper surfaces and it is clear from ice, frost,snow, mud and dirt. See 199, SENSORS ANDCAMERAS.If a fault with a radar sensor is detected, anamber warning indicator dot will illuminate inthe exterior mirrors and the message ReverseTraffic Detection System Not Available isdisplayed in the Message centre.Note: Even if the detected fault only affects theradar sensor on one side of the vehicle, thewhole system is disabled. If the fault istemporary, the system will operate correctlyonce the engine has been switched off and thenon again.If a fault occurs, consult a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.151Parking featuresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SINGLE REAR CAMERAIt remains the driver's responsibilityto detect obstacles and estimate thevehicle's distance from them whenreversing.Some overhanging objects or barrierswhich could cause damage to the vehiclemay not be detected by the camera.The camera must be kept clean and freefrom debris or obstructions, forexample, ice, frost, snow, leaves, mudor insects. Failure to keep the cameraclean may result in miscalculation orfalse indications. 199, SENSORS ANDCAMERAS.Do not attach stickers or objects to therear bumper that may interfere with thecameras.The Rear camera is located on the rear bumper,as illustrated.When Reverse (R) gear is selected, the Touchscreen will automatically display a highdefinition colour image from the rear of thevehicle. Overlaid on the image are reversing andparking guidance lines.Note: The Rear camera display has priority overthe Parking Aids display and many other Touchscreen features. To cancel the Rear cameradisplay at any time, push the Home button ortouch the Return icon.152CamerasLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
1. 360°PDC (Park Distance Control) planview: Touch to view the full screen view ofthe Parking Aid feature.2. Parking Aid information: Colour graphicsindicate threats detected by the sensors.3. Parking guidance solid line: The projectedpath, based on the current steering wheelposition.4. Parking guidance dotted line: The safeworking width of the vehicle (including theexterior mirrors).5. Luggage compartment access guidanceline: Do not reverse beyond this point ifluggage compartment access is required.6. Touch to select the Parking Aid Settingsmenu.•Parking Guidance: Select OFF or ON.•Parking Aid Graphics: Select OFF orON.•PDC Plan View: Select OFF or ON.7. Touch to switch the Parking Aid graphicson/off. See 145, USING THE PARKING AID.8. Touch to toggle between a wider ornarrower view of the camera image.9. Touch to lower the volume of the 360°PDCbeeps.The Rear camera display on the Touch screenwill discontinue automatically when either ofthe following apply:• Drive (D) is selected for longer than 5seconds.• Drive (D) is selected and/or vehicle speedis greater than 18 km/h (11 mph).SURROUND CAMERA SYSTEMIt remains the driver's responsibilityto detect obstacles and estimate thevehicle's distance from them whenmanoeuvring the vehicle.Some overhanging objects or barrierswhich could cause damage to the vehiclemay not be detected by the camera.The camera must be kept clean and freefrom debris or obstructions, forexample, ice, frost, snow, leaves, mudor insects. Failure to keep the cameraclean may result in miscalculation orfalse indications. See199, SENSORS ANDCAMERAS.The 4 Surround cameras are located as follows:• One located in the centre of the front lowergrille.• One underneath each of the exterior doormirrors.• One located in the centre of the rearbumper, above the number plate.Note: The quality of the camera views may varyin different lighting conditions.153CamerasRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To switch on the Surround camerasystem, press the camera button orselect Cameras from the EXTRAFEATURES screen. See 104, EXTRAFEATURES.Note: When selected, the Surround camerasystem will default to a view dependent on thevehicle's speed and the selected gear.1. Left or front camera split-screen image:When presented as a split image, pressingeither image will switch to a full screen viewof that image.2. Camera selection arrow (shown asunselectable if a max of 2 images arealready selected).3. Camera selection arrow (camera selected).4. 360°view: Touch to display a 'birds-eye'view of the vehicle and its immediatesurroundings using all 4 cameras.5. Right or rear split-screen image. Whenpresented as a split image, pressing eitherimage will switch to a full screen view ofthat image.6. Touch to select the Camera Settings menu.•Parking Guidance: Select OFF or ON.•Parking Aid Graphics: Select OFF orON.•PDC Plan View: Select OFF or ON.7. Touch to switch the Parking Aid graphicson/off. See 106, SYSTEM SETTINGS.8. Touch to select a different view.Note: A maximum of 2 views can bedisplayed at any one time (including the360°view). To change a camera view if 2views are selected, one of the views has tobe deselected first.9. Touch to toggle between a wider ornarrower view of the image. (front and rearcamera images only).10. Touch to mute the volume of the Parkingaid warning tones.154CamerasLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Camera shortcutsPress the Camera button for thefollowing shortcut options:• When in Reverse (R):• Press once to select the Rear Junctionview.• Press twice to select the T JunctionView.• Press a third time to return to the RearJunction view.• When in a forward gear, at speeds below10 km/h (6 mph):• Press once to select the T JunctionView.• Press twice to select the Rear Junctionview.• Press a third time to return to the TJunction View.• When in Neutral (N) or Park (P):• Press once to select the Plan View.• Press twice to select the T JunctionView.• Press a third time to select the RearJunction view.Pan and Zoom toolsWhen in a full screen view of a camera image,touching the image will display the Pan andZoom tools. This will allow the image to beviewed at 3 levels of detail and can bemanipulated left, right, up, and down. Doubletap the image to jump to the middle level ofzoomed detail and allow the same Pan andZoom functionality.155CamerasRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PHONE SYSTEM OVERVIEWTo access the PHONE screen, see 100, TOUCHSCREEN HOME MENU.1. Voicemail: Touch to access the voicemailoptions.If no voicemail number has been set, thiswill take you to the keypad to enter and setthe voicemail number.2. Keypad: Touch to access the keypad diallingmode.3. Contacts: Touch to view the downloadedcontacts.4. Recents: Touch to display a list of recentdialled, received and missed calls.Note: The vehicle will display the list in theorder that the calls were recorded. If thisinformation is not available, they will bedisplayed as sent from the phone. Somephones may arrange the list in reverse orin another order.Note: The system will remove duplicateentries of the same call type from the samecaller e.g., 4 outgoing calls from the samecaller will be reduced to one outgoing call.5. Displays the name and/or number dialledand the call duration. Also displays thekeypad, recent calls, contacts or voicemail.6. Touch the scroll bar or arrows, to move upor down the list. Alternatively, swipe the listin the direction required.7. Select Phone Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu. Touch to manage thefollowing features: Settings for All Phones,Settings for 'name of phone' and BluetoothSettings.8. Touch to access the PAIRED DEVICESscreen.156PhoneLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PHONE SAFETYSwitch off your telephone in areas witha high explosion risk. This includesfilling stations, fuel storage areas orchemical factories, as well as placeswhere the air contains fuel vapour,chemicals or metal dust.Always stow your mobile phonesecurely.The functioning of cardiac pacemakersor hearing aids may be impaired whenthe phone is in use. Check with adoctor or manufacturer whether anysuch devices you or your passengersare using, are sufficiently protectedagainst high-frequency energy.The Health Industry Manufacturers' Associationrecommends that a minimum separation of 15centimetres is maintained between a wirelessphone antenna and a pacemaker, to avoidpotential interference with the pacemaker. Theserecommendations are consistent with theindependent research by, and recommendationsof, Wireless Technology Research.PHONE COMPATIBILITYPlease refer to the Owners section of thewebsite: at www.jaguar.com, for a list ofcompatible phones.Note: The Bluetooth®wireless technologydevices listed, have been tested for compatibilitywith Jaguar Land Rover vehicles. Performancewill vary, based on the phone’s softwareversion, battery condition, coverage and yournetwork provider. Phones are warranted by theirmanufacturer, not by Jaguar.PAIRING AND CONNECTING USINGTHE PHONENote: The process of pairing and connectingyour phone with the vehicle, using the phone,will vary depending on the type of phone used.1. Switch the ignition on and make sure thatthe Touch screen is active.2. When pairing a device for the first time,select Tap to connect phone from theHOME screen. This makes the vehicle'sBluetooth system discoverable.Alternatively, to pair an additional phone,select Pair New Device.3. Using the phone, search for Bluetoothdevices.On some phones, this is referred to as anew paired device. See your phone'soperating instructions for furtherinformation.The vehicle's default discoverable name isJaguar XJ.4. When the vehicle's name is discovered,follow the on-screen instructions. SelectYes when prompted, to confirm the pairing.Alternatively, on some older phones, youwill be requested to enter a PIN (PersonalIdentification Number). Either enter the PIN1234, or select Yes to confirm that the PINdisplayed on your phone matches thevehicle's PIN.5. Once your phone is paired and connectedto the system, select the Return icon or theHOME screen shortcut button and thenselect the PHONE screen. Alternatively pressthe Phone shortcut button.Note: Some phones require the Bluetoothdevice pairing to be set as 'authorised' or'trusted' in order to automatically connect.Please refer to your phone's operatinginstructions for further information.157PhoneRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To select the paired phone's settings, selectPhone Settings via the SETTINGS pop-up menu.A list of all paired phones will be displayed;touch the paired phone's name.Paired phones will have the option to be usedas either a phone, media device or both. Thesecan be selected in the Paired Devices list,accessed by selecting All Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu. Next select Features,followed by Bluetooth.MANAGING TWO CALLSTwo calls can be taken on the same phone.Notification will be given when a second call isreceived. When accepting a second call, the firstcall is automatically put on hold.Alternatively, a second call can be dialled. Touchthe Hold icon to put the current call on hold.Select Add call and then Contacts to displaythe list of contacts, or Keypad to dial or enterthe number.When there are 2 separate calls, the Hold iconchanges to a Swap icon. Touching the Swapicon or the contact name/number, will swapbetween the current call and the call on hold.Touch End Call to end the current call andreturn to the remaining call. Touching andholding End Call, will end both calls.Note: If more than 2 calls (e.g., a conferencecall) are active on the phone when connectingto the vehicle's phone system, these will bemaintained. However, only a maximum of 2 calldetails will be displayed. When more than 2 callsare in progress when connecting, any calls thatare not active (on hold or incoming) will berejected.MERGE CALLSWhen 2 calls are in progress on the samephone, they can be merged into one conferencecall, by selecting Merge.Touch Hold/Mute to hold both calls or End Callto end both calls.Merge cannot be deselected. If one caller endstheir call, the remaining call stays active.PHONE SYSTEM ICONSConnect: Use to send or accept acall.Disconnect: Use to end or reject acall.Hold: Touch to hold a call; touchagain to return to the call.Swap a call.Switch the call to your phonehandset.Mute microphone: Initiate Privacymode. While selected, the caller willnot hear you talking.Phone signal strength indicator.Phone battery level indicator.158PhoneLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
STEERING WHEEL PHONE CONTROLS1. Increases the volume when in a call, scrollsup a displayed list or numbers listed for astored contact.2. Decreases the volume when in a call, orscrolls down a displayed list or numberslisted for a stored contact.3. Press to answer an incoming call. Press toend a call. Press and release to dial anumber/contact or to access the Recentcalls list.4. Disconnect switch: Press to end or reject acall.PHONE CALL VOLUMEThe phone call volume is operated by the Mediasystem’s volume control.If the Media system is in use when a phone callis active, the Media system source issuppressed for the duration of the call.MICROPHONE VOLUMEThe microphone's volume can be adjusted.Select Phone Settings via the SETTINGS pop-upmenu, followed by the Settings option for therequired phone. To adjust the MicrophoneVolume, touch +or -to adjust to the requiredlevel.CONTACTSContacts stored in the memory of a pairedphone can be automatically downloaded to thevehicle’s Contacts list each time the phone isconnected to the system. See 157, PHONECOMPATIBILITY.Certain phones store the contacts in 2 differentareas: the SIM card and the phone's memory.The vehicle's system will access only thosenumbers stored in the phone's memory.To access contacts:1. From the PHONE screen, select Contacts.2. Use the scroll bar or swipe the list to searchalphabetically up or down.3. Identify the required contact from thedisplayed list and touch to call. If a contacthas more than one number stored, selectthe required number from the list.Note: It may be necessary to use the scrollbar to see the entire list.If your phone supports contact cards, you willbe able to view the contact information in thevehicle's contact directory.The order in which the list is displayed can bechanged. From the Phone Settings menu, selectPhone. Select First Name or Last Name tochange the display for the connected phone.To delete the Contacts list, select PhoneSettings via the SETTINGS pop-up menu. SelectDelete From Car for the connected phone.159PhoneRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Once the Contacts have been deleted, AutoUpdate Contacts will be off. This will remain offfor the selected phone until reactivated.Note: If Contacts are deleted, incoming callswill display the number but no name.160PhoneLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
BLUETOOTH®INFORMATIONBluetooth®is the name for short-range RadioFrequency (RF) technology that allowselectronic devices to communicate wirelesslywith each other.The Jaguar Bluetooth wireless technologysystem supports Bluetooth®Hands-Free Profile(HFP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile(A2DP) and Audio Video Remote Control Profile(AVRCP).Note: HFP and A2DP/AVRCP profiles can beconnected independently, so a phone can beconnected via one, while a media device can beconnected via the other, at the same time.Before making use of the vehicle’s Bluetoothsystem, your Bluetooth phone/media devicemust be paired to the vehicle's system.Each time the ignition is switched on, thesystem will attempt to connect with the lastconnected phone/media device.As phones/media devices have a wide range ofaudio and echo characteristics, it may take afew seconds for the vehicle's system to adaptand deliver optimum audio performance. Toachieve this, it may be necessary to reduce thein-vehicle volume and ventilation fan speedslightly.161Bluetooth®RFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEMNavigation instruction is by map and turninformation displayed on the Touch screen andin the Instrument panel, and can becomplemented by Voice guidance. The systemuses signals from Global Positioning System(GPS) satellites, combined with informationfrom vehicle sensors and from data stored onthe hard drive, to establish the vehicle'sposition.Using this combination of data sources, thevehicle's navigation computer enables you toplan and follow a route map to your desireddestination.The Touch screen is used to control navigationvia menus and map displays. The vehicle'sInstrument panel can be set up to shownavigation instructions and maps.Operate the system only when it is safeto do so.Note: The speed camera alert feature is notavailable in certain markets.Note: The speed camera alert feature can beenabled/disabled in Settings, see 169,SETTINGS.Note: Speed limit warnings will not be displayedin the Navigation system on vehicles with Trafficsign recognition.The requirements of national Road TrafficRegulations always apply.Note: Certain features and location-basedservices utilise your current location. You canmanage which features are able to utilise mobiledata, and your location, in the connectivity andnavigation Settings.Observation of traffic signs and local trafficregulations always take priority.The Navigation system serves solely as an aidto navigation. In particular, the Navigationsystem cannot be used as an aid to orientationwhen visibility is poor.GPS signals may occasionally be interrupteddue to physical barriers, such as tunnels, androads under raised highways.However, direction and speed sensors on thevehicle will minimise any adverse effect on theNavigation system. Normal operation willresume once the obstruction has been passed.Under certain conditions, it is possible for thevehicle's position shown on screen to beincorrect. This may happen when:• Driving on a spiral ramp in a building.• Driving on or beneath elevated roads.• Two roads are close and parallel.• The vehicle is transported to anotherlocation.•The vehicle has been rotated on a turntable.• The vehicle's battery has beendisconnected.USING THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM1. Navigation shortcut button:162NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• If the navigation map is shown on theTouch screen: Press to view theNAVIGATION main menu.• If the navigation map is not shown onthe Touch screen: Press to view theNAVIGATION map screen.2. Touch for navigation.3. Navigation shortcut.• If no destination is currently selected:Touch to enter a destination.• If a destination is currently selected:Touch to cancel guidance.Note: A first time user should set up personalpreferences in the Settings area. These includesettings for managing which features canconnect to the internet when on the homenetwork or while roaming. These settings areapplied whenever navigation is used.When Navigation is selected, and the vehicle isstationary, the Navigation system will display amap view of the current vehicle position. A sidepanel containing quick access tiles is alsodisplayed.Note: The quick access tiles act as shortcuts,to allow quick access to certain Navigationsystem functionality.Note: The quick access tiles are hidden whenthe vehicle’s speed reaches a predeterminedlevel, and will not appear again until the ignitionis switched off and back on again. If required,the options can be accessed via the Navigationmenus.Note: If the Navigation system is started whenthe vehicle's speed is already above thepredetermined level, the quick access tiles willnot appear.1. Touch to return to the previous screen.163NavigationRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
2. Touch to scroll up or down the tile list.3. Quick access tile options: Select the up ordown arrows to scroll through the availableoptions. Options include:• My commute• Fuel search• Recent destinations• Home• Licence information.4. The current vehicle position and direction.5. Map selector: Press to select 2D,3D orSatellite map view. When guidance isactive, combination views based on 2D,3D,and Satellite map view become available,such as Traffic,Next manoeuvre, andRoute overview.Note: Internet connectivity is required forsatellite map view.6. Select Navigation Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu.7. Select the NAVIGATION main menu.When the vehicle is in motion and no activeroute is selected, an assistance map will bedisplayed.164NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
MAIN MENUWhen shown, touch the Menu iconto access the NAVIGATION mainmenu.Note: Some of the options listed are onlyavailable when a route has been selected.1. Touch to return to the map screen.2. Enter Address: Provides a choice of optionsfor entering an address. See 165, ADDRESSENTRY.3. Edit: Touch to edit the current route. See169, EDIT ROUTE.4. Stop Guidance: Cancels the current routeguidance, if a route is selected.5. Mute: Touch to mute the Navigationsystem's voice guidance.6. Destinations: Shows your saved locations(e.g., home address and saved favourites),and most recent destinations.Note: When signed into an InControlNavigation account (see 173, PROFILES)destinations can be automaticallysynchronised between the vehicle, theinternet, and the smartphone app.7. Select Navigation Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu.8. Search: Type as text into the search box,or select from the POI categories listed.ADDRESS ENTRYNote: If the full address is not known, theSearch feature may be more effective, see 166,SEARCH.When searching, only the relevant keys for thenext valid character are highlighted for selection.165NavigationRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Previous entries, or search history, will also bedisplayed below the text entry box.To enter an address:1. From the NAVIGATION main menu (see 165,MAIN MENU), touch Enter Address.2. Input the Country.3. Input the City,Town or Postcode. Previousentries and narrowed search results will bedisplayed. Select the required entry andtouch Ok.4. Input the Street name, Number, orJunction, if applicable. Previous entries andnarrowed search results will be displayed.Select the required entry, and touch Ok.Note: In some markets, the entry fields mayvary from those listed above.5. The map displays the entered location, asthe address is entered. If the locationdisplayed is correct, touch Drive there, toconfirm.6. The Navigation system will calculate, anddisplay, a number of routes. Select Start tobegin navigation. If the highlighted route isnot the desired route, select Route Optionsto change the route. The distance andEstimated Time of Arrival (ETA) for eachroute will be displayed.7. Select the chosen route and then touchStart navigating.Note: The routes will be calculated usingthe selected route preferences (avoiding tollroads, ferries, etc.). The route preferencescan be adjusted while setting thedestination, if required.Note: An address can be added as a waypointafter a destination has been selected.Note: Previous entries, or search results as theyare narrowed, are displayed on the screenbehind the keyboard. If required, hide thekeyboard for better access.SEARCHNote: If the full address is known, the Addressentry feature may be more effective, see 165,ADDRESS ENTRY.Search can be used to locate an address, or aPoint Of Interest (POI).To search for an address:1. From the NAVIGATION main menu, touchSearch.2. If a route is already active, the following listof search areas will be available from thedrop-down menu:• Along the route• Most relevant• Near the waypoint 1, 2, or 3, etc.Note: The selected route must includeone or more waypoints for this optionto be available.• Near your destination.3. Input your search choice into the text box.4. Select your search result from the listprovided.5. Touch Start to begin navigation.Note: The routes will be calculated usingthe selected route preferences (avoiding tollroads, ferries, etc.). The route preferencescan be adjusted while setting thedestination, if required.To search for a POI:1. From the NAVIGATION main menu, touchSearch.2. If a route is already active, the following listof search areas will be available from thedrop-down menu:• Along the route• Most relevant• Near the waypoint 1, 2, or 3, etc.166NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: The selected route must includeone or more waypoints for this optionto be available.• Near your destination.3. Select a search category from the list(Petrol station,Eat & Drink,ParkingFacility,ATM/Bank).Note: Petrol stations can be sorted by theprice of their fuel, see 172, FUEL PRICESSERVICE.4. Select your search result from the listprovided.The following POI details and options may alsobe available:• POI phone number: Touch to view the POIsphone number, and phone the POI, ifrequired.•Add to favourites: Touch to add the selectedPOI to your favourites.• Nearest car park: Touch to search fornearby car parks, if the selected destinationor waypoint is not a car park.• Additional information (postal address,opening times, reviews, photographic viewof the POI), where available.Note: A POI or address can be added as awaypoint after a destination has been selected.Note: If the vehicle is connected to the internet,the search function can be performed usingcloud-based information. This feature can beenabled/disabled in Settings, see 169,SETTINGS.167NavigationRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
MAP SPLIT SCREEN1. Touch to access the NAVIGATION mainmenu.2. Left map view, scale/zoom setting.Note: The map zoom setting can be alteredby using a pinch or push motion, and themap view can be panned using a swipemotion.3. Active route: Next direction display.4. Selected additional view option: Routeoverview, Next manoeuvre, Compass orTraffic.5. Map selector: Press to select 2D, 3D orsatellite map view.Note: Internet connectivity is required forsatellite map view.6. The current vehicle position and direction.7. Current location.8. Information bar: Displays informationincluding time, distance, and ETA(Estimated Time of Arrival).REAR SEAT NAVIGATIONThe Navigation system can be viewed andoperated from the rear screens.Note: The navigation features available on therear screens will be different from the frontTouch screens.Rear seat passengers can monitor the selectedroute (estimated arrival time, distance todestination, etc.) and view or suggest newlocations.To view the navigation map on a rear screen,select the Home button on the remote control.Use the cursor controls to select Navigationand press the OK button to confirm.168NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To view the navigation menu, press the OKbutton again. Use the cursor controls to selectSearch,Browse map,orSettings.Select Search, to display a list of options forselecting a new location. After selecting a newlocation, select Send To Driver. The driver willreceive a prompt on the front Touch screen toaccept or refuse the selection. See 133, REARSEAT REMOTE CONTROL and 135, REAR SEATSCREENS OVERVIEW.MAP AUTO ZOOMWhen Auto-zoom is enabled, the map willautomatically zoom in when the vehicle istravelling at slow speeds, and zooms out whentravelling at higher speeds.Auto-zoom can be enable/disabled in theNavigation Settings menu, see 169, SETTINGS.SETTINGSTouch the navigation Settings icon to view thefollowing options:•Alerts: Enable/disable from a list of alertcategories, see 170, ALERTS.•My Commute: Set up your commute, see171, MY COMMUTE.•Sync settings: Adjust the synchronisationsettings between the vehicle and otherdevices.•Your installed maps: View the details ofthe maps currently loaded to the vehicle'sNavigation system.•Keyboard layouts: Select additionalkeyboard layouts.•Route preferences: Select to avoid certainroad features.•Set up customised searches: Add acustomised search to your favourites, orfrequent searches.•App details: View details of the installedNavigation system.•Auto-zoom: Enable/disable auto-zoom, see169, MAP AUTO ZOOM.•Map features: Enable/disable from a list ofavailable features.•Manage profile data : Clear the searchhistory or delete all profile data.EDIT ROUTEA waypoint can be added or deleted, a routerearranged, or a round trip created for a selectedroute.Note: Waypoints can also be added fromDestinations, Address Entry, or Search in theNAVIGATION main menu, or by selecting a pointon the map.From the NAVIGATION main menu (see 165,MAIN MENU), touch Edit.The following options can be used:•Add Waypoint: Touch to add a waypoint tothe current route.• Remove waypoint: Touch the Bin icon toremove the waypoint from the current route.• Change the order of the waypoints: Touchthe up/down arrows to re-order thewaypoints.•Return Journey: Select to make a selecteddestination in to a round trip.Note: The return journey will not includeany of the selected waypoints. If waypointsare required, they must be added in thenormal manner.VIEW OPTIONSThe Navigation map and guidance views can beadjusted as follows:•2D: Flat two-dimensional view.•3D: Three-dimensional perspective view.169NavigationRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
•Satellite: Birds-eye view of thesurroundings.Note: This feature requires an internetconnection.•Next manoeuvre: Shows a detailed view ofthe next junction or turn.•Route overview: View of the full route.•Traffic (where available): Possible hazardsor delays.•Compass: Shows a digital compass, withyour heading shown in degrees.ALERTSAlerts can be selected from the NavigationSettings menu.• Manoeuvre details: A list of the nextrequired manoeuvres.• Junction view: Active on multi-lanehighways, when approaching a junction.Junction view shows the lane informationfor the next junction.•Low fuel Automatic Search: Available onlineand offline. Petrol stations are listed byprice. Preferred station name and type offuel can be selected.• Safety camera: Notification of safetycameras.YOUR FAVOURITESWhen detailed information is displayed aboutan address or place, tap the Add favourite iconand the place is added to your list of favourites.Displayed information that is already a favouritewill display the Edit favourite icon. This willdisplay information about the favourite locationand the option to change the icon and name, ordelete it from your list of favourites.If no route is selected, select the requiredfavourite to set as a destination. If a route isselected, select the required favourite to add itas a waypoint.Note: When signed into an InControl Navigationaccount (see 173, PROFILES) favourites can beautomatically synchronised between the vehicle,the internet, and the smartphone app.MAP UPDATESNote: Due to the map data file size, it isrecommended that a USB 3.0 memory deviceis used to update the map data.Note: The vehicle must be stationary to enablethe map update to commence. Once the updateprocess has commenced, the vehicle may bedriven.Note: The Navigation system cannot beinteracted with until the map update is complete.If a route was active before the map updatecommenced, the navigation guidance will belimited to voice guidance only.Note: The USB drive must NOT be removed, orthe ignition switched off, before the update iscomplete, as this will cause the update to becancelled and potentially leave the systemwithout any available map data.The map data in the Navigation system can beupdated by downloading the updated map datato a USB memory device.Insert the USB drive into the USB socket andfollow the onscreen instructions within theNavigation system to update the maps.Note: Only the USB sockets in the front cubbybox can be used for map updates, see 63,STORAGE COMPARTMENTS.Information on the installed maps can be viewedin Settings, see 169, SETTINGS.170NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
For further information on Navigation systemupdates, please visit the Map Updates sectionon www.jaguar.com, or contact a JaguarRetailer.FUEL FINDERWhen the fuel level falls below a predeterminedlevel, an alert will be triggered, and theNavigation system will search for nearby fuelstations.Preferred fuel stations can be stored in theAlerts menu, see 170, ALERTS.The alert can be enable/disabled in Settings, see169, SETTINGS.INSTRUMENT PANEL VIEWThe Instrument panel can be set up to show aview of the navigation map. In this view,essential information (vehicle speed, fuel level,range, etc.) will be displayed as an informationbar in the Instrument panel.The Instrument panel view can be set up in theInstrument panel menu, see 41, INSTRUMENTPANEL MENU.CONNECTED NAVIGATIONA number of features are available that utiliseInControl Pro Services (see 182, INCONTROLPRO SERVICES). These include:Note: Unless stated otherwise, the featureslisted require an internet connection to function.• My commute. See 171, MY COMMUTE.• Real time traffic flow. See 172, REAL TIMETRAFFIC FLOW.• Fuel price service. See 172, FUEL PRICESSERVICE.• Approach mode. See 172, APPROACHMODE.Note: This feature does not need an internetconnection to function. However,functionality may be enhanced with aninternet connection.• Online search. See 172, ONLINE SEARCH.•Satellite views. See 173, SATELLITE VIEWS.•Online routing. See 173, ONLINE ROUTING.• Cloud sync. See 173, PROFILES.• Door to door routing. See 173, DOOR TODOOR ROUTING.• Sharing. See 173, SHARING.Note: User preferences are available in theNavigation Settings via the SETTINGS pop-upmenu. These include settings for managingwhich features can connect to the internet whenon the home network or while roaming.MY COMMUTEA commute is a journey with a common startpoint, a common end point, and at a regulartime of day. When My Commute is enabled, theNavigation system is designed to recognise yourcommute.The following conditions must be met for thecommute to be automatically learned:• The start point must be consistent.• The start time must be within one hour ofthe current time.• The end point must be consistent.All of the alternative routes that you have usedon the same commute are grouped and stored.Commute mode shows a highlighted route onthe map, and uses the learned routes, combinedwith live traffic information, to calculate thefastest of the previously used routes.If more than one commute is available, thealternative commutes will be available forselection.171NavigationRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
The first commute must be set up manuallyusing the My Commute set up wizard inSettings, see 169, SETTINGS.Note: Once a commute has been set up, thewizard will no longer be accessible, unless thecommute is deleted. Once a commute has beenset manually, the Navigation systemautomatically learns additional regular journeys.Note: Commute mode shows a map on theTouch screen, but does not give audio guidance.Note: My Commute can be enabled/disabled inthe Navigation Settings via the SETTINGSpop-up menu.REAL TIME TRAFFIC FLOWReal Time Traffic provides significantly greateramounts of detail, across a far greater roadcoverage, than conventional broadcast-basedtraffic information systems, making it easier toplan routes either manually or automatically.The system utilises live feeds, and historicaltraffic patterns to continuously update trafficinformation, and enhance the calculation of theselected route.Note: Historical and internet traffic informationare not available in all markets.Roads are displayed as colour coded in orderof traffic flow. The colour codes are:• Red: Very heavy or stationary traffic.• Yellow: Heavy traffic.• Green: Free-flowing traffic.• Black: Closed road.Real time traffic can be displayed with a routeselected or with no route selected.A traffic enabled route can be selected; this willdisplay improved and updated routes to yourdestination, avoiding traffic congestion anddelays. This option can also be enabled topossibly find a route around an alerted incidentor traffic flow issues, to your destination.Note: A live internet connection is required toreceive updated traffic information during thejourney.FUEL PRICES SERVICEWhen petrol station is selected during a POIsearch, the nearby petrol stations can be sortedaccording to the price of their fuel. Fuel pricesare updated to the vehicle's database from theinternet.Note: Fuel pricing information may not beupdated in real time, and cannot be guaranteedto be accurate.Note: In some markets, a relative price indexwill be shown instead of live fuel prices.APPROACH MODEWhen the vehicle approaches a selectedwaypoint or destination, information that maybe of use to the driver is displayed. If the vehicleis connected to the internet, a photographicview of the street will be shown, where available.Note: The image can be rotated by swiping onthe image to view a 360°view of thesurrounding area.If the destination or waypoint is not a car park,and parking is available nearby, a Parking iconwill appear on the Touch screen.Touch the icon to show nearby parking, and toupdate your destination to include the selectedparking. The original destination remains activefor selection on the smartphone app, to enableguidance from the vehicle to the destination.ONLINE SEARCHProvides information, via the internet, forreal-time information on Points Of Interest(POIs). An online search can providesignificantly more information on POIs than thedatabase on the vehicle.172NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SAFETY CAMERASProvides the location of potential accident blackspots, or areas that have been identified as apotential danger by the presence of safetycameras.Note: Safety camera information is not availablein all countries.SATELLITE VIEWSThe Navigation system uses a satellite view ofthe local area, overlaid with the Navigationsystem graphics.Note: If the Satellite view feature is usedcontinuously, it may consume large amountsof mobile data. You may need to check yourdata allowance is appropriately configured forproviding high data services.ONLINE ROUTINGThe selected route is calculated in the cloud andapplies any settings that you have selected.Online routing will take into account the currenttraffic conditions and the traffic patterns for therelevant time of day, on all routes.DOOR TO DOOR ROUTINGA smartphone app allows a route to be plannedin its entirety from one location to another,using a combination of the phone and thevehicle's Navigation system.The app will provide guidance via the phone:• From your current location to your vehicle(including public transport information, ifavailable).• From your vehicle to the end destination.Guidance along the driven section of the routeis given via the vehicle's Navigation system.Note: Using the smartphone app does notmandate that the vehicle is used. For example,if the user is close to the location and the vehicleis far away, then the application may suggestan alternative form of transport.ROUTE PLANNING WEB PORTALThe Route planning web portal enables a userto search, plan routes and destinations, manageplaces (POIs, favourites, etc.), using acomputer. Destinations, places, and routes canbe synchronised with the smartphone app andvehicle's Navigation system.SHARINGSend a message (via SMS or email) to informothers of your current location, destination, andEstimated Time of Arrival (ETA) (includingautomatic ETA updates if your journey time isextended).To share your ETA, touch the ETA banner in theTouch screen information bar (see 173,SHARING) and follow the onscreen instructions.PROFILESA driver profile enables personalised settingsand information to be stored and easily switchedfor each driver.Driver profiles can be created by signing up foran InControl Navigation account within Settings.Profiles can also be edited, switched and reset(see 173, PROFILES).To sign up for an InControl Navigation account,the following will need to be supplied:• Name.• Date of birth.• Country.• A valid email address.• Password.173NavigationRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: Internet connection to the vehicle isrequired to sign up for an account.The profile information on the Navigationsystem can be synchronised with theinformation stored on other devices via thecloud. Cloud synchronisation can be set up inSettings (see 173, PROFILES) to besynchronised automatically or manually.Note: If a profile is deleted, all of the profileinformation will be unretrievable, with theexception of Favourites, which are also storedin the cloud.174NavigationLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
USING VOICE CONTROL1. Voice button: Press briefly to start a voicesession. Press and hold to cancel a voicesession.Note: Audible feedback can be interruptedat any time by just giving the nextcommand.A voice session will cancel if a higherpriority activity or warning appears on theTouch screen, or there is no user input fora sustained length of time.2. Command list: Appears on the Touchscreen, providing feedback and someexample commands at each stage of thevoice session. Say or select an availablecommand.When spoken instructions are understood,the system will show a related screen,allowing the voice session to be continuedeither manually or by voice. Availablecommands at each stage of theconversation are shown at the top of thescreen in the command bar.3. Touch to cancel the current voice sessionand continue manually.The following commands can be spoken at anytime to assist in the operation of Voice control:• Help• Cancel• Go back• Replay.Note: The Voice system has been designed torecognise a number of languages. However, itcannot be guaranteed that the system will becompatible with every accent group within thoselanguages. Please speak to your Retailer/Authorised Repairer about testing the Voicesystem for compatibility with a particular accentgroup.VOICE TUTORIALTo listen to a tutorial detailing the operation ofthe Voice system:1. Briefly press the Voice button to start avoice session.2. Wait for the tone to sound, then say Voicetutorial.175Voice controlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Alternatively, from the HOME screen, selectEXTRA FEATURES followed by Voice and thenTutorial. See 176, VOICE SETTINGS.The Voice tutorial can be cancelled at any time.Cancel via the displayed pop-up, or by pressingand holding the Voice button.Alternatively, briefly press the Voice button andsay Cancel.VOICETAGSVoicetags enable the user to personalise theVoice system so that a single name can be usedto call-up a phone number, radio station or TVchannel.To add a Voicetag:1. Briefly press the Voice button to start avoice session.2. Wait for the tone to sound and say StorePhone voicetag,Store Radio voicetag orStore TV voicetag.3. For radio and TV, the user must be listeningto the station or channel, they wish to createa voicetag for.Alternatively, Voicetags can be managed via theTouch screen as follows:1. From the HOME screen, select EXTRAFEATURES.2. Select Voice and then Voicetags.3. Select the system that the Voicetag is toactivate (Phone,Radio or TV).Follow the on-screen and audible instructions.See 176, VOICE SETTINGS.VOICE SETTINGSThe following features can be selected fromVoice. See 104, EXTRA FEATURES.•Commands: View the categories and theexample voice commands. Select the >iconto view alternative examples of saying thesame command.•Voicetags: View the categories. Select acategory to manage the Voicetags for thechosen system. See 104, EXTRA FEATURES.•Tutorial: Select for detailed instructions.Cancel via the displayed pop-up, or bypressing and holding the Voice button.Alternatively, briefly press the Voice buttonand say Cancel. See 175, VOICE TUTORIAL.Select Voice Settings via the SETTINGS pop-upmenu. The following settings are displayed:•Voice Command Confirmation: SelectOn/Off.•Voice Feedback: Select On/Off.•Voice Recognition: Select from the list ofavailable languages.Note: Only available when the system'slanguage is not supported by speech.•Feedback Accent: Select from the list ofavailable accents.Note: Only available when the VoiceRecognition language is UK or US English.Alternatively:•Briefly press the Voice button and say Voiceconfirmation on or Voice confirmation off.•Briefly press the Voice button and say Voicefeedback on or Voice feedback off.176Voice controlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CONNECTIVITYInControl Connect Pro enables connection tothe internet using a high speed 3G modem.This requires a data-enabled Micro SIM card oran external Wi-Fi network (if in range of a homeWi-Fi network or a public network).The methods of connection can be made asfollows:•Hotspot: Creates a Wi-Fi hotspot in thevehicle to allow the connection of Wi-Fiequipped devices (tablet, laptop,smartphone) to the internet.•Wi-Fi: Allows the vehicle to connect to theinternet via a Hotspot.•Mobile Data: Allows the vehicle to connectto the internet via a mobile network with adata-enabled Micro SIM card.CONNECTIVITY SETTINGSConnectivity settings can be accessed using theTouch screen. Select All Settings via theSETTINGS pop-up menu, followed by Features.Select Connectivity. See 106, SYSTEMSETTINGS.The CONNECTIVITY screen will display Hotspot,Wi-Fi and Mobile Data settings.Hotspot:• Select ON to create a vehicle Hotspot. TheHotspot name is determined by the vehicle;this cannot be changed. To set a new orchange the password, select HotspotSettings and then press the Refresh iconto generate a new password. Touch OK toconfirm.Wi-Fi:• Select ON to connect the vehicle to theinternet via a Wi-Fi network. Networks willbe displayed in order of known networksfirst, followed by unknown networks. Bothwill be listed in order of signal strength.To connect to an unknown network, selectthe network and enter the password. Ifcorrect, a connection will be made.To connect to a known network, select thenetwork and touch Connect, or to forgetthis network, touch Forget.To connect to a hidden network, select AddNetwork from the network list. Enter theNetwork Name,Security Type andPassword, and press Connect.Mobile Data:•Network provider: The network provider ofthe inserted SIM is displayed. To changethe APN settings, select the networkprovider's name, to take you to the Networkprovider screen, and select Auto or Manual.When Manual is selected, add the Network,Username and Password, and selectConnect.•Roaming: Data roaming is set to OFF asdefault; select to switch ON.•Data Usage Limit: The usage limit is set toOFF as default. The usage counter showsthe total usage for the month; this will reseton the 1st of the month as default. SelectON to display the set usage limit.•Data Usage Settings: Select to change theUsage limit and Monthly Reset Date. TheReset Counter can be used to reset theCurrent Usage to zero.•SIM PIN: A PIN can be set or changed forthe inserted SIM card.•REMEMBER SIM PIN: Select ON toremember or OFF to forget the PIN.•IMEI Number: The vehicle's unique IMEInumber.177ConnectivityRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Reset ConnectivityThe reset connectivity option is disabled untilthe connectivity settings are set. When selected,all content will be deleted and reset to thevehicle's default settings.CONNECTIVITY STATUS ICONSThe icons at the top of the screen display thetype of cellular or Wi-Fi connection as follows:Connecting.E (edge) mobile networkconnectivity.2G mobile network connectivity.3G mobile network connectivity.No mobile network connection.If the vehicle is connected to anexternal hotspot, a Wi-Fi icon isdisplayed instead of a Cellular icon.Note: Depending on the network connectivity,some features and services, including Wi-Fi,may not operate as expected, or at all, unless asufficiently strong 3G connection is available.SIM CARD CONNECTIONA Micro SIM card must be inserted into the SIMcard reader slot. The SIM card reader slot islocated in the centre console cubby box.The SIM card reader utilizes a ‘Micro SIM’interface.To install a Micro SIM card, insert the card withthe contacts facing up and the shortest endfacing out. The card should not be protrudingonce correctly inserted.Make sure the SIM card is locatedcorrectly in the card holder. Failure todo so may damage the SIM card or SIMcard reader.To remove a SIM card, gently push in andrelease.Note: Some mobile network operators may lockSIM cards to operate in specific devices only.You may need to contact your mobile networkoperator to unlock the SIM card.178ConnectivityLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
INCONTROL OVERVIEWThis section covers 5 InControl features:• InControl Protect.• InControl Remote Premium.• InControl Secure.• InControl Pro Services.• InControl Apps.For InControl Protect, Remote Premium, Secureand Pro Services, an InControl account mustbe created. If your Retailer has notpre-registered your account, or if you are notthe first owner of the vehicle, then you will needto visit: www.jaguarincontrol.com/owner tocreate an InControl account. Once the InControlaccount has been created, follow the on-screeninstructions to connect the InControl accountto the vehicle and to activate the services on thevehicle.Selected Pro Services also require an InControlNavigation Account which can be created byvisiting the InControl section ofwww.jaguar.com.Note: 100% mobile network connectivity cannotbe guaranteed in all locations.Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility toremove the vehicle from their InControl accountwhen ownership of the vehicle is transferred.INCONTROL PROTECTInControl Protect comprises the following:• The InControl Remote EssentialsSmartphone App.•A Jaguar Assistance Breakdown Call feature.• A Jaguar SOS Emergency Call feature.InControl Remote EssentialsThe InControl Remote Essentials SmartphoneApp has a number of different features:•Vehicle Status: Shows the status of thevehicle, current fuel level, range, odometerreading, and a vehicle locator display to helpfind the last parked location of the vehicle.The current security status of the vehicleand any current vehicle warnings will alsobe displayed. Touch the warning on thescreen for further information.•Vehicle Security: Displays the open/closedstatus of all the doors/windows and thecurrent alarm setting.•Journeys: Displays the most recentjourneys completed in the vehicle.Note: This feature can be enabled/disabledvia the InControl Settings screen.Note: Stored journeys can be viewed,deleted, or downloaded as a .csv file toassist with business expenses.•Assistance: Displays the vehicle's VIN andregistration number. This screen will alsoallow for direct calls to be made to JaguarAssistance (in the event of a breakdown)and the Tracking Call Centre (in the eventof a vehicle theft).•Settings: Allows the vehicle's securitystatus and journey recording to be switchedon/off. It also allows access to yourInControl account.Jaguar Assistance Breakdown CallLocated in the overhead console.See 280, DRIVER CONTROLS.In the event of a breakdown, press and releasethe button cover to reveal the button. The buttonwill be illuminated by a white LED. Press thebutton for 2 seconds to make a direct call toJaguar Assistance. Also, the vehicle's detailsand the location will automatically be suppliedto them.179InControlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
When a call is initiated, the button will flashamber and will be constantly illuminated amberduring the call.Push the button cover back into place, after use.Jaguar SOS Emergency CallLocated in the overhead console.See 280, DRIVER CONTROLS.Note: The Jaguar SOS Emergency Call featureshould only be used in the event of a severeaccident, or in the event that personal safety orsecurity is at risk.Press and release the button cover to reveal thebutton. The button will be illuminated by a redLED. Press the button for 2 seconds to make adirect call to the emergency services. Also, thevehicle's details and the location willautomatically be supplied to them.When a call is initiated, the button will flashamber. The button will be constantly illuminatedamber during a call.Push the button cover back into place, after use.Note: In the event that a severe crash isdetected, the Jaguar SOS Emergency Call willbe automatically triggered.Note: If the vehicle is travelling in a differentcountry, the Jaguar SOS Emergency Call willstill connect, however, the vehicle’s locationand the vehicle's details may not beautomatically sent.This feature has 2 backup batteries that willmaintain full system operation, in the event thatthe vehicle's battery is disconnected or disabled.Note: The backup batteries will be maintainedas part of the vehicle's servicing schedule, ascarried out by a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.If a fault is detected with the Jaguar SOSEmergency Call system, then the SOS Limitedmessage will be displayed in the Messagecentre. If this occurs, the vehicle can still bedriven, but consult a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer at the earliest opportunity.If the message SOS Not Available is displayed,then a Retailer/Authorised Repairer visit is onlyrequired if the vehicle is in an area with knowngood coverage, or the message persists in alllocations.INCONTROL REMOTE PREMIUMThe InControl Remote Premium SmartphoneApp has a number of extra features, in additionto the InControl Remote Essentials SmartphoneApp:• The Vehicle Status screen will also displaythe Beep & Flash feature. Touch this iconto help locate the vehicle by operating thevehicle's exterior lamps and a short audiblehorn alert will also sound.Note: It is the responsibility of the driver tocomply with all regulations in forceregarding the use of vehicle horns.• The Vehicle Security screen will allow thevehicle to be locked/unlocked. This screenwill also display the vehicle's alarm status.e.g., set or not set.Note: Regardless of which screen iscurrently displayed, if the vehicle's alarm issounding, then a pop-up screen will appearwith an option to reset the alarm. The alarmmay also be reset via the Vehicle Securityscreen.Note: It remains the responsibility of thedriver to know the location of the vehicleand to make sure that the vehicle is secured.180InControlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• The Remote Climate screen allows theengine to be started remotely (for vehicleswith an automatic transmission), and to runfor up to 30 minutes to provide acomfortable temperature inside the cabinin advance of the driver entering the vehicle.Remote climate will not function if any of thefollowing conditions exist:• The vehicle's fuel level is low.• The vehicle's battery charge level is low.• The vehicle is not locked.• A window, door, bonnet, or the luggagecompartment is open.• The engine has been manually started.• A system error with any required vehiclesystem.• A theft has been detected.• The vehicle's alarm is sounding.• A crash event has been detected.• The hazard warning lamps are switched on.• The automatic transmission is not in Park(P).• The brake pedal is pressed.Note: Some markets may prohibit the use of aremote engine start. It remains the responsibilityof the driver to know if this function can legallybe used.Note: This feature is also available for vehiclesfitted with a Timed climate system. If the vehicleconfiguration (e.g., transmission or enginevariant) does not support a remote engine start,or if the vehicle originated in a market with legalrestrictions on a remote engine start, then theTimed climate system may be used to supportthe cabin pre-conditioning.•Wake Up Timer: The InControl Remotesystem on the vehicle, will shut down if thevehicle is not driven for 4 days. This is toconserve battery power. If, for example, youare on vacation or away on a business trip,you can use the Wake Up Timer on theSmartphone App. This feature will wake upthe InControl Remote system on theselected date. Any date within a 30 dayperiod can be chosen.Note: Note: The Wake Up Timer cannot beset once the InControl Remote system hasshut down. Once the Wake Up Timer is set,the InControl Remote system will shut downon the second day after the car was lastdriven, to preserve battery power for wakeup.The InControl Remote Smartphone App can bedownloaded for Apple’s iPhone from the AppleApp Store, or for Android phones, from GooglePlay.Note: The availability and functionality of theInControl Remote Premium Smartphone Appfeatures will depend on the specification of thevehicle and the market.For more information, visit the InControl sectionof the www.jaguar.com website.INCONTROL SECUREInControl Secure provides a stolen vehicletracking service. In the event that the vehiclehas been tampered with, or moved without yourconsent, you will be contacted by the InControlSecure operating centre. Alternatively, use theInControl Remote Smartphone App, or thephone number on the InControl website, tocontact the InControl Secure operating centre.When the vehicle is being serviced or repaired,Service Mode must be enabled.When the vehicle is being transported,Transport Mode must be enabled.181InControlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
This can be done by using the InControl RemoteSmartphone App, or via the InControl website.This will prevent automatic theft alerts beingraised while the vehicle is being serviced.Note: For further information, visit the InControlsection of the www.jaguar.com website.INCONTROL PRO SERVICESInContol LIVEInControl LIVE allows features to be installeddirectly to the infotainment system.Examples may include, Weather, Flight Trackerand News Feeds.Note: For further information, visit the InControlsection of the www.jaguar.com website.Connected NavigationA selection of InControl Pro Services areavailable for use with the Navigation system.To access certain features, an InControlNavigation Account is required; you will needto visit the InControl section ofwww.jaguar.com to create an account.• Real Time traffic flow• Fuel Price Service• Parking Service• Online Search• Safety Cameras• Satellite views• Street views• Online routing• Cloud Sync• Door to Door Routing• Sharing of ETA, places and destination.For further information, see 162, THENAVIGATION SYSTEM.The availability of LIVE services and featuresmay vary by market. Selected LIVE services andfeatures require an InControl Account, whichcan be created by visiting www.jaguar.com.InControl Pro Services require a suitable, data-enabled Micro SIM to be fitted to the vehicle.The SIM slot can be found in the USB panellocated in the centre console cubby box.Note: If the Satellite View feature is usedcontinuously, it may consume large amountsof mobile data. You may need to check yourdata allowance is appropriately configured forproviding high data services.INCONTROL APPSInControl Apps allows you to operate a numberof smartphone apps through the vehicle’s Touchscreen.Before using InControl Apps, you will need todownload the InControl Apps Smartphone App.For Apple’s iPhone®, this can be downloadedfrom the Apple App Store. For Android phones,this can be downloaded from Google Play.Note: Not all smartphones are compatible withInControl Apps. Check the list of compatiblesmartphones and supported Apps in theInControl section of www.jaguar.com.To initiate InControl Apps, connect yoursmartphone's USB cable to the vehicle's USBsocket, located in the centre console cubby box.See 119, CONNECTING A MEDIA DEVICE.182InControlLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Once connected, any available apps will appearon the vehicle’s Touch screen. You can nowopen and operate those apps using the Touchscreen in the same way as your smartphone.Note: Smartphone Apps is not suitable for usewhile driving, for example, gaming apps will notappear on the Touch screen while the vehicleis moving.Note: To establish a connection to the vehicle,the smartphone must be connected to the USBsocket and the HOME screen displayed.Note: Apple and iPhone are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.and other countries. App Store is a service markof Apple Inc.183InControlRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SAFETY PRECAUTIONSDo not smoke, use a naked flame, orcause sparks while refuelling. Theresulting fire and explosion may causeserious injury or death.Avoid exposing the fuel gases to anypotential sources of ignition as theresulting fire and explosion may causeserious injuries and/or death.Switch off the engine when refuelling.Switch off any personal electronicdevices, such as mobile phones ormusic players, when refuelling.PETROL ENGINED VEHICLESUse high quality fuel that meets thespecification defined by EN228 (or thenational equivalent).Do not use leaded fuels, fuels with leadsubstitutes (e.g. manganese-based), orfuel additives, as these may adverselyaffect the emissions control systems,and may affect warranty coverage.Fuel system cleaning agents should notbe used, unless approved by the vehiclemanufacturer.OCTANE RATINGV6 and V8 petrol vehiclesIt is recommended to use a premium unleadedfuel, with a minimum octane rating of 95 RONto contribute to optimum performance, fueleconomy and driveability.I4 petrol enginesThis vehicle requires the use of premiumunleaded fuel with a minimum octane rating of95 RON to contribute to optimum performance,fuel economy and driveability.If premium unleaded fuel is not available, youmay use unleaded fuel with a lower octanerating, down to a minimum of 91 RON , but thismay reduce engine performance, increase fuelconsumption, cause an audible engine knockand other driveability problems.Do not use fuels with an octane ratinglower than 91 RON as severe enginedamage may occur.Use high quality fuel that meets thespecification defined by EN228 (or thenational equivalent).If a heavy persistent engine knock is detected,even when using fuel to the recommendedoctane rating, or if engine knock is detectedwhile holding a steady speed on level roads,consult a Retailer/Authorised Repairer to havethe problem corrected. Failure to do so ismisuse of the vehicle, for which the vehiclemanufacturer is not responsible.Note: An occasional light engine knock whenaccelerating or climbing hills is acceptable.ETHANOLFuels containing up to 10% ethanol (E5 andE10) may be used.This vehicle is not suitable for use withfuels containing more than 10% ethanol.Do not use E85 fuels (85% ethanolcontent), as serious engine and fuelsystem damage will occur.Make sure that the fuel has octane ratings nolower than those recommended for unleadedfuel. Most drivers will not notice any operatingdifference with fuel containing ethanol. If adifference is detected, the use of conventionalunleaded fuel should be resumed.184Fuel and refuellingLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
METHANOLWherever possible, avoid using fuelscontaining methanol.Use of fuels containing methanol may causeserious engine and fuel system damage, whichmay not be covered under warranty.METHYL TERTIARY BUTYL ETHER(MTBE)Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate knownas MTBE can be used provided that the ratio ofMTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed15%. MTBE is an Ether based compoundderived from Petroleum, which has beenspecified by several refiners as the substanceto enhance the Octane rating of fuel.DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLESUse only high quality diesel fuel in accordancewith European Standard EN590 or equivalent.These vehicles are capable of runningwith up to a 7% blend of bio-diesel, inaccordance with European StandardEN590. It is not recommend to use ahigher blend of bio-diesel.The quality and specification of diesel fuel variessignificantly, dependent on the geographicallocation. It is recommended to use a premiumfuel, or the highest quality available fuel.High quality fuel promotes a longer life for theengine components. Lower grade fuel containshigher levels of sulphur, which is detrimentalto engine components. If low quality fuel isused, light coloured smoke may be evident atthe exhaust.Prolonged use of additives is not recommended.Do not add paraffin or petrol to diesel fuels.If you inadvertently fill your vehicle withpetrol instead of diesel, do not attemptto start the engine. Contact a Retailer/Authorised Repairer immediately.The vehicle manufacturer can accept noresponsibility for any damage caused byrunning the vehicle with fuel other thanthose stipulated.SULPHUR CONTENTIf this vehicle is fitted with a DieselParticulate Filter (DPF) exhaust aftertreatment system, the maximum sulphurcontent of the fuel must not exceed0.005% (50 parts per million), inaccordance with EN590-EU4, or WorldWide Fuel Charter (WWFC) Cat 3.The sulphur content of diesel fuel usedin vehicles not fitted with a DPF, shouldnot exceed 0.3% (3 000 parts permillion).In some countries, diesel fuel will contain higherlevels of sulphur, which will require reducedservice intervals to reduce the effects on theengine and the exhaust after treatmentcomponents. If in doubt contact a Retailer/Authorised Repairer for advice.Using an incorrect specification of fuelwill cause serious damage to the engineand/or te exhaust after treatmentsystem, which may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. If in doubt,contact a Retailer/Authorised Repairerfor advice.DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)In order to comply with exhaust emissionsrequirements, some vehicles with diesel enginesare fitted with a reservoir containing DieselExhaust Fluid (DEF). DEF is also known asAdBlue, AUS 32 and ARLA 32.185Fuel and refuellingRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: It is a legal requirement that the DEFsystem is used correctly, as detailed in thishandbook. It may be a criminal offence to runthe vehicle when it is not consuming the correctspecification of DEF.The distance until the next DEF refill, can beviewed via the service menu in the Instrumentpanel. See 41, INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.DEF consumption can vary greatly dependenton driving style and conditions, but the averagerate of consumption is approximately 1 litre forevery 1 600 kilometres.Note: When the DEF level becomes low, anappropriate message will be displayed in theMessage centre. It is recommended to contacta Retailer/Authorised Repairer to arrange a DEFrefill, at the earliest opportunity.The Message centre will display a distancecountdown, when the DEF level becomes toolow. The DEF should be topped up before thedistance range falls to zero. Failure to do so,will result in the vehicle failing to start.DEF can be added to the reservoir by using thetop-up procedure; however, a full system refillis still recommended at the earliest opportunity.Two standard sized non-drip refill bottles, eachcontaining 1.89 litres of fluid, is the minimumamount required to restart the engine. Refillbottles are available from a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.When refilling, make sure that thecorrect specification of DEF is used. See245, LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS. Use ofthe incorrect fluid could result in seriousdamage to the vehicle. Do not start theengine. Contact a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer immediately.DEF can smell unpleasant and stainclothing or upholstery. Take care not tospill the fluid when performing a top-upprocedure. In the event of spillage, rinseimmediately with clean water.Read the label for safety precautionswhen using DEF.DEF must be kept out of the reach ofchildren.DEF must be stored in the originalcontainer, in a cool, dry, andwell-ventilated area. Observe themanufacturer's storage and handlingrecommendations.To perform a DEF top-up procedure:Locate the DEF reservoir. See 203, FLUIDFILLER LOCATIONS. Remove the reservoir fillercap by turning counter-clockwise.1. Place the refill bottle over the reservoir fillercap aperture and turn clockwise, until it islocked into position.2. Press the base of the refill bottle, until allof the fluid has completely drained into thereservoir.3. Turn the refill bottle counter-clockwise andremove.4. Repeat the procedure with the second refillbottle.186Fuel and refuellingLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
5. Replace the reservoir filler cap andcontinually turn clockwise until hand tight.Note: In extremely low temperatures, below-10°C, DEF may freeze in the reservoir; makingrefilling difficult. It is recommended to take thevehicle into a warmer environment, e.g., agarage, to raise the ambient temperature, inorder to thaw the DEF, before attempting totop-up. In these conditions, it may take up to 1hour of driving before the low DEF message willextinguish.Note: When starting and stopping the engine,you may hear the DEF pumps initiating andshutting down. This is normal operation, andno cause for concern.RUNNING OUT OF FUELAvoid running out of fuel!If the vehicle does run out of fuel, a minimumof 4 litres will be required to restart the engine.The vehicle should be left with the ignition onfor 5 minutes after refuelling before attemptingto restart the engine.Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel, seekingqualified assistance is advisable.WATER IN FUELIf the warning WATER IN FUEL isdisplayed in the Message centre, anexcessive amount of water has collectedin the fuel filter bowl. Seek assistancefrom a Retailer/Authorised Repairer tohave the filter drained as soon aspossibleDIESEL ENGINESVehicles with diesel engines are equipped witha system to prevent the fuel tank from emptyingcompletely, which would then draw air into thefuel system. When the fuel reaches a minimumlevel, the system will activate a reduced powermode (i.e. the engine will not run properly). Thiswill be followed by the engine stopping inapproximately 1.6 km.This feature prevents the fuel system fromrunning dry, which could cause damage to thevehicle. If the fuel gauge indicates a low fuellevel, or the low fuel warning lamp illuminates(see 46, LOW FUEL WARNING (AMBER)), thefuel tank should be refuelled as soon as possibleat the next filling station with at least 4 litres offuel.If the system protection function has activated,the vehicle must be refuelled and then restartedusing the following procedure:1. With the brake pedal pressed, press andhold the engine stop/start button (see 280,DRIVER CONTROLS) and crank the enginefor 5 seconds.2. Release the stop/start button.3. With the brake pedal pressed, press andrelease the stop/start button to crank theengine. The engine should start withinapproximately 5 seconds.Note: If the engine does not start, pause for 10seconds with the ignition in convenience modebefore repeating the procedure from thebeginning.Do not crank the engine for longer than30 seconds continuously.187Fuel and refuellingRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
FUEL FILLER FLAPTake note of all warnings andinstruction given on the label affixedto the inside of the fuel filler flap.The vehicle must be unlocked using the Smartkey before the fuel filler flap can be opened.1. Press and release the rear of the flap tounlatch.2. Pull the flap open. The label on the insideof the flap indicates the correct fuel for thevehicle.3. Turn the cap counter-clockwise to undo.4. Stow the cap on the lip provided on the topof the hinge arm, as shown.When replacing the cap, turn it clockwise untilthe ratchet clicks.To close the filler flap, push the flap until it issecurely latched.Note: The filler flap will only be locked closedwhen the vehicle is centrally locked.FUEL FILLERWhen refuelling ensure that allwindows, doors, and sunroof are fullyclosed, particularly if young childrenor animals are in the vehicle.Do not attempt to fill the tank to itsmaximum capacity. If the vehicle is tobe parked on a slope, in direct sunlightor high ambient temperature,expansion of the fuel could causespillage.Check the fuel pump informationcarefully to make sure that you areputting the correct fuel into the vehicle.If the vehicle is filled with incorrect fuel,it is essential that you seek qualifiedassistance before you start the engine.Fuel station pumps are equipped with automaticcut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage. Make surethat the correct fuel type nozzle is fully insertedinto the filler neck and fill the tank slowly untilthe filler nozzle automatically cuts off the supply.Do not attempt to fill the tank beyond this point.Note: Filling station pumps used for dieselcommercial vehicles deliver fuel at a higher ratethan normal. The higher fill rate can causepremature cut-off and may cause fuel spillage.Therefore, it is recommended that only standardlight vehicle pumps are used.DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTIONDEVICEWhen the misfuelling device isactivated it may cause fuel to bedischarged from the filler neck.188Fuel and refuellingLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to fill thevehicle with the correct fuel. The diesel misfuelprotection device only reduces the risk of fillingthe vehicle with incorrect fuel.If the narrow filler nozzle fitted to pumpsdelivering unleaded petrol is fully inserted intothe filler neck, the misfuel protection device willactivate.Note: The filler spout on some fuel cans andolder fuel pumps may trigger the misfuellingdevice.When activated the yellow protection device willbe visible inside the filler neck. It will preventfuel flow into the tank. Before fuelling cancontinue with the correct fuel the device willneed to be reset.The reset tool is stored in the luggagecompartment clipped onto the battery retainingbar.To reset the misfuelling device:1. Insert the reset tool with the teethuppermost, as far as it will go into the fillerneck.2. Locate the teeth by pushing down the topof the reset tool.3. With the top of the tool pressed down andthe teeth engaged, slowly pull the tool outof the filler neck to reset the device.Do not twist the device, once the teethhave engaged.Note: When reset, the yellow part of theprotection device should no longer be visible inthe filler neck.Replace the reset tool in position on the batteryrestraining bar.FUEL TANK CAPACITYAvoid the risk of running out of fuel and neverintentionally drive the vehicle when the fuelgauge indicates that the tank is empty. Whenrefuelling your vehicle after the fuel gauge readsempty, you may not be able to add the fuelquantity shown below, as there will be a smallreserve remaining in the tank.Total tank capacity (usable):80 litres(18 gallons)Petrol engines77 litres(17 gallons)Diesel enginesFill capacity (when fuel gauge reads empty):74 litres(16.3 gallons)Petrol engines68 litres(15 gallons)Diesel engines189Fuel and refuellingRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
FUEL CONSUMPTIONThe fuel consumption figures shown in thefollowing table, have been calculated using astandard testing procedure (the new EC testprocedure from Directive 99/100/EC), andproduced in accordance with The PassengerCar Fuel Consumption (Amendment) Order1996.Under normal use, a vehicle's actual fuelconsumption figures may differ from thoseachieved through the test procedure, dependingon driving technique, road and traffic conditions,environmental factors, vehicle load andcondition.CO2emissionsg/kmCombinedl/100 km (mpg)Extra-urbanl/100 km (mpg)Urbanl/100 km (mpg)Variant3.0L Diesel with Stop/Start1495.7(49.6)5.2(54.3)7.0(40.4)Pirelli 19 inch Tyre -Standard/Longwheelbase1555.9(48.0)5.2(54.3)7.1(39.8)Continental 20 inchTyre - Standard/Long wheelbase1596.1(46.3)5.3(53.3)7.5(37.7)Dunlop 20 inch Tyre- Standard/Longwheelbase2.0L Petrol2139.0(31.4)6.7(42.2)13.0(21.7)Standard wheelbase2139.0(31.4)6.7(42.2)13.0(21.7)Long wheelbase2.0L Petrol with Stop/Start1998.4(33.6)6.7(42.2)11.4(24.8)Standard wheelbase1998.4(33.6)6.7(42.2)11.4(24.8)Long wheelbase3.0L Petrol - Supercharged2269.7(29.1)7.3(38.7)13.8(20.5)Standard wheelbase2269.7(29.1)7.3(38.7)13.8(20.5)Long wheelbase3.0L Petrol - Supercharged with Stop/Start190Fuel and refuellingLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CO2emissionsg/kmCombinedl/100 km (mpg)Extra-urbanl/100 km (mpg)Urbanl/100 km (mpg)Variant2119.1(31.0)7.1(39.8)12.5(22.6)Standard wheelbase2119.1(31.0)7.1(39.8)12.5(22.6)Long wheelbase3.0L Petrol - Supercharged - All wheel drive25010.5(26.9)7.8(36.2)15.2(18.6)Standard wheelbase25010.5(26.9)7.8(36.2)15.2(18.6)Long wheelbase3.0L Petrol - Supercharged - with All wheel drive and Stop/Start2349.8(28.8)7.6(37.2)13.6(20.8)Standard wheelbase2349.8(28.8)7.6(37.2)13.6(20.8)Long wheelbase5.0L Petrol - Supercharged with Stop/Start26411.1(25.5)8.2(34.5)16.2(17.4)Standard wheelbase26411.1(25.5)8.2(34.5)16.2(17.4)Long wheelbase5.0L Petrol - Supercharged Super Sport / XJ-R28311.9(23.7)8.5(33.2)17.9(15.8)Standard wheelbase28311.9(23.7)8.5(33.2)17.9(15.8)Long wheelbase5.0L Petrol - Supercharged Super Sport / XJ-R with Stop/Start26411.1(25.5)8.2(34.5)16.2(17.4)Standard wheelbase26411.1(25.5)8.2(34.5)16.2(17.4)Long wheelbase191Fuel and refuellingRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
URBAN CYCLEThe urban test cycle is carried out from a coldstart and consists of a series of accelerations,decelerations and periods of steady speeddriving and engine idling. The maximum speedattained during the test is 50 km/h (30 mph)with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph).EXTRA-URBAN CYCLEThe extra-urban test cycle is carried outimmediately after the urban test. Approximatelyhalf of the test comprises steady-speed driving,while the remainder consists of a series ofaccelerations, decelerations and engine idling.The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph)and the average speed 63 km/h (39 mph). Thetest is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.3miles).COMBINEDThe combined figure is an average of the urbanand extra-urban test cycle results, which hasbeen weighted to take account of the differentdistances covered during the two tests.For additional information on fuelconsumption figures and exhaustemissions, visit the VehicleCertification Agency (VCA) websiteat:http://www.vcacarfueldata.org.uk/192Fuel and refuellingLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
RUNNING-INThis vehicle is built using high-precisionmanufacturing methods, but the moving partsof the engine must still bed-in relative to oneanother. The process occurs mainly in the first3 000 km (2 000 miles) of operation.During this Running-in period of 3 000 km(2 000 miles) you should:• Avoid frequent cold starts followed byshort-distance driving.• Preferably take longer trips.• Do not use full throttle during starts andnormal driving.• Avoid continuous operation at high enginespeed and abrupt stops.• Do not participate in track days, sportsdriving schools, or similar.In addition, specifically up to 2 000 km(1 200 miles):• Drive at varying engine and road speeds,but do not exceed an engine speed of 4 500rpm (revolutions per minute) and a roadspeed of 170 km/h (105 mph).From 2 000 km (1 200 miles) to 3 000 km(2 000 miles):• Engine and road speeds can be increasedgradually.• Engine speeds in excess of 5 000 rpmshould only be used briefly e.g., whenovertaking.At all times, not just during the Running-inperiod:• Do not exceed 4 000 rpm until the enginehas reached full operating temperature.•Avoid labouring the engine by operating theengine in too high a gear at low speeds.PARTS AND ACCESSORIESDo not fit non-approved parts andaccessories or carry out non-approvedalterations or conversions.Your vehicle is not designed for use witha roof rack. Do not fit a roof rack to thevehicle, as damage may result.AIRBAG SYSTEMThe components that make up theairbag system are sensitive toelectrical or physical interference,either of which could easily damagethe system and cause inadvertentoperation or a malfunction of theairbag module.To prevent malfunction of the airbag systemalways consult your retailer/Authorised Repairerbefore fitting any of the following:• Electronic equipment such as a mobilephone, two-way radio or in-carentertainment system.• Accessories attached to the front of thevehicle.• Any modification to the front of the vehicle.• Any modification involving the removal orrepair of any wiring or component in thevicinity of any of the airbag systemcomponents, including the steering wheel,steering column, pillar trim, roof lining, doortrim, instrument or fascia panels.• Any modification to the fascia panels orsteering wheel.ANTI-THEFT SYSTEMNo modifications or additions shouldbe made to the anti-theft system. Suchchanges could cause the system tomalfunction.193MaintenanceRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
OWNER MAINTENANCEAny significant or sudden drop in fluidlevels, or uneven tyre wear, should bereported to a qualified technician withoutdelay.In addition to the routine services andinspections, a number of simple checks mustbe carried out more frequently. These checkscan be carried out by the owner and advice isgiven on the pages that follow.DAILY CHECKS• Operation of lamps, horn, directionindicators, wipers, washers and warningindicators.• Operation of seat belts and brakes.• Look for fluid deposits underneath thevehicle that might indicate a leak.Condensation drips from the airconditioning are normal.WEEKLY CHECKS• Engine oil level.• Engine coolant level.• Brake fluid level.• Power steering fluid level.• Screen washer fluid level.• Tyre pressures and condition.• Operate air conditioning.Note: The engine oil level should be checkedmore frequently if the vehicle is driven forprolonged periods at high speeds.EXHAUST FILTERDiesel vehicles equipped with a DieselParticulate Filter (DPF) have more efficientemissions control. The particles in the exhaustgases are collected in the exhaust filter duringnormal driving.Cleaning of the exhaust filter, also known asregeneration, occurs automaticallyapproximately every 300-900 km depending ondriving conditions, and requires the engine toreach normal operating temperature.This self-cleaning takes place when the vehicleis driven steadily at speeds between 60 km/hto 112 km/h (40 mph to 70 mph). This processnormally takes 10-20 minutes. It is possible thatthe self-cleaning will occur at lower vehiclespeeds, but the process may take a little longerat a 50 km/h (30 mph) average speed.Exhaust filter self-cleaningSome driving conditions (e.g., frequently drivingshort distances, in slow-moving traffic, or incold weather) may not provide sufficientopportunity to begin the exhaust filterself-cleaning automatically. When this occurs,a warning icon is displayed in the messagecentre, depending on status, as follows:•Amber: Exhaust filter self-cleaning isrequired. Driving above 60 km/h (40 mph)for 20 minutes should clean the filter.Note: Failure to follow the above drivingapproach to enable filter self-cleaning, mayresult in reduced vehicle performance. Theamber exhaust filter icon will eventually bereplaced by a red exhaust filter icon, andthe filter may need to be replaced.•Red: The exhaust filter is full; contact aRetailer/Authorised Repairer as soon aspossible.Note: A small increase in fuel consumption maybe noticed temporarily during exhaust filterself-cleaning.Note: If diesel fuel with high sulphur content isused regularly, the exhaust may emit a cloud ofsmoke at the start of the self-cleaning process.This is the sulphur deposit being burnt off andis no cause for concern. If possible, only uselow sulphur diesel fuel.194MaintenanceLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ARDUOUS DRIVING CONDITIONSWhen a vehicle is operated in severe or arduousconditions, more frequent attention must bepaid to the servicing requirements. Refer to yourService book for further details, this is suppliedin the vehicle's literature pack, or contact aRetailer/Authorised Repairer for advice.SAFETY IN THE GARAGEIf the vehicle has been driven recently,do not touch exhaust and coolingsystem components until the enginehas cooled.Never leave the engine running in anunventilated area.Do not work beneath the vehicle witha jack as the only means of support.Keep your hands and clothing awayfrom drive belts, pulleys and fans.Some fans may continue to operateafter the engine has stopped.Remove metal wrist bands andjewellery, before working in the enginecompartment.Do not touch electrical leads orcomponents while the engine isrunning, or with the starter switchturned on.Do not allow tools or metal parts of thevehicle to make contact with thebattery leads or terminals.FUEL SYSTEMUnder no circumstances should anypart of the fuel system be dismantledor replaced by anyone other than asuitably qualified vehicle technician.Ensure sparks and naked lights arekept away from the enginecompartment.Wear protective clothing, including,where practicable, gloves made froman impervious material.USED ENGINE OILProlonged contact with engine oil maycause serious skin disorders, includingdermatitis and cancer of the skin. Alwayswash thoroughly after contact.OPENING THE BONNETDo not attempt to open the bonnet if thepedestrian protection system hasdeployed.1. Pull the bonnet release handle located inthe left-side front footwell.2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever locatedbelow the centre point of the bonnet, andraise the bonnet.CLOSING THE BONNETDo not drive with the bonnet retainedby the safety catch alone.195MaintenanceRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
1. Lower the bonnet until the safety catchengages. Using both hands, press thebonnet down until the catches click.2. Check that both catches are fully engagedby attempting to lift both sides of the frontedge of the bonnet. This should be free fromall movement.UNDER BONNET COVERS - REMOVAL1. Release and remove the turnbuckle clipssecuring the cover.2. Lift the edge of the cover and slide toremove.UNDER BONNET COVERS - REFITTINGBefore refitting the underbonnet cover,make sure that no pipes, cables or otheritems, have been trapped between thecover and casing.1. Place the cover over the casing, ensuringall holes are aligned.2. Push the cover down firmly, insert andfasten the turnbuckle clips.UNBLOCKING WASHER JETSDo not operate the washer jets duringadjustment. Windscreen washer fluidmay cause irritation to the eyes andskin. Always read and observe thewasher fluid manufacturersinstructions.If a washer jet becomes blocked, use a thinstrand of wire to unblock the jet by inserting thewire into the jet. Make sure that the wire iscompletely removed after unblocking.CHANGING A BULBAlways replace bulbs with the correcttype and specification. If you are in anydoubt contact your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer for advice.XENON LAMPSReplacement or maintenance of Xenonlamps should only be carried out bysuitably qualified personnel.High voltage is required to ignite theXenon lamps.Xenon lamp units operate at a veryhigh temperature. Make sure that thelamp units have cooled beforeattempting to touch them.HEADLAMP BULB REPLACEMENTRemoval of the headlamp unit shouldonly be attempted by a qualifiedtechnician. If in doubt, consult yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.196MaintenanceLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
REAR LAMP REMOVALRemoval of the rear lamp unit shouldonly be attempted by a qualifiedtechnician. If in doubt, consult yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.HIGH LEVEL BRAKE LAMPREPLACEMENTRemoval of this lamp unit should onlybe attempted by a qualified technician.If in doubt, consult your Retailer/Authorised Repairer.WIPERS SERVICE POSITIONNote: The Smart key must remain in the vehiclewhile the wiper blades are replaced.To prevent damage to the bonnet, makesure that the wiper arms are in the'service' position before lifting the wiperblades away from the windscreen.Before changing a wiper blade, the wiper armsmust be set in the 'service' position as follows:1. Make sure the ignition is switched off.2. Switch the ignition on, then off again.3. Immediately pull the wiper/washer controltowards the driver (as if to command asingle wipe), hold this position whileswitching the ignition on again.The wipers will move to their serviceposition.4. When the new parts have been fitted, switchthe ignition off. This will return the wipersto the park position.Note: Fit only replacement wiper blades that areidentical to the original specification.SUNROOF RESETIf the battery is disconnected, or the powersupply is interrupted, while the sunroof ispartially open it will need to be reset.Once the power supply is restored, reset thesunroof as follows:1. Switch the ignition on.2. Fully close the sunroof.3. Press the front of the sunroof switch, andhold for 45 seconds.4. After 45 seconds the sunroof will begin tomove. Keep the front of the switch presseduntil the sunroof and the roof blinds havefully opened, then closed.5. Once the open/close cycle has completedand the sunroof has stopped moving,release the switch.The sunroof can now be operated as normal.WINDOW RESETThe windows will need to be reset if the batteryis disconnected, becomes discharged, or thepower supply is interrupted.Once the power supply is restored, reset thewindows, as follows:1. Make sure that the engine is running.2. Close the window fully, and release theswitch.3. Lift the switch to the close position and holdfor 2 seconds.4. Release the switch.5. Repeat the lift and release procedure (steps3 and 4) twice more.6. Open the window fully.7. Lift and release the switch to check theOne-touch window operation, see 61, ONE-TOUCH WINDOW OPERATION.8. Repeat the procedure on each window.197MaintenanceRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: It is advisable to have the engine runningwhile resetting the windows, to make sure thata minimum of 12 volts is available at all times.SIDE WINDOW BLIND RESETRear door electric sun blindsNote: Make sure that the One-touch windowoperation is functional, (see 61, ONE-TOUCHWINDOW OPERATION) and the window is fullyclosed.Reset the sun blind, as follows:1. Lift the window switch to move the sunblind to the fully up position.2. Press and hold down the window switch for15 seconds to enter the initialisation mode(this will move the blind down).3. Release the switch.4. Press and hold down the window switch for2 seconds.5. Lift and hold the window switch until thesun blind reaches the fully up position.6. Press and release the window switch tocheck the operation of the One-touchfunction, see 61, SIDE WINDOW BLINDS.WARNING TRIANGLEIf supplied, the warning triangle is located inthe luggage compartment, attached to an anchorpoint.FIRST AID KITIf supplied, the first aid kit is strapped to theside of the luggage compartment.FIRE EXTINGUISHERFor certain markets, fire extinguishers are fittedto comply with local legislation. Please note itis the owner's responsibility to make sure thefire extinguisher is maintained in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.It is also the responsibility of the owner to makesure the pressure is at a suitable operatingpressure as indicated on the pressure gauge.Use only Jaguar approved fire extinguishers.If supplied, the fire extinguisher will be locatedeither in the luggage compartment, or mountedto the front passenger seat.198MaintenanceLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ALLOY WHEELSOnly use approved wheel cleaningproducts.THE EXTERIORTo prevent damage to your vehicle whenusing a valeting service, make sure toadvise them of the cleaning instructionscontained within the Owner's handbook.Never use cleaning products which arenot approved for use on vehicles.Following cleaning of the vehicle exterior(particularly with a pressure washer), itis recommended that the vehicle is takenfor a short drive in order to dry out thebrakes.Some high pressure cleaning systemsare sufficiently powerful to penetratedoor and window seals, and damagetrim and door locks. Never aim the waterjet directly at the engine air intake, heaterair intakes, radiator cooling fins, bodyseals or at any components which maybe damaged.Do not aim the water jet directly at any rubbergaiters or seals on suspension joints.Make sure that the water jet nozzle is more than300 mm away from vehicle components.SENSORS AND CAMERASWhen washing the vehicle do not aimhigh pressure water jets directly at anyof the sensors and cameras. Do not useabrasive materials or hard/sharp objectsto clean the sensors and cameras. Onlyuse approved vehicle shampoo.Parking aids sensors should be kept clean tomaintain accuracy and performance.If required, the cameras should be cleaned usinga cloth moistened with a small amount of glass-cleaning product.PAINTWORKSubstances which are corrosive, suchas bird droppings, can damage thevehicle's paintwork and should beremoved as soon as possible.USING AN AUTOMATIC WASHCommercially operated automatic carwashes, jet washes and power-operatedmops, are not recommended.REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGERegularly inspect the paintwork for damage.Any stone chips, fractures, or deep scratches,in the paint/bodywork should be repairedpromptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly, andif left untreated can result in expensive repairs.ENGINE COMPARTMENTDo not use a high pressure washer orsteam cleaner in the enginecompartment.Make sure that the brake fluid reservoiris kept dry at all times. Only use a clean,dry cloth to clean the brake fluid cap andreservoir.GLASS SURFACESClean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoiddamaging the heating element. Do not scrapethe glass or use any abrasive cleaning fluid.Mirror glass is particularly susceptible todamage. Wash with soapy water. Do not useabrasive cleaning compounds or metal scrapersto remove ice.199Vehicle cleaningRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To avoid damaging the protecting coating, onlyclean the interior side of the sunroof glass witha soft cloth. Do not scrape the glass or useabrasive cleaning fluids.REAR SCREENTo avoid damaging the heating elements whencleaning the inside of the rear screen, use onlya soft damp cloth or chamois leather. Do notuse solvents or sharp objects to clean the glass.SUNROOF WIND DEFLECTORA mild solution of soap and water, or carshampoo, should be used to clean the winddeflector net periodically. Support the undersideof the net with a soft cloth, and gently scrub thenet using a soft bristled brush.REMOVING GREASE AND TARRemove grease or tar with Jaguar Tar Removeror methylated spirit (alcohol). White spirit isalso effective, but must not be applied to rubber,particularly the windscreen wiper blades.Make sure that after using methylatedor white spirit, the area is washedimmediately with soapy water, to removeall traces of spirit.POLISHINGChrome polish, or other abrasivecleaners, must not be used on thevehicle's brightwork.It is recommended that the vehicle is polishedregularly using Jaguar polish and a polishingcloth.THE INTERIORTo prevent damage to your vehicle whenusing a valeting service, make sure toadvise them of the cleaning instructionscontained within the Owner's handbook.The steering wheel centre pad and otherareas containing airbags should only becleaned sparingly with a damp cloth,warm water and a non-detergent soap.CLEANING SWITCHES ANDCONTROLSUse a soft, dry, lint-free cloth whencleaning switches or controls. Do notapply excessive pressure when doingso.Do not spray liquids directly onto thesurface of switches and controls.Do not use chemical agents, solvents,or domestic cleaning products.When cleaning, do not allow sharp orabrasive objects to make contact withthe components.LEATHER UPHOLSTERYTo prevent ingrained dirt and staining, inspectthe seat upholstery regularly and clean every 1to 2 months, as follows:• Wipe off fine dust from the seat surfacesusing a clean, damp, non-coloured cloth.Change frequently to a clean area of cloth,to avoid abrasive action on the leathersurface. Avoid over-wetting.• If this is not sufficient, use a cloth whichhas been dampened with warm soapy waterand then wrung out. Use only mildnon-caustic soap.200Vehicle cleaningLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• Use Jaguar approved Leather Cleaner forheavily soiled areas. Dry off and rub with aclean soft cloth, changing surfacesregularly.Use Jaguar approved Leather Cleaner severaltimes a year to maintain its appearance andsuppleness. The cleaner will nourish andmoisturise and help to improve the surfaceprotective film against dust and substances.•Do not use solvents. Do not use detergents,furniture polish or household cleaners.While these products may initially giveimpressive results, their use will lead torapid deterioration of the leather and willinvalidate the warranty. Jaguar recommenda basic set of products that have beenspecially selected for the type of leather inyour vehicle.• Dark clothing may stain leather seats justlike other upholstery products.• Sharp objects such as belts, zip fasteners,rivets, etc., can leave permanent scratchesand scratch marks on the leather surface.• Unless spillages such as tea, coffee or inkare washed away immediately, permanentstaining may have to be accepted.If a valet service is used, make sure that thespecialist concerned is aware of, and follows,these instructions precisely.FABRIC UPHOLSTERYNever use soap, ammonia, bleach orother cleaners intended for use on hardsurfaces.Do not use upholstery cleaner onelectrical equipment such as fasciaswitches.When cleaning around electricalequipment such as switches, make surethat fluids do not leak into any gapsaround the components or betweenpanels or trim.Use Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, following theinstructions. Avoid over-wetting.REMOVING STAINSMost stains on woollen fabric can be removedif treatment is carried out immediately, beforethe stain has a chance to dry-in.Most stains can be treated with one of threecleaning fluids: Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, drycleaning fluid or clean water. Follow theinstructions on the package.CLEANING SCREENS AND DISPLAYSDo not use upholstery cleaner onelectrical equipment such as fasciaswitches.When cleaning around electricalequipment such as switches, make surefluids do not leak into any gaps aroundthe components or between panels ortrim.• Clean with the cloth provided with thevehicle.• Do not use chemical agents or domesticcleaners.•Do not allow sharp, hard or abrasive objectsto make contact with screens.• Avoid exposing screens to direct sunlightfor long periods.•To prevent errors occurring, make sure only1 finger at a time is in contact with theTouch screen.• Do not use excessive pressure.201Vehicle cleaningRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
WIPER BLADESDo not use excessive pressure.Heavy contamination on the wiper blades shouldbe removed using a soft, damp sponge or cloth.CARPETS AND MATSMarks or stains can be removed by gentlescrubbing with a weak solution of soap andwarm water.For more stubborn stains a commerciallyavailable carpet cleaner should be used.SEAT BELTSDo not allow any water, cleaningproducts or fabric from cloths to enterthe seat belt mechanism. Anysubstance which enters the mechanismmay affect the performance of the seatbelt in an impact.Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm waterand a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow theseat belts to dry naturally while fully extendedand do not allow the belts to retract until fullydry.Note: While cleaning the seat belt, take theopportunity to examine the webbing for damageand wear. Any wear or damage should bereported to and, rectified by, a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.AIRBAG MODULE COVERSAirbag covers should only be cleanedusing a slightly dampened cloth, anda small amount of upholstery cleaner.Any substance which enters themechanism, can prevent correctdeployment of an airbag during animpact.202Vehicle cleaningLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
FLUID FILLER LOCATIONS2.0 litre petrol engine1. Washer fluid.2. Brake fluid (right-hand drive vehicles).3. Engine oil.4. Brake fluid (left-hand drive vehicles).5. Coolant.6. Power steering.7. Engine oil dipstick.Do not drive the vehicle if there is apossibility that leaked fluid will comeinto contact with a hot surface, suchas the exhaust.203Fluid level checksRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
3.0 and 5.0 litre petrol engines1. Washer fluid.2. Brake fluid (right-hand drive vehicles).3. Engine oil (3.0L engine).4. Engine oil (5.0L engine).5. Brake fluid (left-hand drive vehicles).6. Coolant (3.0L engine).7. Power steering (5.0L engine).8. Power steering (3.0L engine).9. Coolant (5.0L engine).Do not drive the vehicle if there is apossibility that leaked fluid will comeinto contact with a hot surface, suchas the exhaust.204Fluid level checksLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Diesel engine1. Power steering.2. Washer fluid.3. Brake fluid (right-hand drive vehicles).4. Engine oil.5. Brake fluid (left-hand drive vehicles).6. Coolant.7. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) reservoir fillercap.The DEF reservoir filler cap is locatedbeneath the spare wheel and tool kit. See238, WHEEL CHANGING.Note: When removing the DEF reservoirfiller cap, a socket drive can be used foradded leverage, if it is too tight. Handtighten only, when refitting.Do not drive the vehicle if there is apossibility that leaked fluid will comeinto contact with a hot surface, suchas the exhaust.CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVELThe engine oil level is not monitored when theengine is running and/or the vehicle is inmotion.The engine oil should be checked frequently andtopped up as required using the correct gradefor the engine.205Fluid level checksRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Check the engine oil weekly. If anysignificant or sudden drop in oil level isnoted, seek qualified assistance.If the message ENGINE OIL PRESSURELOW is displayed, stop the engine assoon as it is safe to do so and seekqualified assistance. Do not start theengine until the cause has been rectified.Prior to checking the oil level make sure thatthe vehicle is on level ground.All except 2.0 litre petrol engine• The engine oil has reached workingtemperature (oil is hot).• The engine has been switched off for 10minutes, as the system will not give anaccurate reading until the oil level hasstabilised.The oil level can then be checked as follows:1. Switch on the ignition (do not start theengine).2. Make sure that Park (P) is selected.3. Select the Service menu using theinstrument panel menu control (see 245,LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS).Select Oil level display from the Servicemenu. The current oil level status andtopping-up advice is displayed in theinstrument panel, top-up as instructed.An indication of the oil level is displayed in thegauge. Messages to the right of the gaugeadvise you of any action you may need to take.If the oil level is within the required operatingrange, the message Engine Oil Level OK willbe displayed. Do not add any additional oil tothe engine.If the oil level is below the required operatingrange, a message advising you how much oilto add will be displayed (e.g. Add 0.5 Litre).Add the recommended quantity of oil.If the message Engine Oil Level Overfilled isdisplayed, seek qualified assistanceimmediately. Do not drive the vehicle as thiswill cause serious damage to the engine.If the message Engine Oil Level Underfilled isdisplayed, add 1.5 litres (2.6 pints) of oil, thenrecheck the level.If the message Engine Oil Level Not Availableis displayed, the oil level is stabilising. Switchoff the ignition, wait 10 minutes, then recheckthe oil level display.If the warning message ENGINE OIL LEVELMONITOR SYSTEM FAULT is displayed, seekqualified assistance.2.0 litre petrol enginePrior to checking the oil level make sure that:• The vehicle is on level ground.• The engine oil is cold.Note: If it is necessary to check the oil levelwhen the engine is hot, switch off the engineand let stand for 5 minutes to allow the oil todrain into the sump. Do not start the engine.206Fluid level checksLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the bladeclean with a lint free cloth.2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdrawagain to check the oil level. Never allow theoil level to fall below the lower mark (MIN)on the dipstick.As a general guide, if the level on thedipstick:• Is nearer to the upper mark or notchthan the lower, add no oil.• Is nearer to the lower mark than theupper, add 0.5 litre (1 pint) of oil.• Is below the lower mark, add 0.8 litre(1.4 pints) of oil and re-check the levelafter a further 5 minutes.TOPPING UP THE OILFailure to use an oil that meets therequired specification could causeexcessive engine wear, a build up ofsludge and deposits, and increasepollution. It could also lead to enginefailure. Do not use low quality orobsolete oils.Your vehicle warranty may be invalidatedif damage is caused by using oil thatdoes not meet the required specification.Overfilling with oil could result in severeengine damage. Oil should be added insmall quantities and the level re-checkedto make sure that the engine is notoverfilled.Do not use oil additives of any type asengine damage could occur. Use onlyspecified lubricants.All except 2.0 litre petrol engine1. Unscrew the oil filler cap.2. Add oil as indicated by the Message centredisplay.3. Wait 5 minutes for the oil level to stabilisethen re-check.2.0 litre petrol engine1. Unscrew the oil filler cap.2. Add oil as indicated by the level on thedipstick, see 205, CHECKING THE ENGINEOIL LEVEL.3. Wait 5 minutes for the oil level to stabilisethen re-check.It is essential to use the correct specificationoil, and to make sure it is suitable for theclimatic conditions in which the vehicle is to beoperated, see 245, LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.Jaguar recommends: Castrol EDGEProfessionalCHECKING THE COOLANT LEVELRunning the engine without coolant willcause serious engine damage.If persistent coolant loss is noticed, seekqualified assistance immediately.The coolant level in the expansion tank shouldbe checked at least weekly (more frequently inhigh mileage or severe operating conditions).Always check the level when the system is cold.207Fluid level checksRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Make sure the coolant level is maintainedbetween the level indicator marks, as shown inthe illustration.Petrol enginesIf the message LOW COOLANT LEVEL isdisplayed in the Message centre, stop thevehicle as soon as safety permits and top-upthe coolant reservoir with the recommendedantifreeze/water mix.If the Message centre displays the messageENGINE OVERHEATING, pull off the carriagewayand allow the engine to idle for 5 minutes andthen switch off the ignition for 10 minutes.Switch on the engine and, provided that thewarning does not occur, continue your journey,avoiding harsh acceleration. Seek qualifiedassistance as soon as possible.TOPPING UP THE COOLANTNever remove the filler cap when theengine is hot.Antifreeze is highly inflammable. Donot allow antifreeze to come intocontact with naked flames or othersources of ignition (e.g. a hot engine)- a fire may result.Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowingthe pressure to escape before removingcompletely.When travelling in territories where thewater supply contains salt, always makesure you carry a supply of fresh (rain ordistilled) water. Topping up with saltwater will cause serious engine damage.Top-up to the upper level indicator mark locatedon the side of the expansion tank. For thecoolant fluid specification, see 245,LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.Note: In an emergency, and only if the approvedantifreeze is unavailable, top-up the coolingsystem with clean water, but be aware of theresultant reduction in frost protection. Do nottop-up or refill with conventional antifreezeformulations. If in doubt consult a qualifiedtechnician.Make sure that the cap is tightened fully aftertop-up is completed by turning the cap until theratchet cap clicks.CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVELSeek qualified assistance immediatelyif brake pedal travel is unusually long,unusually short or if there is anysignificant loss of brake fluid. Drivingunder such conditions could result inextended stopping distances orcomplete brake failure.If the quantity of fluid in the brakereservoir drops below therecommended level, a red warninglamp in the instrument panel willilluminate and the message BrakeFluid Low will be displayed in themessage centre.Note: If the warning lamp illuminates or themessage is displayed while the vehicle is beingdriven, stop the vehicle as soon as safetypermits by gently applying the brakes. Checkand top-up the fluid level if necessary.208Fluid level checksLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keepcontainers sealed and out of the reachof children. If accidental consumptionis suspected, seek medical attentionimmediately.If the fluid comes into contact with theskin or eyes, rinse immediately withplenty of water.Brake fluid is highly inflammable. Donot allow brake fluid to come intocontact with naked flames or othersources of ignition (e.g. a hot engine).Do not drive the vehicle with the fluidlevel below the MIN mark.With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluidlevel at least every week (more frequently inhigh mileage or arduous operating conditions).The brake fluid reservoir is located beneath acover on the raised platform to the rear of themain underbonnet area. See 245, LUBRICANTSAND FLUIDS.The brake fluid level should be between the MINand the MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.The fluid level may drop slightly during normaluse, as a result of brake pad wear, but shouldnot be allowed to drop below the MIN mark.TOPPING UP THE BRAKE FLUIDBrake fluid will damage painted surface.Soak up any spillage with an absorbentcloth immediately and wash the areawith a mixture of car shampoo andwater.Only use new fluid from an airtightcontainer (fluid from open containers orfluid previously bled from the system,will have absorbed moisture, which willadversely affect performance, and mustnot be used).1. Clean the filler cap with a dry, clean clothbefore removing. This will help prevent dirtor moisture from entering the reservoir.2. Remove the filler cap.3. Top up the reservoir with the specified brakefluid to at least the MINIMUM mark, see245, LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.Do not top up the brake fluid to themaximum mark unless the brake padshave been replaced. If unsure seekqualified assistance.4. Replace the filler cap.5. Refit the reservoir cover.CHECKING THE POWER STEERINGFLUID LEVELPower steering fluid is highly toxic.Keep containers sealed and out ofreach of children. If accidentalconsumption of fluid is suspected, seekmedical attention immediately.If the fluid comes into contact with theskin or eyes, rinse immediately withplenty of water.209Fluid level checksRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Power steering fluid is highlyinflammable. Do not allow powersteering fluid to come into contact withnaked flames or other sources ofignition (e.g. a hot engine).The engine must not be started if thefluid level has dropped below the MINmark.Seek qualified assistance immediately ifthere is a noticeable drop in the fluidlevel.If fluid loss is slow, the reservoir maybe topped-up to the upper level mark toenable the vehicle to be driven to a repairfacility for examination. However, it isrecommended that you seek qualifiedassistance before driving the vehicle.Check and top-up the fluid with the vehicle onlevel ground, with the engine switched off andthe system cold. Make sure that the steeringwheel is not turned after stopping the engine.The level of fluid can be seen through thetranslucent body of the reservoir, see 203,FLUID FILLER LOCATIONS.The fluid level should be between the MIN andthe MAX marks.TOPPING UP THE POWER STEERINGFLUIDIt is imperative that the power steeringsystem does not become contaminatedin any way. Always use new fluid andclean the area around the filler neck bothbefore removing the filler cap and aftertopping up. Never return drained fluidto the system.Power steering fluid will damage paintedsurfaces. Soak up any spillage with anabsorbent cloth immediately and washthe area with a mixture of car shampooand water.1. Clean the filler cap before removing toprevent dirt from entering the reservoir.2. Remove the filler cap.3. Top-up the reservoir until the fluid level isbetween the MIN and MAX marks. For thepower steering fluid specification, see 245,LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.4. Replace the filler cap.CHECKING THE WASHER FLUID LEVELSome screen washer products areflammable, do not allow screen washerfluid to come into contact with nakedflames or sources of ignition.If the vehicle is operated intemperatures below 4°C (40°F), use awasher fluid with frost protection.Only screen washer fluid products whichare approved for automotive use shouldbe used and then only in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.Take care to avoid spillage, particularlyif an undiluted or high concentration isbeing used. If spillage occurs, wash theaffected area immediately with water.The washer reservoir supplies the windscreenand headlamp washer jets.Check and top-up the reservoir level at leastevery week, see 245, LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS.Operate the washers periodically to check thatthe nozzles are clear and properly directed.210Fluid level checksLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TOPPING UP THE WASHER FLUID1. Clean the filler cap before opening toprevent dirt from entering the reservoir.2. Open the filler cap.3. Top-up the reservoir with the specifiedwasher fluid until the fluid is visible in thefiller neck, see 245, LUBRICANTS ANDFLUIDS.4. Close the filler cap.211Fluid level checksRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLSDo not allow naked flames or othersources of ignition near the battery,as the battery may emit explosivegases.Make sure that when working nearor handling the battery, suitable eyeprotection is worn, to protect theeyes from acid splashes.To prevent risk of injury, do notallow children near the battery.Be aware that the battery may emitexplosive gases.The battery contains acid which isextremely corrosive and toxic.Consult the handbook forinformation, before handling thebattery.BATTERY CAREIf battery electrolyte comes into contactwith your eyes, skin, or clothes youshould remove the affected clothingand flush the skin/eyes with copiousamounts of water. Seek medicalassistance immediately.If swallowed, battery electrolyte canbe fatal, seek medical assistanceimmediately.Do not connect any 12 volt equipmentdirectly to the battery terminals. Doingso may cause a spark, which can resultin an explosion.The cell plugs and vent pipe must bein place at all times when the batteryis connected to the vehicle. Make surethat the vent pipe is clear ofobstructions and not kinked. Failure todo so may cause a pressure build upin the battery, resulting in anexplosion.Do not expose the battery to a nakedflame or spark as the battery producesexplosive, flammable gas.Never jump start (boost), charge, ortry to start a vehicle with a frozenbattery. Doing so can result in anexplosion.Remove all metal jewellery beforeworking on, or near, the battery, andnever allow metal tools or vehiclecomponents to come into contact withthe battery terminals.Do not allow the battery posts orterminals to come into contact withyour skin. They contain lead and leadcompounds, which are toxic. Alwayswash your hands thoroughly afterhandling the battery.Do not allow battery electrolyte to comeinto contact with fabrics or paintedsurfaces. If battery electrolyte comesinto contact with any surface, the surfaceshould be washed down immediatelywith copious amounts of clean water.Your vehicle is fitted with a low maintenancebattery, which is located under the floor of theluggage compartment.In hot climates more frequent checks of thebattery electrolyte level and condition arerequired. If necessary, the battery cells can betopped up using distilled water.212Vehicle batteryLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM(BMS)The Intelligent Power System Management(IPSM) continuously monitors the condition ofthe main vehicle battery. If excessive batterydischarge occurs, the system will begin to shutdown non-essential electrical systems in orderto protect the battery.If the IPSM calculates that battery condition isnot within set parameters, there are 2 levels ofaction which can be taken. Both levels have anaccompanying message on the Touch screen,and in the case of the low battery warning, inthe Message centre.•Energy Management: Will be displayed onthe Touch screen if the engine is notrunning, and system features are causingexcessive battery discharge. After 3 minutesthe IPSM will begin shutting down vehiclesystems. Normal system operation willresume when the engine is started.•Low Battery - Please Start Engine: Will bedisplayed on the Touch screen and Messagecentre if the engine is not running. After 3minutes the IPSM will begin shutting downvehicle systems. Normal system operationwill resume when the engine is started.Only start the engine if it is safe to doso.Note: If the message Low Battery - Please StartEngine is displayed, drive the vehicle for at least30 minutes in temperatures above 0°C (32°F)or at least 60 minutes if temperatures are below0°C (32°F). This will allow the battery to recoverto an acceptable level. If normal systemoperation is not resumed when the engine isswitched back off, the battery may not havebeen sufficiently charged. If safe to do so,re-start the engine. If problems still exist,contact your Retailer/Authorised Repairer.CONNECTING JUMP LEADSAlways wear appropriate eye protectionwhen working with batteries.Do not disconnect the dischargedbattery.Do not connect a jump lead to thenegative (-) terminal of the battery.Always connect to the recommendedearthing point.Make sure the bodywork of the donorand disabled vehicles do not touch.Make sure both batteries are of the 12volt type and that the jump leads haveinsulated clamps and are approved foruse with 12 volt batteries.Note: Before connecting jump leads, make surethat the battery connections on the disabledvehicle are correct and that all electricalequipment has been switched off.213Vehicle batteryRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
With the bonnet open and the engine coverremoved (see 196, UNDER BONNET COVERS -REMOVAL:1. Connect the positive jump lead (Red) to thepositive terminal on the donor vehicle'sbattery.2. Remove the positive terminal cover (A) andconnect the other end of the positive jumplead to the positive terminal (B).3. Connect the negative jump lead (Black) tothe recommended jump starting earth pointof the donor vehicle.4. Connect the other end of the negative jumplead to the negative post (C).Check that all cables are clear of anymoving components and that all 4connections are secure.5. Start the engine of the donor vehicle, andallow it to idle for a few minutes.6. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.If repeated attempts to start the disabledvehicle are needed, allow the donor vehicleto idle for a few minutes between attempts.7. Allow both vehicles to idle for 2 minutes.8. Switch off the donor vehicle.DISCONNECTING JUMP LEADSTo avoid serious injury use extremecaution when removing the jump leadsas the engine will be running on thepreviously disabled vehicle. Thismeans that you may be working closeto components which are moving athigh speed, carry high voltage, or maybe hot.Note: Do not switch on any electrical equipmentuntil after the cables have been disconnected.The engine should be running on the previouslydisabled vehicle and the engine switched off onthe donor vehicle. Disconnect the jump leadsin the exact reverse order of that used forconnection.CONNECTING A STARTING AIDDo not connect the starting aid to anybattery terminal on your vehicle. Doingso may cause a spark, which can resultin an explosion. It may also result indamage to the charging system.214Vehicle batteryLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
To start the vehicle using a starting aid or aslave battery, follow the instructions in thesequence given:1. Connect the positive (Red) cable to thepositive terminal (in the enginecompartment) of the disabled vehicle.2. Connect the negative (Black) cable to thenegative terminal (in the enginecompartment) of the disabled vehicle.3. Connect/switch on the starting aid.4. Start the engine and allow it to idle.5. Disconnect/switch off the starting aid.6. Disconnect the negative (Black) cable fromthe negative terminal of the vehicle.7. Disconnect the positive (Red) cable fromthe positive terminal of the vehicle.CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERYThe battery must be disconnected andremoved from the vehicle beforecharging.Battery disconnection, removal andreplacement, should only be carried outby qualified personnel. Consult yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer.REPLACING THE VEHICLE BATTERYBattery disconnection, removal andreplacement, should only be carried outby qualified personnel. Consult yourRetailer/ Authorised Repairer.Used batteries must be disposed ofcorrectly, as they contain a numberof harmful substances. Seek advicefrom your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer and/or your local authority.215Vehicle batteryRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
FUSE BOX LOCATIONSWhen a fuse box lid is removed, takecare to protect the box from moisture,and refit the lid at the earliestopportunity.There are 4 separate fuse boxes fitted to thevehicle, each one containing fuses protecting adifferent group of circuits.1. Engine compartment fuse box.• A. Undo the 4 turn-buckles and removethe engine cover to access the fuse box.• B. Remove the fuse box cover.2. Luggage compartment fuse box.3. Passenger compartment fuse box.The fuse box is accessed through the flapbehind the rear centre armrest.4. Secondary luggage compartment fuse box.To access the fuse box, raise the luggagecompartment floor trim.CHANGING A FUSEAlways switch off the ignition systemand the affected electrical circuit, beforereplacing a fuse.Fit Jaguar approved replacement fusesof the same rating and type, or fuses ofmatching specification.If the replacement fuse blows afterinstallation, the system should bechecked by your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.Note: Jaguar recommend that owners do notremove or replace relays. It is recommendedthat you seek qualified assistance in the eventof a relay failure.216FusesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Spare fuses are located in the tool tray situatedunder the floor in the luggage compartment.217FusesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOXCircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse No---F1Engine management sensors (petrol & GTDI).Red10AF2Engine and E-box cooling fans.Tan5AIgnition coils (petrol & GTDI).Clear25AF3Valve control (diesel).Tan5APower wash pump.Green30AF4Main electrical power to module (petrol).Orange40AF5ECM (GTDI).Yellow20ADiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (diesel).Tan5ARight-side front screen heater and heated wiper.Orange40AF6Traction control module (AWD).Green30AF7Oxygen sensor (petrol & GTDI).Red10AF8Active engine mount.Tan5AEngine cooling fan, Engine management (petrol & GTDI).Red10AF9---F10DEF (diesel).Blue15AF11Spare (petrol & GTDI).--Oxygen sensors Bank A (petrol & GTDI).Yellow20AF12Engine management sensors.Red10AECM (diesel).Clear25AF13Oxygen sensors Bank B (petrol).Yellow20ASpare (GTDI).--Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).Tan5AF14Oxygen sensors (petrol).DEF NOX (diesel).Yellow20AF15Spare (GTDI).--Spare.--F16---F17218FusesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse NoHorn.Blue15AF18Starter.Green30AF19Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) pumps.Orange40AF20ABS valve.Clear25AF21Left-side LED headlamps.Blue15AF22Right-side LED headlamps.Blue15AF23---F24Intercooler water pump - EWP (petrol).Blue15AF25Wiper motor.Orange40AF26Monitor.Tan5AF27Transmission control module.Blue15AF28---F29---F30---F31Left-side heated screen.Orange40AF32Spare.--F33---F34Cooling fan.Black80AF35219FusesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FUSE BOXCircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse NoRF-RX, IMS, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).Tan5AF1---F2---F3CAN Gateway module.Tan5AF4Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) module, Yaw rate, Steeringangle sensor.Tan5AF5Fuse box engine compartment.Tan5AF6Rear climate control.Yellow20AF7Front passenger's seat adjustment.Green30AF8Electric Parking Brake (EPB).Tan5AF9Air suspension control module.Tan5AF10---F11---F12---F13Brake pedal switch.Tan5AF14Heated rear screen.Green30AF15---F16Keyless vehicle module supply.Tan5AF17---F18Engine control module.Tan5AF19Heated steering wheel.Red10AF20Air conditioning sensor, Front overhead console, Front dualclimate control module and smog sensor.Tan5AF21Transmission control module, E-Diff, Jaguar Drive selector.Tan5AF22Headlamp levelling.Tan5AF23Right-side front and rear lamp clusters.Tan5AF24Left-side front and rear lamp clusters.Red10AF25---F26220FusesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse No---F27Rear seat dual climate control module.Yellow20AF28Front seat dual climate control module.Yellow20AF29Passenger door module.Clear25AF30Rain/light sensor.Tan5AF31Driver’s door module.Clear25AF32Front dual climate control module.Yellow20AF33Fuel filler flap lock.Red10AF34---F35Battery back-up sounder/tilt sensor.Tan5AF36Keyless vehicle module.Yellow20AF37Front screen wash pump relay.Blue15AF38Left-side rear door module.Clear25AF39Driver’s window, Clock, Switches around the Touch screen, Rearclimate panel, Passenger door memory.Tan5AF40---F41Driver's seat module.Green30AF42---F43Right-side rear door module.Clear25AF44Passenger front seat switch pack.Green30AF45Driver’s seat module.Green30AF46---F47Left-side rear seat module.Green30AF48Right-side headlamp motor.Tan5AF49Left-side headlamp motor.Tan5AF50Steering wheel switches.Tan5AF51Front cigar lighter.Yellow20AF52Rear cigar lighter.Yellow20AF53---F54221FusesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse NoRear accessory socket.Yellow20AF55Restraint control module, Occupancy sensor.Red10AF56Glovebox, glovebox lamp, front and rear overhead consoles, sunvisor lamps, vanity lamps.Red10AF57Right-side rear seat module.Green30AF58---F59---F60Integrated antenna unit, cluster, cluster fan.Red10AF61Climate control module.Red10AF62Front accessory socket.Yellow20AF63Left-side rear sun blind.Blue15AF64---F65On-board diagnostic.Tan5AF66---F67---F68Right-side rear sun blind.Blue15AF69222FusesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOXCircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse NoRight-side Electric Parking Brake (EPB).Green30AF1---F2---F3Singapore road pricing.Tan5AF4---F5Power boot lid.Green30AF6---F7Telematics.Tan5AF8---F9---F10Front heated seat.Yellow20AF11Seat movement logic and switch power.Red10AF12Rear seat logic.Red10AF13Driver's heated seat.Yellow20AF14---F15Chassis control module.Red10AF16Chassis control module (air suspension).Red10AF17Infotainment Master Controller (IMC) fan.Red10AF18Fuel pump, Body control module, LSD.Green30AF19---F20DiM.Red10AF21Headlamp control module, Camera, Lane change merge assist,Park aid module, Interior mirror.Red10AF22Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).Tan5AF23GATEWAY.Tan5AF24Air suspension module.Tan5AF25Rear right-side Climate seat.Yellow20AF26Rear left-side Climate seat.Yellow20AF27223FusesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse No---F28---F29VICS.Grey2AF30Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).Green40AF31Left-side EPB.Green30AF32E-diff module.Green40AF33*Front blower motor.Green40AF34*Quiescent relay box.Yellow60AF35*Sunroof module.Green40AF36*Air suspension.Yellow60AF37*Power amp.Green40AF38*---F39*Jaguar recommends that these fuses shouldonly be serviced by a Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer.Secondary luggage compartment fuse boxCircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse NoTouch screen display.Blue15AF1Amplifier, Clock.Red10AF2---F3Phone connect view, DAB radio, Navigation, TV.Red10AF4Integrated audio module.Blue15AF5Rear seat entertainment.Blue15AF6---F7---F8---F9---F10---F11224FusesLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CircuitFuseColourRating(amps)Fuse No---F12---F13---F14Heating and ventilation module.Blue15AF15---F16225FusesRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TYRE MARKINGS1. Pindicates that the tyre is for passengervehicle use. This index is not always shown.2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge tosidewall edge in millimeters.3. The aspect ratio, also known as the profile,gives the sidewall height as a percentage ofthe tread width. So, if the tread width is 205mm and the aspect ratio is 50, the sidewallheight will be 102 mm.4. Rindicates that the tyre is of Radial plyconstruction.5. The diameter of the wheel rim given (ininches).6. The load index for the tyre. This index is notalways shown.The load index on all replacement tyresmust be, at least, the samespecifications as the OriginalEquipment (OE). If in doubt consult aRetailer/Authorised Repairer.7. The speed rating denotes the maximumspeed at which the tyre should be used forextended periods. See 227, SPEED RATING.8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,which can be used for tyre recalls and otherchecking processes. Most of thisinformation relates to the manufacturer,place of manufacture etc. The last 4numbers are the date of manufacture. Forexample, if the number was 5111, the tyrewas made in the 51st week of 2011.9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has beendesigned with some capability for mud andsnow.226TyresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
10. The number of plies in both the tread area,and the sidewall area, indicates how manylayers of rubber coated material make upthe structure of the tyre. Information is alsoprovided on the type of materials used.11. Wear rate indicator. A tyre rated at 400 forexample, will last twice as long as a tyrerated at 200.12. The traction rating grades a tyresperformance when stopping on a wet roadsurface. The higher the grade, the better thebraking performance. The grades, fromhighest to lowest are; AA,A,Band C.13. The maximum load which can be carried bythe tyre.14. Heat resistance grading. The tyresresistance to heat is grade A,Bor C, withAindicating the greatest resistance to heat.This grading is provided for a correctlyinflated tyre, which is being used within itsspeed and loading limits.15. The maximum inflation pressure for thetyre. 229, AVOIDING FLAT SPOTS.SPEED RATINGSpeed km/h (mph)Rating160 (99)Q170 (106)R180 (112)S190 (118)T200 (124)U210 (130)H240 (149)V270 (168)W300 (186)YTYRE CAREDo not drive the vehicle if a tyre isdamaged, excessively worn orincorrectly inflated.Avoid contaminating the tyres withvehicle fluids as they may causedamage to the tyre.Avoid spinning the wheels. The forcesreleased can damage the structure ofthe tyre and cause it to fail.If wheel spin is unavoidable due to aloss of traction (in deep snow, forexample), do not exceed 50 km/h (30mph).Do not exceed the maximum pressurestated on the sidewall of the tyre.Note: All of the vehicle's tyres (including thespare) should be checked regularly for damage,wear and distortion. If you are in any doubtabout the condition of a tyre, have it checkedimmediately by a tyre repair centre or a Retailer/Authorised Repairer.TYRE PRESSURESPressure checks should only be carriedout when the tyres are cold, and thevehicle has been stationary for morethan 3 hours. A hot tyre at or belowrecommended cold inflation pressureis dangerously under-inflated.Never drive your vehicle if the tyrepressures are incorrect. Under-inflationcauses excessive flexing and uneventyre wear. This can lead to sudden tyrefailure. Over-inflation causes harshride, uneven tyre wear and poorhandling.227TyresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Do not drive the vehicle with a leakingtyre. Even if the tyre appears to beinflated it could be dangerouslyunder-inflated and will continue todeflate. Replace the tyre or contact anapproved repairer.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tyre tread life and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.If the vehicle has been parked in strongsunlight, or used in high ambienttemperatures, do not reduce the tyrepressures. Move the vehicle into theshade and allow the tyres to coolbefore re-checking the pressures.The recommended tyre pressures are listed ona label located in the driver’s door opening.Check the tyres, including the spare, forcondition and pressure on a weekly basis andbefore long journeys.If tyre pressures are checked while the vehicleis inside a protected covered area (e.g. a garage)and subsequently driven in lower outdoortemperatures, tyre under-inflation could occur.A slight pressure loss occurs naturally withtime. If this exceeds 0.14 bar (2 psi, 14 kPa,)per week, have the cause investigated andrectified by qualified assistance.If it is necessary to check tyre pressures whenthe tyres are warm, you should expect thepressures to have increased by up to 0.3 - 0.4bar (4 - 6 psi, 30 - 40 kpa). Do not reduce thetyre pressures to the cold inflation pressureunder these circumstances. Allow the tyres tocool fully before adjusting the pressures.The following procedure should be used tocheck and adjust the tyres pressures.To avoid damaging the valves, do notapply excessive force or sidewayspressure on the gauge/inflator.To avoid damage to TPMS valves, it isrecommended not to use rigid tyreinflation wands. This is to avoid the riskof excess leverage and sidewayspressure on the valve.1. Remove the valve cap.2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflatorto the valve.3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge andadd air if required.4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gaugeand re-attach it before reading the pressure.Failure to do so may result in an inaccuratereading.5. If the tyre pressure is too high, remove thegauge and allow air out of the tyre bypressing the centre of the valve. Refit thegauge to the valve and check the pressure.6. Repeat the process, adding or removing airas required, until the correct tyre pressureis reached.7. Refit the valve cap.228TyresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TYRE VALVESKeep the valve caps screwed down firmly toprevent water or dirt entering the valve. Checkthe valves for leaks when checking the tyrepressures.REPLACEMENT TYRESAlways fit replacement tyres of thesame type, and wherever possible ofthe same make and tread pattern.If the use of tyres not recommended byJaguar is unavoidable, make sure thatyou read, and fully comply with, thetyre manufacturer’s instructions.Ideally, tyres should be replaced in sets of four.If this is not possible, replace the tyres in pairs(both front or both rear). When tyres arereplaced, the wheels should always be re-balanced and alignment checked.The correct tyre specification for your vehiclecan be found on the tyre placard label.AVOIDING FLAT SPOTSIn areas of extended high ambient temperature,vehicle tyres can be affected by a softening ofthe tyre sidewall. If the vehicle is stationary forlong periods, the effect is to slightly deform thetyre at the point where the tyre meets thestanding surface. This is known as a flat spot.This is normal tyre behaviour. However, whenthe vehicle is subsequently driven, vibrationmay be experienced from the flat spot. Thecondition will steadily improve with extramileage.In order to minimise flat spotting while thevehicle is stationary for a long period, tyrepressures can be increased to the maximum asstated on the tyre sidewall. The tyres must bereturned to the specified running pressuresbefore driving. See 227, TYRE PRESSURES.TYRE DEGRADATIONTyres degrade over time due to the effects ofultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, highloads, and environmental conditions. It isrecommended that tyres are replaced at leastevery six years, but they may requirereplacement more frequently.USING WINTER TYRESIn many countries legislation exists that requiresthe use of winter tyres during specified periodsof the year.Note: M+S (mud and snow) tyres have arecognised level of winter performance and neednot be replaced.Note: A dedicated winter tyre often has a lowerspeed rating than the original equipment tyre,and the vehicle must therefore be driven withinthe speed limitation of the tyre. Consult yourJaguar Retailer for further information. Inmarkets that require a tyre's maximum speedlabel to be fitted, the tyre's maximum speedlabel should be placed within the driver's fieldof vision. This can be obtained from the tyreRetailer.This symbol identifies dedicatedwinter tyres, which can be fitted ifoptimum winter traction is required,or the vehicle is to be used in moreextreme winter conditions.Winter tyres must be fitted to all 4 wheels.For optimum traction, tyres should be run in forat least 160 kilometres (100 miles) on dry roadsprior to driving on snow or ice.229TyresRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Use of dedicated winter tyres may require achange of wheel size, depending on the originalchoice of wheel. All 4 wheels must be changed.Approved winter tyresFront:245/45R19 102V Pirelli Sotto Zero Series ll.245/45R20 99V Pirelli Sotto Zero Series ll.245/45R19 102V Dunlop Winter Sport 3D.245/45R20 99V Dunlop Winter Sport 3D.Rear:275/40R19 105V Pirelli Sotto Zero Series ll.275/35R20 102V Pirelli Sotto Zero Series ll.275/40R19 105V Dunlop Winter Sport 3D.275/35R20 102V Dunlop Winter Sport 3D.Tyre pressuresUp to 160 km/h (100 mph)2.2 bar (32 psi, 220 kPa)Front2.2 bar (32 psi, 220 kPa)RearUSING SNOW CHAINSUse traction devices only in heavysnow conditions, on hard roadsurfaces.Never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) whentraction devices are fitted.Never fit traction devices to atemporary use spare wheel.It is essential that only snow chains ofthe recommended type are fitted.Jaguar approved traction devices may be usedto improve traction on compacted snow inheavy snow conditions.If it becomes necessary to fit traction devices,the following points must be observed:• Only Jaguar approved traction devicesshould be used on the vehicle. Only Jaguarapproved traction devices have been testedto make sure that they do not cause damageto the vehicle. Contact a Jaguar Retailer/Authorised Repairer for information.• The wheels and tyres fitted must conformto the specifications of the originalequipment.•Single sided traction devices or snow chainscan be fitted to the rear wheels. They shouldnot be used on temporary spare wheels.• Fit traction devices in pairs on the sameaxle.• Always read, understand and follow thetraction device manufacturer's instructions.Pay particular attention to the maximumspeed and fitting instructions.•Avoid tyre/vehicle damage, by removing thetraction devices as soon as the conditionsallow.Note: When using snow chains, selectJaguarDrive Control Winter mode and switchDSC off. DSC would reduce the deep snowtraction capability as it would limit wheel spinto a level below that which is required togenerate maximum traction.TYRE DECLARATION (India only)All imported tyres meet the requirements ofBureau of India Standards (BIS) and complywith the requirements under Central MotorVehicle Rules (CMVR) 1989. The tyres are thesame as those tyres supplied as OriginalEquipment (OE) for Jaguar models which arefully Type Approved for the Indian market.230TyresLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)TPMS provides a low pressure warningand does not re-inflate your tyres. Tyrepressures should be checked regularlyusing an accurate pressure gauge whenthe tyres are cold.TPMS can NOT register damage to atyre. Regularly check the condition ofyour tyres.When inflating tyres, care should betaken to avoid bending or damaging theTPMS valves. Always make sure ofcorrect alignment of the inflation headto the valve stem.To avoid damage to TPMS valves, it isrecommended not to use rigid tyreinflation wands. This is to avoid the riskof excess leverage and sidewayspressure on the valve.Note: Different types of tyre may affect TPMSperformance. Always replace tyres inaccordance with recommendations.TPMS constantly monitors the tyre pressure ineach wheel except for the temporary use sparetyre (when fitted) which is not monitored.Wheels fitted with TPMS can be visuallyidentified by the external metal lock nut andvalve (1). All Jaguar non-TPMS wheels have arubber valve fitted (2).Tyre pressures should be checked regularlywhen the tyres are cold, and adjusted asnecessary. The presence of TPMS does notremove the need to do this to ensure vehiclesafety.The tyre pressure warning lamp (see 47, TYREPRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (YELLOW))illuminates when one or more of the tyres aresignificantly under-inflated. Stop and check thetyres as soon as possible and inflate them tothe recommended pressure for the vehicleloading condition.TYRE PRESSURE CHECKThe Instrument panel can be used to displaythe vehicle’s tyre pressures. The tyre pressurefigures can be accessed via Tyre Pressures andthe Recommended Pressures menus. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.Note: The tyre pressure units can be configuredto display as either bar, psi, or kPa via the TyrePressures and the Units menu.231Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)RFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
When selected, the last known tyre pressureswill be displayed, alongside the recommendedcold tyre pressures (in brackets).Note: If any of the wheels or tyres have beenremoved, the displayed tyre pressures may notbe valid. Drive the vehicle for at least 15 minutesin order to re-calibrate the system.RECOMMENDED TYRE PRESSURELOOK-UPThe Instrument panel can be used to displaythe recommended cold tyre pressures for yourvehicle. The tyre pressure look-up table can beaccessed via Tyre Pressures and theRecommended Pressures menus. See 41,INSTRUMENT PANEL MENU.Depending on the specification of your vehicle,a number of different values may be displayedto reflect different driving conditions, forexample, high speed driving or for a heavilyladen vehicle.TEMPORARY-USE SPARE WHEEL ANDTYRE CHANGEIf the temporary use spare wheel is fitted, thesystem will automatically recognise the changein wheel positions. After approximately 10minutes of driving above 25 km/h (18 mph),the message FRONT[REAR] RIGHT[LEFT] TYREPRESSURE NOT MONITORED will be displayed,accompanied by illumination of the warninglamp.The warning lamp will first flash and thenilluminate continuously. Extended use of thetemporary use spare wheel will trigger themessage TYRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM FAULT.This TPMS display sequence will be activatedat every ignition cycle until the temporary sparewheel is replaced by a full-size road wheel witha TPMS sensor fitted.Note: If in use, always replace the temporaryspare wheel before having a TPMS faultinvestigated.232Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)LFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TYRE REPAIR KITIf you are in any doubt regarding yourability to carry out the instructions,contact your Retailer/AuthorisedRepairer before attempting the repair.Your vehicle may not be equipped with a sparetyre, in its place you will find a tyre repair kit.The tyre repair kit can be used to repair one tyreand it is essential that you read the followingguide before attempting a tyre repair.The tyre repair kit is located in the underfloorarea of the luggage compartment and can sealmost punctures with a maximum diameter of 6mm.Note: The sealant used in the tyre repair kit hasa shelf life and the expiry date is shown on thetyre sealant bottle. Make sure that the containeris replaced before the expiry date.TYRE REPAIR KIT SAFETYINFORMATIONSome tyre damage may only bepartially sealed, or may not seal at all,depending on the amount and type ofdamage. Any loss of tyre pressure canseriously affect vehicle safety.Do not use the tyre repair kit if the tyrehas been damaged by driving whileunder-inflated.A- Tyre tread area.Only use the tyre repair kit to sealdamage located within the tyre treadarea (A).Do not use the tyre repair kit to sealdamage to the tyre sidewall.Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) whena repaired tyre is fitted to the vehicle.The maximum distance that should bedriven when a repaired tyre is fitted,is 200 km (125 miles).When a repaired tyre is fitted, drivewith caution and avoid sudden brakingor steering manoeuvres.Only use the tyre repair kit for thevehicle with which it was supplied.Do not use the tyre repair kit for anyother purpose than tyre repair.Never leave the tyre repair kitunattended when in use.Only use the tyre repair kit within the-30°C to +70°C temperature range.Always keep children and animals ata safe distance from the tyre repair kitwhen in use.Do not stand directly beside thecompressor when it is operating.Check the tyre sidewall prior toinflation. If any cracks, damage ordeformities are apparent, do not inflatethe tyre.Watch the tyre sidewall duringinflation. If any cracks, bumps orsimilar damage, or deformities appear,switch off the compressor and deflatethe tyre. Do not continue to use thetyre.USING THE TYRE REPAIR KITAvoid skin contact with the sealantwhich contains natural rubber latex.233Tyre repair kitRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Before attempting a tyre repair, makesure that the vehicle is parked safely, asfar away from passing traffic as possible.Make sure that the parking brake isapplied and transmission Park (P) isselected.Do not attempt to remove foreignobjects such as nails, screws, etc. fromthe tyre.Always run the engine when using thecompressor, unless the vehicle is in anenclosed or poorly ventilated space, asthis may cause asphyxiation.To prevent overheating, do not operatethe compressor continuously for longerthan 10 minutes.Note: All vehicle drivers and occupants shouldbe made aware that a temporary repair has beenmade to a tyre fitted to the vehicle. They shouldalso be made aware of the special drivingconditions imposed when using a repaired tyre.REPAIR PROCEDURECheck the tyre sidewall prior toinflation. If there are any cracks,bumps or similar damage, do notattempt to inflate the tyre. Do not standdirectly beside the tyre while thecompressor is pumping. Watch the tyresidewall. If any cracks, bumps orsimilar damage appear, switck off thecompressor and let the air out bymeans of the pressure relief valve. Donot continue to use the tyre.If the tyre inflation pressure does notreach 1.8 bar (26 psi, 180 kPa) withina maximum of 10 minutes, the tyremay have suffered excessive damage.A temporary repair will not bepossible, and the vehicle should notbe driven until the tyre has beenreplaced.1. Open the tyre repair kit and peel off themaximum speed label. Attach the label tothe fascia in the driver's field of vision. Takecare not to obstruct any of the instrumentsor warning lamps.2. Uncoil the compressor power cable and theinflation hose.3. Unscrew the orange cap from the sealantbottle receiver and the sealant bottle cap.4. Screw the sealant bottle into the receiver(clockwise) until tight.Note: Screwing the bottle onto the receiverwill pierce the bottle's seal. Once thereceiver has been fitted, a ratchet preventsit from being removed.5. Remove the valve cap from the damagedtyre.6. Remove the protective cap from the inflationhose. Connect the inflation hose to the tyrevalve making sure that the hose is screwedon firmly.7. Make sure that the compressor switch is inthe off (0) position, insert the power cableconnector into an auxiliary power socket,see 64, AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS.Then switch on the ignition and start theengine unless the vehicle is in an enclosedarea.8. Switch on the compressor switch to the (I)position.9. Inflate the tyre to a minimum of 1.8 bar (26psi, 180 kPa) and a maximum of 3.5 bar(51 psi, 350 kPa).234Tyre repair kitLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Note: When pumping the sealant throughthe tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to6 bar (87 psi, 600 kPa). The pressure willdrop again after approximately 30 seconds.10. During the inflation, switch the compressoroff briefly, to check the tyre pressure usingthe gauge mounted on the compressor.Note: It should not take longer than 10minutes to inflate the tyre. If, after 10minutes, the tyre has not yet reachedminimum pressure, the tyre should not beused.11. Once the tyre has been inflated to therequired pressure, switch off thecompressor. If desired, the ignition may beswitched off after the compressor has beenswitched off.12. Remove the power connector from theauxiliary power socket.13. Remove the inflation hose from the tyrevalve, by unscrewing it as quickly aspossible (counter-clockwise).14. Replace the inflation hose protective capand the tyre valve cap.15. Make sure that the tyre repair kit (includingthe bottle and receiver caps) are placedsecurely in the vehicle. You will need to usethe kit to check the tyre pressure after amaximum of 10 km (6 miles), so make surethey are easily accessible.16. Immediately drive the vehicle for amaximum of 3 km (2 miles), to allow thesealant to coat the inner surface of the tyreand form a seal at the puncture.CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSUREAFTER A REPAIRWhen driving the vehicle, if youexperience vibrations, abnormalsteering, or noises, reduce speedimmediately. Drive with extremecaution and reduced speed, to the firstsafe place to stop the vehicle. Visuallyexamine the tyre and check itspressure. If there are any signs ofdamage or deformity to the tyre or thetyre pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 psi,130 kPa), do not continue driving.Consult a tyre repair centre or yourRetailer/Authorised Repairer, foradvice concerning the replacement ofa tyre after using a tyre repair kit.1. Drive the vehicle for a maximum of 3 km (2miles) then stop in a safe place. Carry outa visual examination of the tyre’s condition.2. Remove the tyre repair kit from the vehicle.3. Screw the inflation hose connector firmlyonto the tyre valve.4. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge.5. If the pressure of the sealant filled tyre isabove 1.3 bar (19 psi, 130 kPa) adjust thepressure to the correct value.If there are signs of damage or deformityto the tyre or the tyre pressure is below 1.3bar do not continue driving.6. Make sure that the compressor switch is inthe Off (O) position and insert the powercable connector into the auxiliary powersocket. Then switch on the ignition and startthe engine unless the vehicle is in anenclosed area.7. Switch the compressor to On (I) and inflatethe tyre to the correct pressure. See 227,TYRE PRESSURES.235Tyre repair kitRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
8. To check the tyre pressure, switch off thecompressor then read the pressure fromthe gauge.9. When the compressor is off, if the tyrepressure is too high, release the requiredamount of pressure using the pressurerelease valve.10. Once the tyre is inflated to the correctpressure, switch off the compressor andremove the power plug from the auxiliarysocket.Note: The use of the tyre repair kit sealantmay lead to error prompts and incorrectreadings of the Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS). Therefore, use the tyrerepair kit pressure gauge to check andadjust the damaged tyre's inflation pressure.11. Unscrew the inflation hose connector fromthe tyre valve, replace the tyre valve cap andthe inflation hose connector protective cap.12. Make sure that the tyre repair kit is placedsecurely in the vehicle.13. Drive to the nearest tyre repair centre orRetailer/Authorised Repairer, for areplacement tyre to be fitted. Make sure thatyou make the repair centre aware that thetyre repair kit has been used before the tyreis removed.14. The tyre inflation hose, the receiver and thesealant bottle must be replaced once a newtyre has been fitted.Only sealant bottles which arecompletely empty should bedisposed of with normal householdwaste. Sealant bottles which containsome sealant, and the tyre inflationhose, should be disposed of by atyre specialist or your Retailer/Authorised Repairer, in compliancewith local waste disposalregulations.236Tyre repair kitLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
WHEEL CHANGING SAFETYBefore raising the vehicle, or changing a wheelmake sure that you read, and comply with thefollowing warnings.Always find a safe place to stop, off thehighway and away from traffic.Make sure that the vehicle and jack areboth on firm level ground.Apply the parking brake, and engagePark (P).Switch on the hazard warning lamps.Make sure that the front wheels are inthe straight ahead position, andengage the steering lock.Make sure that all passengers, andanimals, are out of the vehicle and ina safe place away from the highway.Place a warning triangle at a suitabledistance behind the vehicle, facingtowards oncoming traffic.When one rear wheel is lifted off theground the selection P (Park) positionwill not prevent the vehicle frommoving and possibly slipping off thejack as the park brake only operateson the rear wheels. Use the wheelchock when jacking the vehicle.Always chock the wheel diagonallyopposite the wheel to be changed,using the wheel chock supplied in thetool kit. Chock the front of a frontwheel, or the rear of a rear wheel.If jacking the vehicle on a slight slopeis unavoidable, place chocks on thedownhill side of the two oppositewheels. An additional chock will beneeded.Never place anything between the jackand the ground, or the jack and thevehicle.Do not attempt to raise the vehicleunless the jack head is fully engagedin the jacking point. Only jack thevehicle using the approved jackingpoints.Remove the spare wheel prior tojacking the vehicle, to avoiddestabilising the vehicle when raised.Take care when lifting the spare wheel,and removing the punctured wheel.The wheels are heavy, and can causeinjuries if not handled correctly.Do not start or run the engine while thevehicle is supported only by a jack.WARNING - THAT NO PERSON SHOULDPLACE ANY PORTION OF THEIR BODYUNDER A VEHICLE THAT ISSUPPORTED BY A JACK.Take care when loosening the wheelnuts. The wheel brace may slip off ifnot properly attached, and the wheelnuts may release suddenly. Eitherunexpected movement may cause aninjury.After use, the tool kit should bereturned to the under floor storage areaand correctly stowed.Always make sure replacement tyreshave the correct rating andspecifications (e.g. load index, size,speed rating) for your vehicle.237Wheel changingRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
WHEEL CHANGING1. Jack: Observe the instructions printed onthe jack.2. Wheel brace.3. Locking wheel nut adaptor.4. Towing eye.5. Wheel chock.To remove the spare wheel, unscrew andremove the bolt through the centre.Before raising the vehicle slacken but do notremove the wheel nuts.There are four jacking points on the undersideof the floor. Two indented, triangular indicatorsare provided on each sill cover. These indicatethe location for the jack.Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the jackhandle. Stop jacking the vehicle when the tyrejust clears the ground. Minimum tyre lift givesmaximum vehicle stability.Note: To remove the centre badge use theplastic tipped end of the wheel nut wrenchhandle, push the centre badge from its housingfrom the inside of the wheel.Using the wheel nut wrench, lightly tighten thewheel nuts alternately using the sequenceshown in the illustration.238Wheel changingLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Lower the jack, then tighten the wheel nuts fully,in the same sequence shown. Do notovertighten by using foot pressure or extensionbars on the wheel nut wrench.At the earliest opportunity have the wheel nutstightened with a torque wrench to 125 Nm (92lb.ft).This torque must not be exceeded.LOCKING WHEEL NUTSLocking wheel nuts can be removed andinstalled using only the special adapter providedin the tool kit.Note: When the vehicle is first supplied, theadapter may be stored in the glovecompartment. It should be removed and storedin the tool kit as soon as possible.Note: A code number is stamped onto theunderside of the adapter. This number shouldbe recorded in the Service Record and WarrantyBenefits supplied with the literature pack. If areplacement adapter is required, you will beasked to quote this number.IMPORTANT – USE OF SPARE TYREObserve the following warnings before usingthe temporary spare wheel:Adhere to the instructions on thetemporary spare warning label, affixedto the wheel. Failure to do so maycause vehicle instability and/or tyrefailure.Where fitted the temporary use sparewheel is FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.Drive with caution while the temporaryspare wheel is fitted. Ensure that anoriginal size wheel and tyre are fittedas soon as possible.Do not fit more than one temporaryspare wheel to the vehicle at any onetime.Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) whilethe temporary spare wheel is fitted.The tyre pressure in the temporaryspare wheel should be 4.2 bar (60psi/420 kPa).DSC must be switched on while thetemporary spare wheel is in use.Traction devices such as snow chainscannot be used with a temporary sparewheel.239Wheel changingRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
TOWING EYESThe towing eye at the front of thevehicle is designed for on-roadrecovery only.Do not tow the vehicle on all fourwheels.ATTACHING THE FRONT TOWING EYEThe towing eye is included in the tool kit, locatedin the under-floor area of the luggagecompartment.1. Pop out the cover in the front bumper.2. Locate the towing eye through the bumperand screw the towing eye anticlockwise intoits fixing, until secure.TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLEOnly use the lashing points, orover-wheel lashings or wheel chocks.Lashing over the body or suspension isnot permissible as settling of the airsuspension will cause lashing straps toslacken.The recommended method for recovery/transportation of the vehicle, is on a transporteror trailer designed for that purpose.Make sure that transportation is carried out bysuitably qualified persons, and that the vehicleis secured correctly.240Vehicle recoveryLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
BEFORE STARTING OR DRIVINGIf the vehicle is involved in a collisionit should be checked by a Retailer/Authorised repairer or suitablyqualified personnel, before starting ordriving.PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEMThe bumper includes sensors that detect acollision with a pedestrian and includes energyabsorbing foam and plastics in its construction,to reduce leg injuries.During a pedestrian collision, the sensorsinitiate a bonnet deployment system thatreleases the bonnet hinge system and raisesthe rear edge of the bonnet by approximately130 mm.This increases the gap between the bonnet andthe components within the engine compartmentto create a cushion to mitigate injury caused tothe pedestrian.The bonnet deployment system is active onlywhen the ignition is on and the vehicle is drivenbetween the speeds of approximately 25 km/h(16 mph) and 50 km/h (31 mph).AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THEPEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEMDo not attempt to open the bonnet if thepedestrian protection system has beendeployed.The vehicle must be stopped as soon as it issafe to do so.The hazard warning lamps will be activated andcan only be switched off by pressing the engineSTART/STOP button to switch the engine offand on again.A warning message CHECK PEDESTRIANSYSTEM will appear on the message centre andthe vehicle should be transported to the nearestRetailer/Authorised Repairer. The vehicle mustnot be driven when the bonnet has beendeployed.Note: If the warning message CHECKPEDESTRIAN SYSTEM appears in the messagecentre when the bonnet has not been deployed,the vehicle should be taken to the nearestRetailer/Authorised Repairer immediately. It canbe driven.If any significant damage occurs to the frontbumper it should be inspected by a Retailer/Authorised Repairer as soon as possible.SERVICE DATA RECORDINGService data recorders in your vehicle arecapable of collecting and storing diagnosticinformation about your vehicle. This potentiallyincludes information about the performance orstatus of various systems and modules in thevehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering orbrakes.In order to properly diagnose and service yourvehicle, Jaguar Land Rover Limited and serviceand repair facilities may access vehiclediagnostic information through a directconnection to your vehicle.EVENT DATA RECORDINGPlease be advised that this vehicle incorporatesan Event Data Recorder (EDR). An EDR storesdriving information at the moment of anaccident (driving speed, application of brakepedal and accelerator control etc.), and enablesconfirmation of the information stored. EDRinformation helps to understand thecircumstances of an accident more clearly. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed to record suchdata as:241After a collisionRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;• Whether or not the driver and passengerseat belts were buckled/fastened;• How far (if at all) the driver was pressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,• How fast the vehicle was travelling.Note: EDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data withthe type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehicleor the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.Other parties may seek to access theinformation independently of Jaguar LandRover Limited.242After a collisionLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LABEL LOCATIONSWarning labels attached to yourvehicle bearing this symbol mean:Do not touch or adjust componentsuntil you have read the relevantinstructions in the handbook.Labels showing this symbol indicatethat the ignition system utilises veryhigh voltages. Do not touch anyignition components while thestarter switch is turned on.Labels are applied to draw your attention toimportant subjects (e.g. tyre pressures, airbags,engine compartment hazards, etc.).Additional information labels may also be foundat these locations.1. Air conditioning label - Left-side inner wing.2. Engine number:2.0 litre petrol, stamped into the enginemounting flange.All other engines, located on the front of theright-side cam cover.3. The VIN is stamped on a plate which isvisible through the lowest part of the leftside of the front windscreen. The VIN is alsostamped into the right side suspensiontower.Note: If you need to communicate with aRetailer/Authorised Repairer, you may beasked to quote the VIN number.4. Airbag label - Sun visor.5. Vehicle Identification plate, including theVehicle Identification Number (VIN) andrecommended maximum vehicle weights -Located on the left-side B pillar.Passenger airbag label - Passenger side.Airbag warning label - Base of B pillar onthe driver’s side.Tyre pressure label - Driver’s side.6. Fuel specification label - Inner face of fuelfiller flap.7. Battery warning symbols - Top face ofbattery.It is important that you are familiar with thesesubjects to make sure that your vehicle and itsfeatures are used safely. Using the index at theback of this handbook, refer to the relevant topicfor more information.TRANSMISSION NUMBERThe transmission number is located on a labelattached to the transmission casing.VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATEThe vehicle built date is shown on the VIN plate.243Vehicle labelsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONSCompression ratioDisplacement (cc)Number of cylinders10:11 99942.0L Petrol10.5:12 99563.0L Petrol (SC)9.5:15 00085.0L Petrol (SC)16.1:12 99363.0L DieselSC - Supercharged.244Technical specificationsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDSSpecificationEngine variantPartSAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting Jaguar Land Roverspecification STJLR.03.5003.2.0L PetrolEngine oilSAE 0W-20 engine oil meeting Jaguar Land Roverspecification STJLR.51.5122.3.0L (SC) PetrolSAE 0W-20 engine oil meeting Jaguar Land Roverspecification STJLR.51.5122.5.0L (SC) PetrolSAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting Jaguar Land Roverspecification STJLR.03.5005.If unavailable SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specificationACEA C2 may be used.3.0L Diesel withDiesel particulatefilterSAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting Jaguar Land Roverspecification STJLR.03.5003.If unavailable SAE 5W-30 engine oil meeting specificationACEA A5/B5 may be used.3.0L Dieselwithout Dieselparticulate filterAdBlue®, meeting ISO standard 22241-1.Diesel exhaust fluid is also known as DEF, AdBlue, AUS32 and ARLA 32.DieselDiesel exhaust fluidJaguar recommends Mobil ATF320 PAS fluid.All vehiclesPower steering fluidUse Jaguar brake fluid. If unavailable for topping up, aLow Viscosity, DOT4 brake fluid that meets therequirements of ISO 4925 class 6 may be used.All vehiclesBrake fluidScreen wash with frost protection, diluted with clean wateras specified on the bottle.All vehiclesWasher fluid50% mixture of water and antifreeze, specification WSSM97B44 (coloured orange) Extended Life Coolant.All vehiclesEngine coolant fluidIf in doubt about the required specification of a lubricant or fluid for this vehicle, seek advice froma Retailer/Authorised Repairer.SC - Supercharged Castrol EDGE Professional exclusivelyrecommended by Jaguar.245Technical specificationsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
WEIGHTSMaximum rear axleload²kgMaximum frontaxle load²kgGross VehicleWeight (GVW)¹kgVehicle weightfromkgVariantStandard wheelbase1 2801 1802 4001 8353.0L Diesel1 2801 0802 2801 7352.0L Petrol1 3201 1302 3501 7653.0L Petrol (SC)1 3201 1802 4301 8653.0L Petrol (SC)AWD1 3201 1802 4001 8755.0L Petrol (SC)Long wheelbase1 3201 1802 4501 8603.0L Diesel1 3001 0802 3201 7552.0L Petrol1 3201 1302 4001 7753.0L Petrol (SC)1 3201 2002 4501 8753.0L Petrol (SC)AWD1 3201 1802 4501 8855.0L Petrol (SC)Max. luggage compartment load (all vehicles): 35 kg.The maximum permitted luggage compartment load can be exceeded, provided the requirementsregarding the maximum permissible axle weights and tyre pressures are followed.¹The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle including passengers and load. ²The front andrear axle maximum loads can not be reached simultaneously as this will exceed the GVW limit.SC - Supercharged, AWD - All Wheel Drive.Note: This vehicle is not designed to be usedas a towing vehicle, therefore a Gross TrainWeight is not applicable.246Technical specificationsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DIMENSIONSMeasurement (mm)DescriptionItem2 105Width11 950Width with mirrors folded2Overall height31 460Long wheelbase1 460Standard wheelbaseOverall length45 255Long wheelbase5 130Standard wheelbase1 626Track - front51 604Track - rear6Wheelbase73 157Long wheelbase3 032Standard wheelbase247Technical specificationsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Measurement (mm)DescriptionItem300Maximum wading depth*8Turning circle (kerb to kerb)-12.3 metresLong wheelbase12.3 metresLong wheelbase (AWD)11.9 metresStandard wheelbase11.9 metresStandard wheelbase (AWD)*Maximum wading speed is 7 km/h (4 mph).248Technical specificationsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CAPACITIESCapacityVariantItem77 litresDieselFuel tank (usable)80 litresPetrol4 litresDieselFuel tank reserve (when the fuelgauge indicates empty) 4 litresPetrol6.6 litres3.0L DieselEngine oil refill and filter change5.4 litres2.0L Petrol7.25 litres3.0L (SC) Petrol6.5 litres3.0L (SC) Petrol AWD7.25 litres5.0L (SC) Petrol17 litresDieselDiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)3 litresAll modelsWasher reservoir12.3 litres3.0L DieselEngine cooling system (fill fromdry) 8.1 litres2.0L Petrol13.5 litres3.0L (SC) Petrol13 litres3.0L (SC) Petrol AWD13.2 litres5.0L (SC) Petrol9 litres3.0L DieselEngine cooling system (service fill)6.2 litres2.0L Petrol8.9 litres3.0L (SC) Petrol9 litres3.0L (SC) Petrol AWD9 litres5.0L (SC) Petrol - both drainpoints usedSC - Supercharged, AWD - All wheel drive.The quoted capacities are approximate andprovided as a guide only. All levels must bechecked using the level marks or informationdisplayed in the Message centre, as applicable.249Technical specificationsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
SMART KEY TRANSMITTER LOCATIONS1. Cabin transmitters.2. Door handle transmitters.3. Luggage compartment interior transmitters.4. Luggage compartment exterior transmitter.Any person fitted with an implantedmedical device should ensure that thedevice is kept at a distance of at least22 cm (8.7 inches) away from anytransmitter mounted in the vehicle.This is to avoid any possibility ofinterference between the system anddevice.250Technical specificationsLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM REGULATION STATEMENTSSpecific conditionsAntenna positionMax. OutputFrequencybandServiceTransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere on themetallic part of the roof.30 W/CW40 W/AM70 - 85 MHz4m VHFTransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere on themetallic part of the roof.30 W/CW40 W/AM142 - 175MHz2m VHFTransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere on themetallic part of the roof.10 W/CW10 W/PM380 - 422MHzTETRATransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere on themetallic part of the roof.10 W/CW450 - 470MHzUHFTransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere on thevehicle.10 mW2400 -2483.5 MHzBluetoothTransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere close to aglazed area that doesnot contain antennas orconductive glass.2 W eirp5795 - 5815MHzRoadtelematicsTransmitter, harness andantenna installation to therequirements of ISO/TS21609.Anywhere close to aglazed area that doesnot contain antennas orconductive glass.2 W eirp63 - 64 GHzRoadtelematicsSouth Korea onlyOmnidirectional transmission orpoint-to-multipoint transmission is prohibitedaccording to the law.251Technical specificationsRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY252Type approvalLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
253Type approvalRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
254Type approvalLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
255Type approvalRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
256Type approvalLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
257Type approvalRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
258Type approvalLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
259Type approvalRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
AAbout this handbook......................................2Accessories................................................193Active differential control.............................76Adaptive cruise control................................83ACC gap change.......................................84automatic switch-off................................85driving hints.............................................86follow mode.............................................83forward alert.............................................87intelligent emergency braking..................88malfunction..............................................87queue assist.............................................85radar detection beam issues....................86resume follow mode.................................85resume set speed.....................................85set speed and follow mode override.........84Adaptive dynamics.......................................78Adaptive front lighting system.....................50warning lamp...........................................45Adaptive headlamps.....................................50AdBlue®....................................................185After a collisionpedestrian protection system.................241Age degradation (tyres).............................229Airbagsactive head restraints...............................35cover cleaning........................................202curtain......................................................37deployment........................................36, 38disability modifications............................39front.........................................................37locations...................................................35maintenance...........................................193obstruction...............................................36service information..................................38side..........................................................37warning lamp.....................................38, 46Air conditioningair quality sensor....................................138automatic recirculation...........................138front.......................................................136Alarm...................................................10, 193automatic relocking and arming...............11battery backed sounder............................11deactivating..............................................11passive arming.........................................11perimeter..................................................11security sensor fault.................................12tilt sensor.................................................11All surface progress control...................97–98Anchor points (luggage)..............................67Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warninglamp.............................................................45Anti-theft system........................................193Anti-trap protectionsunroof.....................................................62windows...................................................62Approach lamps...........................................50Arduous driving conditions........................195Audible warnings.........................................48AudioAM/FM radio controls.............................114automatic station retune.........................115CD loading..............................................109changing portable media device.............123conversation assist................................110DAB radiocontrols..............................................116settings...............................................117dual view................................................130dual view controls..................................130end user licensing aggeement................110full screen view......................................125licensing.................................................112media controls.......................................107portable media connections...................118portable media controls.........................120portable media pairing...........................122portable media playing...........................121steering wheel controls..........................108TV controls.............................................126Auto lampswiper detection.........................................50Automatic locking....................................6, 11Automatic speed limiterwarning lamp...........................................46260IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Automatic switch off of ACC........................85Automatic transmission...............................74gear selector............................................75gear shift warning lamp............................47shift paddles.............................................75temporary manual selection.....................75Auto zoom (navigation)..............................169Auxiliary device connection........................122Auxiliary power sockets...............................64BBatteryboost starting.........................................214care........................................................212charging.................................................215connecting jump leads...........................213disconnecting jump leads.......................214luggage compartment access with adischarged battery....................................68maintenance...........................................212replacing................................................215using a starting aid.................................214warning lamp...........................................45warning symbols....................................212Battery backed sounder...............................11Blinds...........................................................61rear window.............................................60Blind spot monitorclosing vehicle sensing............................94displayed messages.................................95notification of overtaking vehicle..............93sensor blockage.......................................95Bluetoothcompatibility...........................................157general information................................161pairingvia the phone......................................157phoneicons...................................................158safety..................................................157portable mediapairing................................................122playing................................................121Bluetooth phonecall volume.............................................159overview.................................................156steering wheel controls..........................159Bonnetclosing...................................................195opening..................................................195Booster seats for larger children..................32Boost starting............................................214BrakesABS warning lamp....................................45electronic brake force distribution............79emergency assist.....................................88emergency brake assist............................79fluid check..............................................208fluid specification...................................209fluid top up.............................................209handbrake................................................80high level brake lamp.............................197hill start assist..........................................79important information..............................79parking brake warning lamp.....................45warning lamp (amber)..............................45warning lamp (red)...................................44Breakdown assistanceInControl link..........................................179Bulbschanging a bulb......................................196rear lamps..............................................197CCamerasproximity view........................................153single rear camera..................................152touch screen menu.................................153Capacities...................................................249engine oil................................................249fuel tank.................................................249washer reservoir....................................249Carpets and mats.......................................202Car-wash....................................................199CD/DVDloading discs..........................................109261IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
CD playerportable media pairing...........................122portable media playing...........................121Cell phonecall volume.............................................159icons......................................................158overview.................................................156steering wheel controls..........................159Cell phone safety........................................157Changing a bulb.........................................196Changing a fuse.........................................216Changing a wheellocking wheel nuts.................................239recommended process...........................238safety warnings......................................237Charging the vehicle battery.......................215Chassis number.........................................243Child safetybooster seats............................................32check list..................................................32child seats................................................28ISOFIX installation....................................32larger children on booster seats...............32lock and window inhibitor........................28positioning...............................................29recommended child seats........................31tether straps.............................................33Cleaningairbag covers..........................................202alloy wheels............................................199automatic car wash................................199carpets and mats....................................202engine compartment..............................199exterior...................................................199paintwork...........................................199glass.......................................................199interior...........................................200–201leather....................................................200park assist sensors................................199parking aids sensors..............................199polishing................................................200rear screen.............................................200removing grease....................................200removing stains......................................201removing tar...........................................200seat belts................................................202sensors and cameras.............................199sunroof...................................................200using a car-wash....................................199washer jets.............................................196wipers....................................................202Cleaning the wiper blades..........................202Climate controlautomatic recirculation...........................138climate seats..........................................142front.......................................................136heated seats...........................................141rear.........................................................139seat comfort...........................................141Clock............................................................40Closingluggage compartment..............................65Closing the bonnet.....................................195Closing vehicle sensing................................94Commandshift.............................................74Condensation (headlamps)..........................51Conformity declarations.............................252Connecting jump leads...............................213Connectivityconnecting a sim card............................178settings..................................................177status icons............................................178Controls cleaning.......................................200Convenience mode.........................................7Coolantchecking the level...................................207specification...........................................208top up.....................................................208Coversrefitting...................................................196removal..................................................196Critical warning messages...........................44Cruise control..............................................82ACC driving hints.....................................86ACC emergency braking...........................88ACC follow mode......................................83ACC gap change.......................................84ACC radar detection beam issues.............86262IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
ACC set speed and follow modeoverride....................................................84adaptive cruise control.............................83adaptive cruise control malfunction.........87follow mode.............................................83forward alert in ACC.................................87resume ACC follow mode.........................85resume ACC set speed.............................85using ACC................................................83warning lamp...........................................47Curtain airbags.............................................37DDAB radiosettings..................................................117DAB radio controls.....................................116Data recording...........................................241Daytime running lamps................................49Declarations of conformity.........................252DEF............................................................185Detection beam issues.................................86Dieselfiller flap.................................................188fuel.........................................................185glow plugswarning lamp........................................46misfuel device........................................188sulphur content......................................185water in fuel...........................................187Diesel engines............................................187Diesel particulate filter (DPF).....................194sulphur content......................................185Differential control.......................................76Dimensions................................................247Direction indicators......................................49warning lamp...........................................47Disability modificationsairbags.....................................................39Displays.....................................................201Door mirrors................................................56blind spot monitor....................................93closing vehicle sensing.........................94sensors.................................................95Door transceiverassistance................................................59erase all programming.............................59programming...........................................58programming a single button...................59programming the garage door opener.....58Double locking...............................................9full alarm..................................................10DPF............................................................194Drive away locking.........................................6Driver exitdeactivating intelligent stop/start.............73DrivingACC automatic switch-off.........................85ACC driving hints.....................................86ACC emergency braking...........................88ACC follow mode......................................83ACC forward alert.....................................87ACC gap change.......................................84ACC malfunction......................................87ACC queue assist.....................................85ACC radar detection beam issues.............86ACC set speed and follow modeoverride....................................................84activating intelligent stop/start.................72active differential......................................76adaptive cruise control.............................83after a collision.......................................241after deployment of the pedestrian protectionsystem...................................................241arduous conditions................................195automatic speed limiter............................81before starting........................................241blind spot monitor....................................93closing vehicle sensing.........................94blind spot monitor messages...................95brakes important information...................79daily checks............................................194deactivating intelligent stop/start.............72DSC active warning lamp.........................46electronic brake force distribution............79emergency brake assist............................79forward alert.............................................87forward alert warning lamp......................47263IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
gear shift warning lamp............................47hill start assist..........................................79low oil pressure........................................44progress control settings.........................98progress control system overview...........97rain sensor...............................................55resume ACC follow mode.........................85resume ACC set speed.............................85running-in..............................................193sitting correctly........................................15using ACC................................................83using cruise control.................................82using the progress control system...........97weekly checks........................................194Driving abroadbeam pattern............................................51headlamps................................................51Driving aidstraffic sign recognition.............................92Driving modes..............................................90dynamic program.....................................90winter.......................................................90Driving position memory.............................14recalling a position...................................15Dual view...................................................130controls..................................................130Dynamic program........................................90Dynamic stability control (DSC)...................76DSC active warning lamp.........................46DSC off warning lamp..............................46switching between DSC and tracDSC.......76switching off............................................76switching on.............................................76EElectric parking brake...................................80Electric seats................................................13head restraints.........................................19position memory......................................14recalling a memory position.....................15restricted seat travel.................................15Electric windowsoperation..................................................60Electronic brake force distribution...............79Electronic data...........................................241Emergency brake assist.........................79, 88Emergency callInControl link..........................................179Emergency key locking................................12Emergency releaseluggage compartment..............................67Engineantifreeze level........................................207compartment opening............................195coolant level...........................................207diesel......................................................187diesel fuel...............................................185oil level...................................................205petrol fuels.............................................184running-in..............................................193specifications.........................................244startingkeyless start backup.............................71switching off............................................70Engine/transmission warning lamp..............45Engine compartmentfluid filler locations.................................203Engine compartment cleaning....................199Engine coversrefitting...................................................196removal..................................................196Engine oilcapacity..................................................249Engine starting.............................................70failure to start...........................................71Engine temperature warning lamp...............44Entering the vehicleentry and exit mode..................................22global opening............................................6keyless entry..............................................6passive entry..............................................6Ethanol.......................................................184Event data recording..................................241Executive class rear seats............................16massage...................................................17passenger seat away................................14Exhaust filter..............................................194264IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Exhaust fluiddiesel......................................................185Exiting the vehiclearming the alarm......................................12closing mislock........................................10door locks and release levers.....................9double locking............................................9emergency locking...................................12full alarm..................................................10global closing...........................................10interior locks..............................................9keyless locking.........................................10lock confirmation.......................................9passive arming.........................................11perimeter alarm........................................11single locking.............................................9Exterior cleaning........................................199Exterior lampsbulb changing........................................196Exterior mirrorselectric.....................................................56manual.....................................................56mirror dip when reversing........................57External temperaturewarning lamp...........................................46Extinguisher...............................................198FFire extinguisher........................................198First aid kit.................................................198Flat spots...................................................229Fluidsbrakecheck..................................................208specification.......................................209top up.................................................209capacities...............................................249coolantspecification.......................................208top up.................................................208engine oilcheck..................................................205filler locations.........................................203oiltop up.................................................207power steeringcheck..................................................209specification.......................................210top up.................................................210specifications.........................................245washer fluid............................................211check..................................................210specification.......................................211Fog lampswarning lampsrear.......................................................46Folding table................................................17Followoverride....................................................84Follow modeentering....................................................83gap change...............................................84gap changing............................................84override....................................................85resume.....................................................85Forward alert................................................87Forward alert in ACCobject detection........................................87Forward alert warning lamp.........................47Front airbags................................................37Front climate controlautomatic recirculation...........................138Front wiperswinter park position...............................197Fuel and refuelling......................................188consumption..........................................190diesel......................................................185diesel fuel sulphur content.....................185ethanol...................................................184filler flap.................................................188fuel filler flap..........................................188methanol................................................185methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE).........185misfuel device........................................188octane rating..........................................184petrol......................................................184running out............................................187265IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
safety precautions..................................184tank capacity..........................................189water in fuel...........................................187Fuel can......................................................187Fuel consumption......................................190combined cycles....................................192extra-urban cycle....................................192urban cycle.............................................192Fuel filler flap.............................................188Fuel gauge....................................................40Fuel system................................................195Fuel tankcapacity..................................................249Full screen view for video...........................125Fuseschanging................................................216engine compartment fuse box................218locations.................................................216luggage compartment fuse box..............223passenger compartment fuse box..........220GGarage door opener.....................................58assistance................................................59erase all programming.............................59programming...........................................58programming a single button...................59Garage door transceiver...............................58Gearboxautomatic.................................................74gear shift warning lamp............................47identification number.............................243limp home mode......................................75Glass cleaning............................................199Global closing..............................................10Global opening...............................................6Glow plugswarning lamp...........................................46HHandbook symbols........................................2Handbrake....................................................80Headlamps...................................................49adaptive....................................................50approach lamps........................................50beam pattern............................................51bulb changing........................................196condensation............................................51daytime running lamps.............................49driving abroad..........................................51high beam assist......................................50high beam assist warning lamp................47high beam warning lamp..........................47warning lamp (AFS).................................45washers....................................................55xenon.....................................................196Head restraintsactive........................................................35electric seats............................................19front seats................................................19rear seats.................................................20removing..................................................21Heated steering wheel..................................22Heating and ventilationair quality sensor....................................138automatic recirculation...........................138climate seats..........................................142front.......................................................136heated seats...........................................141rear.........................................................139High beam assist.........................................50Hill start assist.............................................79Homelink......................................................58assistance................................................59erase all programming.............................59programming...........................................58programming a single button...................59programming the garage door opener.....58IIdentifying the vehicletransmission number.............................243Ignitionrolling re-start..........................................71switching on.............................................70InControlapps.......................................................182266IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
connected navigation.............................171connectivity............................................177overview.................................................179pro services............................................182protect....................................................179remote premium....................................180secure....................................................181Indicators warning lamp..............................47Information messages...........................41, 44Infortainmentaudio settings.........................................109loading discs..........................................109Infotainmentautomatic station retune.........................115connecting a media device.....................119DAB radiosettings...............................................117DAB radio controls.................................116deploying the rear seat screens..............133dual view................................................130controls..............................................130DVD player controls...............................128full screen view......................................125headphones............................................132importing/ripping media.........................123media controls.......................................107media player controls.............................124portable mediachanging.............................................123connecting multiple devices...............122connections........................................118controls..............................................120pairing................................................122playing................................................121radio controls.........................................114touch screencare....................................................101extra features......................................104home menu........................................100my home screen.................................102operating............................................101TV controls.............................................126Instrument panel..................................40, 201display units.............................................43fuel range.................................................42lamp test..................................................44menu........................................................41driving features....................................41instrument display................................41trip computer........................................41vehicle set-up.......................................41recommended tyre pressures.................232service indicator.......................................43trip computer...........................................42trip distance.............................................42tyre pressure check................................231warning lamps..........................................44warning messages...................................41Intelligent emergency brakingACC..........................................................88Intelligent stop/startactivating..................................................72deactivating........................................72–73warning lamp...........................................46Intelligent stop/start warning lamp..............47Interior cleaning.................................200–201airbag covers..........................................202carpets and mats....................................202Interior lamps..............................................52bulb changing........................................196types........................................................52Interior locking...............................................9Intrument panel menunavigation information...........................171ISOFIX installation........................................32JJump startingconnecting a starting aid........................214connecting jump leads...........................213disconnecting jump leads.......................214KKeyless entry..................................................6Keyless locking............................................10267IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
LLabel locations...........................................243Lamps..........................................................49auto lamps wiper detection......................50brake lamp.............................................197bulb changing........................................196bulb replacement....................................196condensation............................................51rear lamp removal..................................197test...........................................................44TPMS warning lamp.................................47warning lamps..........................................44xenon headlamps...................................196Leather cleaning.........................................200Licensingaudio/video.............................................110Lightinginterior lamps locations............................52Limp home mode.........................................75Load securing..............................................67Loadspaceemergency release...................................67Lockingautomatic relocking..................................11confirmation...............................................9door locks and release levers.....................9double locking............................................9drive away..................................................6emergency locking...................................12global closing...........................................10in an emergency.......................................12keyless.....................................................10mislock.....................................................10security sensor fault.................................12single.........................................................9with the emergency key............................12Locking wheel nuts....................................239Low fuel warning lamp.................................46Low oil pressure warning lamp....................44Lubricants specifications...........................245Luggage compartmentaccess with a discharged battery.............68anchor points...........................................67closing.....................................................65emergency release...................................67opening....................................................65opening height.........................................66MMaintenancearduous driving conditions.....................195brake fluid level......................................208bulb changing........................................196rear lamp removal..............................197capacities...............................................249changing a fuse......................................216checking tyre pressure after a repair......235cleaningalloy wheels........................................199exterior...............................................199glass...................................................199interior........................................200–201leather................................................200rear screen.........................................200seat belts............................................202sensors and cameras.........................199the engine compartment.....................199closing the bonnet..................................195daily checks............................................194disconnecting jump leads.......................214engine compartment fuse box................218engine coolant level................................207engine oil level.......................................205fuel system.............................................195fuse box (passenger compartment).......220jump starting..........................................214label locations........................................243lubricants and fluid specifications..........245luggage compartment access with adischarged battery....................................68luggage compartment fuse box..............223oil top up................................................207paintwork repair.....................................199polishing................................................200power steering fluid level.......................209removing grease and tar........................200removing stains......................................201268IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
running-in..............................................193side window blind reset..........................198smart key battery.......................................7sunroof wind deflector...........................200tyre repair kit..........................................233tyre repair procedure..............................234using a starting aid.................................214washer fluid level...................................210weekly checks........................................194Manual seatshead restraints.........................................19Mapauto zoom..............................................169split screen.............................................168updates..................................................170Massage seats...........................................142Mediaaudio settings.........................................109automatic station retune.........................115conversation assist................................110DVD player controls...............................128end user licensing agreement................110licensing.................................................112loading discs..........................................109media controls.......................................107portable mediaconnecting a media device.................119importing/ripping media.....................123radio controls.........................................114rear mediaheadphones........................................132home screen.......................................135video media player controls...................124Message centre display units.......................43Methanol....................................................185Minor paintwork repairs.............................199Mirrorsblind spot monitor..............................93–95dip when reversing...................................57exterior mirrors........................................56Misfuel device............................................188Modesdriving......................................................90winter.......................................................90Mpg...........................................................190NNavigationaddress entry.........................................165alerts......................................................170approach mode......................................172connected navigation.............................171door to door routing...............................173edit route................................................169from the rear seats.................................168fuel finder...............................................171fuel prices service..................................172instrument panel view............................171main menusearch.................................................166mapauto zoom..........................................169split screen.........................................168updates...............................................170menu......................................................165my commute..........................................171online routing.........................................173online service.........................................172operating................................................162overview.................................................162profiles...................................................173real time traffic flow...............................172route planning web portal......................173safety cameras.......................................173satellite view...........................................173search....................................................166settings..................................................169share......................................................173view options...........................................169your favourites.......................................170OObstructing the airbag.................................36Occupant safetychild seat tether straps.............................33cleaning seat belts..................................202recommended child seats........................31269IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
seat belt checks........................................26seat belt pre-tensioners............................25seat belt reminder warning.......................26seat belt safety.........................................25seat belts warning lamp...........................45using seat belts........................................23Octane rating..............................................184petrol......................................................184Oilengine oil specification...........................207filler locations.........................................203specification...........................................245top up.....................................................207used engine oil.......................................195One-touch operation (windows)...................61Opening the bonnet....................................195Opening the luggage compartment..............65Oversteer.....................................................76OverviewInControl mobile technology..................179Owner maintenance...................................194PPaddle shift..................................................75Paintworkcleaning..................................................199repair......................................................199Pairingvia the phone..........................................157Park assistcleaning sensors and cameras...............199limitations..............................................149options...................................................147selecting.................................................148troubleshooting......................................149using......................................................148Parking aidsadjusting the volume..............................146cleaning sensors and cameras...............199park assist..............................................147limitations...........................................149selecting.............................................148troubleshooting..................................149using..................................................148reverse traffic detection..........................150sensors...............................................151single rear camera..................................152system fault............................................146using......................................................145Parking brake...............................................80warning lamp...........................................45Particle filter...............................................194Parts..........................................................193Passenger compartment fuse box..............220Passive alarm arming...................................11Passive entry..................................................6Pedestrian protection system.....................241after deployment....................................241Perimeter alarm...........................................11Petrolfuel types................................................184Petrol consumption....................................190Petrol filler flap...........................................188PhoneBluetooth compatibility..........................157call volume.............................................159compatibility list.....................................157contacts.................................................159icons......................................................158InControl................................................180managing two calls................................158merge calls.............................................158microphone volume...............................159overview.................................................156pairing via the phone..............................157steering wheel controls..........................159Phone safety..............................................157Polishing the bodywork.............................200Portable mediaBluetooth wireless technology...............161changing device.....................................123connecting a media device.....................119connecting multiple devices...................122connections............................................118controls..................................................120importing/ripping media.........................123pairing....................................................122playing...................................................121270IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Power sockets..............................................64Power steeringfluidspecification.......................................210fluid level................................................209Pressure checking (tyres)checking after a repair............................235Pressurestyres.......................................................227Progress controloverview...................................................97settings....................................................98using the system......................................97Progress control warning lamp....................46Puncture repair kit.....................................233instructions for use................................233repair procedure.....................................234safety.....................................................233QQueue assist (ACC)......................................85RRadioautomatic station retune.........................115DABsettings...............................................117DAB controls..........................................116Radio frequency regulations......................251Rain sensor..................................................55Rear fog lamps warning lamp......................46Rear lampbulb changing........................................197removal..................................................197Rear mediadeploying the rear seat screens..............133headphones............................................132home screen..........................................135remote controlbatteries.............................................134remote control use.................................133screens overview....................................135touch screen controls.............................108Rear screen cleaning..................................200Rear seat entertainmentdeploying the screens............................133headphones............................................132home screen..........................................135remote control........................................133remote control batteries.........................134Rear seatsexecutive class.........................................16massage seats......................................17executive class seats................................14folding table.............................................17passenger seat away................................14position memory......................................16safety.......................................................17Rear seat screenshome menu............................................135navigation...............................................168overview.................................................135rear climate............................................139Rear window blind.......................................60Recalling seat memory position...................15Recommended tyre pressures...................232Recordingevent data...............................................241service data............................................241Recoverytowing eyes............................................240transporting...........................................240Refuellingdiesel......................................................185diesel fuel sulphur content.....................185ethanol...................................................184fuel filler flap..........................................188methanol................................................185MTBE.....................................................185octane rating..........................................184petrol......................................................184running out of fuel..................................187safety precautions..................................184Reminder (seat belt)....................................26Remote controlbatteries.................................................134care............................................................7271IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
driving position memory..........................14rear media..............................................133single locking.............................................9smart key battery.......................................7system transmitters...............................250Removing a rear head restraint....................21Removing stains........................................201Repairing paintwork damage.....................199Replacement tyres.....................................229Resetting the windows...............................197Restarting the engine while moving.............71Restricted seat travel...................................15Resume speed and follow mode (ACC)........85Reverse parking aidsadjusting the volume..............................146parking aid system fault.........................146reverse traffic detection..........................150sensors...............................................151using......................................................145Road sign recognition..................................92Rolling re-start.............................................71Rotary gear selector.....................................75Running-in.................................................193Running out of fuel....................................187SSafetychild safety locks......................................28cleaning seat belts..................................202fuel and refuelling...................................184seat belt checks........................................26seat belt pre-tensioners............................25seat belt reminder warning.......................26seat belts..................................................25seat belts warning lamp...........................45seats for larger children...........................32sitting correctly........................................15tyre care.................................................227tyre pressures........................................227used engine oil.......................................195using seat belts........................................23using the phone.....................................157warning triangle.....................................198Safety in the garagebattery precautions................................195electrical components............................195engine fans.............................................195exhaust gases........................................195hot components.....................................195jacking....................................................195Satellite navigationaddress entry.........................................165alerts......................................................170approach mode......................................172connected navigation.............................171door to door routing...............................173edit route................................................169fuel finder...............................................171fuel prices service..................................172instrument panel view............................171mapauto zoom..........................................169split screen.........................................168updates...............................................170menu......................................................165my commute..........................................171online routing.........................................173online service.........................................172operating................................................162overview.................................................162profiles...................................................173real time traffic flow...............................172route planning web portal......................173safety cameras.......................................173satellite view...........................................173search....................................................166settings..................................................169share......................................................173view options...........................................169your favourites.......................................170Screen washcheck......................................................210specification...........................................245topping up..............................................211Seat belts.............................................23, 202adjusting..................................................23checks......................................................26272IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
pre-tensioners..........................................25reminder warning.....................................26safety.......................................................25warning lamp...........................................45Seatschild restraint check list...........................32child seat positioning...............................29child seats................................................28child seat tether straps.............................33cleaning seat belts..................................202climate seats..........................................142comfort and adjustment.........................141electric front.............................................13electric front head restraints....................19executive class rear..................................16massage seats......................................17executive rear seats..................................14front head restraints.................................19heated....................................................141ISOFIX installation....................................32passenger seat away................................14position memory......................................14rear folding table......................................17rear head restraints..................................20rear seat position memory.......................16rear seat safety.........................................17rear seat screens overview.....................135recalling a memory position.....................15recommended child seats........................31remote seats..........................................144settings...............................................144removing a rear head restraint.................21restricted seat travel.................................15seat belts warning lamp...........................45seat comfort and adjustment....................15seat massage.........................................142sitting correctly........................................15Securing luggage.........................................67Security........................................................10alarm......................................................193tilt sensor.............................................11automatic perimeter alarm.......................11automatic relocking and arming...............11battery backed sounder............................11closing mislock........................................10deactivating the alarm..............................11lock confirmation.......................................9locking with the emergency key...............12perimeter alarm........................................11single locking.............................................9Security sensorsfault..........................................................12Sensorsblockage...................................................95Sequential shift............................................74Service interval indicator..............................43Servicingairbags.....................................................38data recording........................................241Set speed limit.............................................81Settingsaudio......................................................109general...................................................106guidancenavigation system..............................169system...................................................106Settings menu..............................................41display units.............................................43Side airbags.................................................37Side lamps warning lamp.............................47Side window blindreset.......................................................198Side window blinds......................................61Sign recognition...........................................92Silencing the alarm......................................11Sim cardconnecting.............................................178Sitting correctly............................................15Smart keyapproach lamps........................................50battery changing........................................7care............................................................7driving position memory..........................14single locking.............................................9transmitters............................................250SmartphoneInControl................................................180InControl app.................................179, 182273IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
InControl protect link.............................179Snow chains..............................................230SOS emergency callInControl protect link.............................179Specificationscapacities...............................................249dimensions.............................................247engine....................................................244ethanol...................................................184fluids......................................................245fuel tank capacity...................................189label locations........................................243lubricants...............................................245methanol................................................185MTBE.....................................................185weight....................................................246Speed-dependent wipers..............................55Speed limiting..............................................81Speedometer................................................40Split screen map........................................168SRS..............................................................35airbag warning lamp.................................46Stability controlactive differential......................................76DSC..........................................................76switching between DSC and tracDSC....76switching on.........................................76switching off............................................76tracDSC....................................................76Starting after a collision.............................241Starting the engine.......................................70failure to start...........................................71keyless start backup.................................71Status iconstouch screen..........................................101Steering columnlock............................................................7vehicle recovery.........................................7Steering wheeladjusting..................................................22AUTO position......................................22audio controls........................................108heated......................................................22Steering wheel controlsspeed limiter............................................81Stolen vehicleInControl secure.....................................181Stop/startactivating..................................................72deactivating........................................72–73Storage compartments................................63cup holders..............................................63front cubby box........................................63rear armrest.............................................63Storage compartments areasglove box..................................................63Sun blind......................................................60Sun blindsside windows...........................................61Sunroofanti-trap protection..................................62reset.......................................................197Supplementary restraint system (SRS)airbag deployment....................................38airbag locations........................................35airbags maintenance..............................193airbag warning lamp...........................38, 46curtain airbags.........................................37front airbags.............................................37side airbags..............................................37Surround cameras.....................................153touch screen menu.................................153Suspensionadaptive dynamics....................................78Switch cleaning..........................................200Switching off the engine..............................70Switching on the ignition.............................70TTable............................................................17Tachometer..................................................40Technical specificationsbrake fluid..............................................245capacities...............................................249dimensions.............................................247engine....................................................244engine coolant........................................245274IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
engine oil................................................245radio frequency regulations....................251washer fluid............................................245weights...................................................246TelephoneBluetooth compatibility..........................157Bluetooth wireless technology...............161call volume.............................................159contacts.................................................159icons......................................................158managing two calls................................158merge calls.............................................158microphone volume...............................159overview.................................................156pairingvia the phone......................................157steering wheel controls..........................159Telephone safety........................................157Televisioncontrols..................................................126Tilt sensor....................................................11Touch screen.............................................201changing portable media device.............123connecting multiple portable mediadevices...................................................122connectivity settings..............................177DAB radio controls.................................116dual view................................................130dual view controls..................................130editing screens.......................................102editing shortcuts....................................102editing widgets.......................................102extra features.........................................104general settings......................................106heated seats...........................................141home menu............................................100inhibited display.....................................125massage seats........................................142my home screen.....................................102operating................................................101portable mediacontrols..............................................120portable media connections...................118portable media pairing...........................122portable media playing...........................121rear media control..................................108rear seat screenseat comfort.........................................17remote seats..........................................144seat comfort and adjustment....................15seat settings...........................................144status icons............................................101surround cameras..................................153system settings......................................106touch screen care...................................101TV controls.............................................126valet mode..............................................104deselecting.........................................104video player controls..............................124Tow eye (front)..........................................240Towingeyes........................................................240tracDSCstability control........................................76Tracking your vehicleInControl secure.....................................181Traction controlswitching between DSC and tracDSC.......76switching off............................................76switching on.............................................76tracDSC....................................................76Traffic sign recognition................................92Transmissionautomatic.................................................74gear shift warning lamp............................47identification number.............................243limp home mode......................................75Transmitterssmart key...............................................250Transporting the vehicle.............................240Trip computer..............................................42average speed..........................................42fuel consumption.....................................42fuel range.................................................42reset.........................................................42trip distance.............................................42TVcontrols..................................................126275IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
dual view................................................130dual view controls..................................130Tyre pressure checking after a repair.........235Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..231tyre care.................................................227valves.....................................................229warning lamp...........................................47Tyre repair kitchecking pressures................................235repair procedure.....................................234safety information..................................233using......................................................233Tyresage degradation......................................229changing................................................232flat spots................................................229important information............................239Indian regulations..................................230pressure check.......................................231pressures...............................................227recommended tyre pressure look-up.....232repair kit.................................................233repair kit use..........................................233repair procedure.....................................234replacements..........................................229snow chains...........................................230speed ratings..........................................227temporary use spare..............................232TPMS.....................................................231warning lamp........................................47tyre care.................................................227tyre repair safety....................................233tyre wall markings..................................226use of spare tyre....................................239valves.....................................................229wall markings.........................................226winter.....................................................229UUnder bonnet covers..................................196Understeer...................................................76Unlocking.......................................................9all doors.....................................................4driver's door...............................................4entry and exit mode..................................22global opening........................................4, 6keyless entry..............................................6luggage compartment emergencyrelease......................................................67mode..........................................................4multi point entry.........................................4passive entry..............................................6single point entry.......................................4USB devicesconnecting multiple devices...................122Used engine oil..........................................195Using adaptive cruise control.......................83Using cruise control.....................................82Using the spare tyreimportant information............................239VValet mode.................................................104deselecting.............................................104Vehicle alarm.............................................193Vehicle batterybattery monitoring system.....................213connecting jump leads...........................213replacing................................................215warning symbols....................................212Vehicle battery care....................................212Vehicle build date.......................................243Vehicle cleaningairbag covers..........................................202alloy wheels............................................199automatic car wash................................199carpets and mats....................................202engine compartment..............................199interior...........................................200–201rear screen.............................................200sunroof...................................................200washer jets.............................................196Vehicle data recording...............................241Vehicle identificationtransmission number.............................243Vehicle locationInControl secure.....................................181276IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
Vehicle recoveryattaching the front tow eye.....................240steering column lock..................................7towing eyes............................................240transporting the vehicle..........................240Video media playercontrols..................................................124dual view................................................130controls..............................................130full screen view......................................125inhibited display.....................................125VIN number................................................243Voice control..............................................175settingscommand list......................................176operating guide..................................176preferences.........................................176voicetags............................................176voice training......................................176tutorial....................................................175voicetags................................................176WWarning lamps.............................................44ABS..........................................................45ACC follow mode......................................46adaptive front lighting system (AFS)........45airbags...............................................38, 46audible warnings and indicators...............48automatic speed limiter............................46battery charge..........................................45brake..................................................44–45critical warning message..........................44cruise control...........................................47diesel glow plugs.....................................46DSC active................................................46engine/transmission.................................45engine temperature..................................44external temperature................................46forward alert.............................................47gear shift warning lamp............................47headlamp high beam................................47high beam assist......................................47indicators.................................................47intelligent stop/start (amber)....................46intelligent stop/start (green).....................47lamp test..................................................44low fuel....................................................46low oil pressure........................................44parking brake...........................................45progress control system..........................46rear fog lamps..........................................46seat belt....................................................45side lights.................................................47tyre pressure monitoring system(TPMS).....................................................47Warning messages......................................41Warning triangle........................................198Washer jets................................................196Washer reservoircapacity..................................................249Washers.......................................................54fluid specification...................................211fluid top up.............................................211headlamps................................................55Washingautomatic car wash................................199exterior paintwork..................................199removing grease....................................200removing stains......................................201removing tar...........................................200soft top...................................................200Water in fuel...............................................187Weightsgross vehicle weights.............................246roof load.................................................246roof rack weight.....................................246vehicle weights.......................................246Wheel changingimportant information............................239locking wheel nuts.................................239recommended process...........................238safety warnings......................................237tilt sensor...............................................238use of spare tyre....................................239Wheels and tyresage degradation......................................229changing a tyre.......................................232277IndexRFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
checking the pressures after a repair.....235flat spots................................................229Indian regulations..................................230pressures...............................................227puncture repair.......................................233puncture repair safety............................233repair kit.................................................233repair kit use..........................................233repair procedure.....................................234replacements..........................................229snow chains...........................................230temporary use spare..............................232TPMS.....................................................231TPMS warning lamp.................................47tyre care.................................................227tyre speed ratings...................................227tyre wall markings..................................226valves.....................................................229winter tyres............................................229Wheel spin...................................................76Wi-Fi connection icons...............................178Windowsanti-trap protection..................................62one-touch operation.................................61operation..................................................60reset.......................................................197side window blinds...................................61sunroof reset..........................................197Winter park position...................................197Winter tyres...............................................229Wipers.........................................................54Wipers and washers.....................................54fluid level................................................210rain sensor...............................................55speed-dependent mode............................55Wireless technologyBluetooth................................................161XXenon headlamps......................................196278IndexLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
279RFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
DRIVER CONTROLSNote: Information in brackets refers to the pagewhere additional information can be found.1. InControl Protect- Breakdown call (179).2. Sunroof (60).3. Rear screen sun blind (60).4. Rear sunroof blind (60).5. InControl Protect- SOS Emergeny call (179).6. Front sunroof blind (60).7. Parking Aid (145).8. Front courtesy/reading lamps (52).9. Indicator/headlamp controls (49).10. Gearshift down (74).11. Instrument panel (41).12. Gearshift up (74).13. Wiper/washers controls (54).14. START/STOP button (70).15. Touch screen (100).16. Glovebox release (63).17. Climate controls (136).18. Rotary gear selector (75).19. Stability control (DSC & TracDSC) (90).20. Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) (81).21. Electric Parking Brake (EPB) (80).22. Progress control (97).23. Driving modes (90).24. Dual view (130) or Audio settings (109).25. SEAT COMFORT menu (141).26. Hazard warning lamps on/off.27. FRONT CLIMATE menu (136).28. Intelligent stop/start (72).29. NAVIGATION menu (165).30. PHONE menu (156).31. MEDIA menu (107).32. Surround camera system (153).33. Touch screen HOME menu (100).34. Touch screen on/off (100) or Park assiston/off (148).35. CD/DVD eject (107).36. Audio on/off and volume (107).37. Instrument menu controls (41).38. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (83).39. Cruise control (82).40. Horn/airbag.41. Steering column adjuster (22).42. Phone (159) and Voice controls (175).43. Heated steering wheel (22).44. Audio/video controls (108).45. Instrument illumination - rotate to adjust.46. Bonnet release (195).47. Fog lamps on/off.48. Luggage compartment release (65).49. Driving position memory (14).50. Central unlocking (6).51. Central locking (6).52. Mirror adjuster/powerfold mirror (56).53. Window controls (60).54. Rear window/rear sunroof blind isolator(60).280Controls overviewLFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015
RFOR REFERENCE ONLY 24.07.2015

Navigation menu